Skip to main content

Full text of "Motion picture handbook; a guide for managers and operators of motion picture theatres"

See other formats


^IUBRARY<7^      4^-UBRARYdJ^^ 


aweuniver% 


^.aojiTVD'jo'^    ^<W)jnv3io'^      '^^onysoi'^ 


^lOSANCEl^^ 


OQ 


,;55\EUNIVER% 


a;^10SANCEI^^ 


^^AHvaan-T^     ^omm^      -^mwm^ 


5jdEUNIVER5/A 


o 


^lUBRARYOc. 


^^EUNIVER%. 


%a3AiNn#> 


^lOSANCEl^^ 


^UONVSOl'^ 


"%Ja3AlNn-3WV^ 


^OFCAtlFOR^ 


^OFCAIIFOR^ 


jJJUBRARYOc, 


^tUBRARY©?^ 


j:OFCAUFO%^ 


^OFCAUF0«i(^ 


^^>uivHai># 


^^WEUNIVER%. 


A>:lOSANCEU-J-;> 


'^^DNVSOl'^       "^JBAINrt-lftV^ 


.\WEUNIVER% 


<riUDKVS(n^ 


^lOSANCElfj-^ 


5]aEUNIVER%       >^10SMEI%         ^^•UBRARYa<^       ^^-lIBRARYQc^ 


OS  * 


'•1  U-i         ■        ■  ■       - 

i  * 


i^^' 


^^WEUNIVERS/^ 


^lOSANCElfX^ 


«;5j\EUNIVERy/^ 

I 

CO 

=3 


^OFCAllFOff^ 


r//. 


s  ^ 


^lUBRARYO?. 
§  1  ii— '  ^ 

(J 

^OFCAUFOi?^^ 


4^1UBRARY<?A, 


'^^mmmv^ 


^OFCAUFO)?.]^ 


^t?Aavaani^ 


53i\EUNIVER% 


%33NVS01^ 
5^5JAEUNIVER%. 


■'»'       ^tUBRARY^?^ 


^^EUNIVER% 


^lOSAKCEl^^ 
o 


%jnV3J0^        "^J^UDNVSOl^      "^/JaBAINrt-JV!^ 


<5JAEUNIVER% 


'^<?Auvaani'^      ^j^13dkvso#    %iQAINn•3V^^ 


-S^lUBRARYQ^ 


^OFCAUFOff^ 


5S    /«^  I     1^    £ 


sy/i 


^      ^lOSANCEl^^ 


^HIBRARYQa        ^l-UBRARYQc, 

1(^1  i-U|7ii^ilT 


I 


M\imBs/A 


yt 


MOTION   PICTURE 

HANDBOOK 


A  Guide  for  

MANAGERS     AND     OPERATORS 
of  MOTION  PICTURE  THEATRES 

By  F.  H.  RICHARDSON 


Published  by 

THE     MOVING     PICTURE     WORLD 

125     EAST     23D     STREET 

NEW  YORK  CITY 


Copyright,  1910 

by 

World  Photo(!Rai>ihc  Pltblishino  Co. 


Entered  at  Stationers'  Hall 
I,ondon,  Eng. 


CONTENTS.  i 

K-  ,■  • 

THE    SOURCE    OF   THE    LIGHT.     ;Ci,0 

The  Current,  Direct  and  Alternating.  .  Definition  or  Elec- 
trical Terms.      How  to  Make  Calculations.      Rule  of  Thumb. 

WIRING. 

Insulation.  Permanent  Wiring.  Wire  Gauge  Table. 
Lamp  Consumption  Tables.  ■  Switches.  .  Switchboards.  >  Exit 
Light  Circuits.  Sta?:c  Switchboards.  Fuses.  Wire  Sys- 
tems. (  Scries  Multiple.  ■  High  Potential  Alternating  System. 
Meters. 

RESISTANCE    DEVICES. 
''  Rheostats.  '  Transformers.     Mercury  Arc  Rectifier.     Motor 
Generator  Sets. 

THE    OPERATING    ROOM. 
^  Fittings    for   Operating    Room.  '   Tools.  "   Operating    Room 
Switches.  '  The  Lamp.  *  The  Lamp  House. 

LENSES. 
Finding  the  Focal  Length  of  Lenses  and  Finding  the  Size 
Lens  Required  to  Project  a  Given  Size  Picture  at  a  Given 
Throw.  The  Spot.  The  Principles  of  Optical  Projection. 
The  Selection  of  a  Lens.  'Adjustment  of  Light.  Condenser 
Breakage.  ' 

CARBONS. 

Flow  Carbons  Are  Made.     Setting  the  Carbons.   ' 

THE    FILM. 

Proper  Care  of  Film.  '  Patching  Film.'  Wet  Film.  Remov- 
ing Emulsion.  Leaders.  Inspecting.  >  Film  Jumping.  >  How 
Film  Is  Made.     Speed.'  The  Throw.' 

MACHINE    HEADS. 

*  Cleaning  and  Oiling.  '  Repairing.  '  Adjusting  Intermittent 
Gear.'  Setting  the  Shutter,  etc. 

I  The  Edengraph.  ■  Edison.  Lubin.  Motiograph.  Pathe. 
Power's.     Standard. 

MISCELLANEOUS. 

The  Stereopticon.  Song  Slides.  Slide  Carriers.  Pedal 
Fire  Shutter.     Electric  Meters.     How  to  Read  Meters. 

The  Curtain.  Effect  of  Daylight  and  House  Lights  on  the 
Picture.  Illuminating  the  Auditorium.  Ventilation.  Seating. 
Music.     Bell  Wiring. 

LOCATION    AND    MANAGEMENT. 

Selecting  a  Theater  Location.  Selecting  a  Small  Town 
Location.  Employees.  Advertising.  Film  Service.  Changes. 
Tickets.       Vaudeville.       Travelogues    and    Other    Lectures. 


INDEX. 


AdjiistiiK'nt    of    Light     78 

Advertising   164 

Alternating    Current     3 

Alternating  System,  High    Potential    , 33 

Arc  Rectifier,   Mercury    51 

Auditorium  Illuminating   144 

Bell  Wiring   155 

Breakage  of  Condensers    79 

Calculations,  How  to  Make   8 

Carijons     82 

Carbon  Setting   86 

Carriers,    Slide    135 

Changes     166 

Circuits,   Exit   Light    25 

Condensers     65 

Condenser    Breakage    79 

Curtain,  The    142 

Daylight  and   House   Lights,   Effect  on   Picture 143 

Definition    of   Terms    7 

Direct    Current     3 

Dry  Film  Moistening,  to  Remove  Emulsion   99 

Edengraph   Machine    115 

Edison    Machine     117 

Employees     163 

Emulsion   Removing,  Moistening  Dry   Film    99 

Equipment,  General,  for  House 142 

Exit    Light    Circuits    25 

Film,  The    92 

Film,  How  Made  102 

Film   Image — Table    Showing   Size    of   on    Screen 80 

Film    Jumping    loi 

Film    Patching    97 

Film,  Moistening  Dry,  to  Remove  Emulsion 99 

Film,    Service    165 

Film,   Wet    99 

Finding  the  Focal  Length  of  Lenses  67 

Fittings  For  Operating  Room    56 

Focal   Length   of  Lenses,   to   Find 67-78 

Fuses    27 

General  House  Equipment  *. .  .  .  142 

Given  Size  Picture — to  Project  at  Given  Throw,  67,  69,  80,  105 

Heads,    Machine     106 

High   Potential,  Alternating  System    33 

iv. 


House  Lights  and  Daylight,  Effect  on  Picture 143 

How  Film  is  Made   102 

How  to    Make    Calculations    8 

Image   on   Screen,   Film   or  Stereo — Size  of 80-81 

Illuminating   the    Auditorium    144 

Insulation 10 

Lamp,    The 59 

Lamp  Consumption  Table    16 

Lamn    House    63 

Leaders,   Inspecting    100 

Lectures    and    Travelogues,     Illustrated 168 

Lenses     65 

Lenses,  Finding  the  Focal   Length  of   67-78 

Lenses,  Selection  of   TJ 

Lenses,  Table  of    69 

Light,  Adjustment   of    78 

Light    Circuits,    Exit    25 

Light,  Source  of 3 

Location  and   Management    159 

Location  For  Theater.  Selecting   159 

Location,  Selecting  a  Small  Town   162 

Making    Film    102 

Machines     115 

Edengraph    ; 115 

Edison     117 

Lubin    1 19 

Motiograph    120 

Pathe     124 

Power's    127 

Standard     130 

Machine    Heads    106 

Management  and  Location    159 

Meters,    Electric    35-138 

Meters,  How  to  Read 140 

Mercury   Arc    Rectifier    51 

Miscellaneous    Items    134 

Motiograph    Machine    120 

Moisteniner  Dry  Film  For  Removing  Emulsion    99 

Motor    Generator    Sets    52 

Multiple  Series   33 

Music     154 

Ooeratinsr  Room    54 

Operating   Room   Fittings    56 

Operating    Room,    Switches    58 

Optical   Projection,   Principles  of    75 

Patching  Film  97 

Pathe  Machine 124 

Picture.  Effect  of  Daylight  and  House  Lights  Upon .!'. '.  143 

Potential,    High ;    Alternating    System    33 

Power's    Machine     127 

Power's   Machine.  New  Model  No.  6. ..........",.'. .'.'..".  127 

Principles  of  Optical   Projection    75 

Projecting  a   Given   Size   Picture 67,  69,  80,  81,  105 


Rectifier,  Mercury  Arc   . 51 

Removing   Emulsion  by   Moistening  Dry   Film    99 

Resistance   Devices    36 

Rheostats    40 

Rule  of  Thumb    9 

Seating    151 

Series,    Multiple     23 

Service,    Film    165 

Setting   the    Carbons    86 

Size  of  Picture  at  a  Given   Throw 67,  69,  80,  81,  105 

Size   of  Image   on    Screen,    Film   or    Stereo 80-81 

.Shutter    Setting    1 1 1 

Slide  Carriers    135 

Slides,    Song    134 

Source  of  Light   3 

Speed     103 

Spot,    The    172 

Stage    Switchboards    26 

Stereopticon,   The    134 

Switchboards     23 

Switches     19 

Switches  for  Operating  Room   58 

Table  of  Lamp  Consumption   16 

Table  of   Lenses    69 

Table  of  Wire,  Underwriters    15 

Table  Showing  Size  of  Screen  Image — of  Stereopticon.  81 

Terms,  Definition  of  7 

Theater  Location,  Selecting   159 

Throw,  The   104 

Thumb   Rule    9 

Tickets     167 

Tools    57 

Transformers     49 

Vaudeville 168 

Ventilation    148 

Wire    Svstems    30 

Wire  Table,  Underwriters   15 

Wiring    10-12 

Wiring  For  Bells    155 

ADVERTISERS'    INDEX. 

Rausch  &  Lomb 177 

Rio  Carbons  (Chas.  L.  Kiewert) 178 

Edison   Kinematograph    179 

Electra  Carbons   (Hugo   Reisinger) 180 

Lang  Manufacturing  Company 177 

Lubin  Cineograph    181 

Motiograph    Machine    182 

Moving  Picture  World 186 

Pathe  Professional   Projector 183 

Power's   Camcragraph    184 

Standard  Machine    185 

vi. 


AUTHOR'S  NOTE. 

This  book  is  dedicated  to  the  motion  picture  operator 
as  a  token  of  appreciation  of  the  important  part  he 
plays  in  the  presentation  of  the  photoplay.  That  it  may 
be  helpful  in  hastening  the  day  of  perfect  motion  picture 
projection,  is  the  desire  of  the  writer,  and  he  trusts  that 
a  careful  perusal  of  its  pages  may  stir  the  ambition  and 
increase  the  ability  of  every  reader. 

F,  H.  Richardson. 

October,  1910. 


PUBLISHER'S  NOTE. 

The  remarkable  vogue  of  the  motion  picture  and  the 
rapid  strides  it  has  made  in  public  favor  as  an  entertain- 
ment and  educational  factor  has  had  its  drawbacks.  Chief 
am.ong  these  has  been  the  impossibility  of  securing  a 
sufficient  number  of  men  with  the  necessary  knowledge 
and  experience  to  fill  important  positions. 

The  Moving  Picture  World  has,  in  no  small  measure, 
contributed  to  the  success  of  the  picture  and  the  articles 
in  this  book  were  written  to  give  helpful  information  in 
regard  to  the  many  problems  that  may  arise  in  connec- 
tion with  the  duties  of  the  manager  and  operator.  With 
a  few  exceptions  the  articles  have  already  appeared  in 
the  Moving  Picture  World  but  they  have  been  revised 
and  amplified  and  are  herewith  presented  in  compact 
form  to  comply  with  popular  request. 

Mr.  Richardson  has  avoided  technical  terms  and  his 

plain  language  and  matter-of-fact  style  bespeaks  for  this 

book  the  same  degree  of  popularity  which  attaches  to  the 

Operators'  Column  which  he  still  conducts  in  the  pages  of 

The  Moving  Picture  World. 

October,  19 10. 


The  Source  of  the  Light. 


It  is  imperative  that  the  motion  picture  operator  should 
thoroughly  understand  the  electric  current  and  the  rules 
which  govern  its  action  under  any  given  circumstance  likely 
to  be  met  with  in  the  line  of  his  work.  It  is  not  enough 
that  he  know  that  a  few  certain  things  will  produce  certain 
results.  He  should  know  WHY  these  results  are  obtained; 
in  other  words,  he  should  understand  the  force  he  is  handling, 
and  understand  it  thoroughly  if  he  expects  to  obtain  the 
best  possible  results.  Moreover,  while  the  one  who  has  not 
an  elementary  knowledge  of  electricity  may  learn  to  handle 
the  current  with  very  good  results  under  one  certain  set  of 
conditions,  he  is  likely  to  be  practically  helpless  under  other 
and  different  conditions,  particularly  should  he  be  called  to 
"go  on  the  road,"  thus  being  obliged  to  "hitch  up"  on  different 
systems  of  wiring,  different  lighting  systems,  and  meet  with 
a  wide  range  of  voltage.  Also  the  man  who,  while  able  to 
get  fair,  or  even  good,  results  under  conditions  with  which 
he  is  familiar,  does  not  thoroughly  understand  the  force 
with  which  he  is  working  is  not  in  position  to  improve  re- 
sults already  obtained  through  the  medium  of  intelligent 
experiment.  He  must  perforce  depend  almost  wholly  on 
what  someone  else  tells  him  without  being  able  to  form  an 
opinion  as  to  whether  what  he  has  heard  is  likely  to  be  cor- 
rect or  incorrect. 

Good  light  is  of  prime  importance  in  picture  projection, 
and  the  one  who  is  able  to  produce  and  maintain  a  clear, 
silvery-white  spot  has  mastered  three-fourths  of  the  diffi- 
culties between  him  and  the  goal  of  good  operating. 

THE  CURRENT— DIRECT  AND  ALTERNATING. 

The  difference  between  direct  and  alternating  current  is 
simple,  once  it  is  understood. 

Direct  current  flows  constantly  in  one  direction,  so  that 
one    carbon    of   the   lamp   is    always    positive    and    the   other 


4  MOTION   PICTURE  HANDBOOK 

negative.     For  reasons  which  will  be  fully  explained  later, 
the  positive  carbon  must  always  be  above  and  the  negativ 
below  when  using  direct  current. 

Alternating  current,  on  the  other  hand,  flows  first  in  o^ 
direction   and   then   in   the  other,  this  being  caused  by  t 
peculiar  construction  of  the  generator  (dynamo).     The  ci 
rent  flows  one  way  for  a  time  varying  from  1-25  to  1-275 
a  second.     It  then  is  reversed,  flowing  in  the  opposite  diri 
tion  for  the  same  period  of  time.    These  two  periods  of  flo 
are  termed  a  "cycle."     To  make  this  term  more  clear:  sup- 
pose you  walk  across  a  room,  then  turn  and  walk  back  again. 
When  you  got  back  where  you  started  from  you  would  have 
completed  what  would  correspond  to  a  "cycle"  in  alternatin  . 
current.    Therefore  when  you  hear  "60  cycle"  current  spok' 
of  it  means  that  the  current  reverses  its  direction  120  tim   ^ 
per  second.     If  it  be  132  cycle  the  reversals  are  at  the  ra 
of  264  per  second,  etc.     In  a  two-pole  dynamo  the  curren  ' 
flows  in  one  direction  during  the  time  the  armature  makes 
one-half  of  a  revolution  and  in  the  opposite  during  the  other 
half,  so  that  one  complete  turn  of  the  armature  completes 
one   "cycle."     Modern   dynamos,   however,   have   more   than 
two  poles  (some  of  them  a  great  many  more),  thus  reduc- 
ing the  necessary  armature  speed  required  to  produce -a  given 
current  frequency.     ("Frequency"  means  the  number  of  cy- 
cles  per   second.)      All   dynamos,   direct   or   alternating,   are 
constructed  to  produce  a  certain  voltage,  and  the  machine 
designed  to  produce,  for  instance,  no  volts  could   not  and 
would  not  produce  220  volts  or  any  other  pressure  than  that 
named. 

With  alternating  current  each  carbon  of  the  lamp  is  alter- 
nately positive  and  negative.  This  has  a  very  decided  effect 
on  projection  light,  as  will  be  explained  later  on.  Many 
operators  claim  that  as  good  results  cannot  be  obtained 
from  alternating  as  with  direct  current,  but  this  is  not  true, 
though  it  is  somewhat  more  difficult  and  requires  more  cur- 
rent (amperes)  to  produce  results  equal  to  those  possible 
with  direct  current. 

Alternating  current  is  preferred  by  power,  and  many 
lighting  companies,  mainly  for  the  reason  that  it  can  be 
generated  at  high  tension  (voltage)  transmitted  to  the  place 
where  it  is  to  be  used  and  there  transformed    (reduced  to 


FOR    MANAGERS    AND    OPERATORS  5 

ower  voltage)  by  means  of  a  very  simple  arrangement, 
lown  as  a  transformer,  the  latter  requiring  very  little  care 

attention.    Also  this  current  is  just  as  readily  transformed 

m  a  low  to  a  high  voltage. 

'his  cannot  be  so  readily  done  with  direct  current.  ^  For 

eral  reasons  high  tension  direct  current  is  neither  so 
,   irable  or  commercially  practical  as  is  alternating. 

.  XOTR. — Those    who    wish    to    learn    more    about    this    matter    may    do   bo 
y    consnltlng    works    on    electricity    at    their    public    library.] 

Now  the  saving  lies  just  here:   high  tension  (high  voltage) 
•irrent  capable  of  performing  an  immense  amount  of  work 
n  be  transmitted  over  a  very  much  smaller  wire  than  can 
r      same  amount  of  electrical  energy  at  low  voltage.     It  is 
b  JANTITY    (amperes)    of   current    flowing,    not    pressure, 
•    ich     determines    the    size    of    wire    necessary.       One    (l) 
npere  at  2.000  volts  becomes  about  ten  (10)  amperes  after 
/t   has   been    transformed    down   to    no   volts    pressure.      By 
consulting  the  wire  table  (given  later  on)  you  will  find  that, 
while   a  very  small  wire  will   carry   three   amperes,  it  takes 
a  much  larger  one  to  carry  30  amperes.     Now  suppose  the 
current  must  be  conducted  one  mile  from  the  power  station, 
rf  the  tension  is  2,000  volts  the  current  may  be  brought  right 
tip  to  the  transformer   (usually  located   on  the  pole  nearest 
fo  where  the  current  is  to  be  used)  on  a  small  wire,  whereas 
if  it  were  generated  at  no  volts  it  must  be  carried  all  that 
listance  at  that  voltage,  thus  requiring  about  ten  times  the 
mperage.    Don't  you  see  the  immense  saving  in  wiring  cost? 
All  this  has  no  direct  bearing  on  operating  or  projection, 
)ut  is  explained   for  the   reason   that  the   writer  has  heard 
operators   compelled   to   handle   alternating   current   exclaim 
with   considerable   heat,   "What   do   they   generate   the    stuff 
for  anyhow?"    Then,  too,  the  operator  should  have  at  least 
some   understanding  of  these  matters,  and,  as   a  matter-of- 
fact,  the  more  general  knowledge  he  has  of  electrical  prac- 
tice the  better  for  him  and  his  employer. 

One  question  frequently  propounded,  and  which  seems 
to  puzzle  a  great  many  operators  who  seek  to  understand 
alternating  current  is:  "How  is  it  that  if  the  current  reverses 
its  direction  so  often  there  is  flow  sufFicient  to  maintain  an 
arcr  


6  MOTION   PICTURE   HANDBOOK 

This  is  very  simple,  when  one  stops  to  consider  the 
enormous  speed  of  the  electric  current.  This  speed  has  been 
variously  stated,  some  authorities  placing  it  as  high  as  that 
of  light.  With  this  in  mind  it  will  readily  be  seen  that,  in- 
finitesimal as  is  the  time  required  for  an  alternation  the 
current  will  pass  hundreds,  if  not  thousands,  of  times  entirely 
around  a  circuit  many  miles  in  length  during  that  period. 
Electric  speed  is  entirely  beyond  the  power  of  the  human 
mind  to  grasp  and  comprehend. 

Careful  experiment  has  proven  that  a  low  frequency  cur- 
rent is  most  economical  for  power  purposes,  25  to  30  cycle 
being  best.  On  the  other  hand,  the  high  frequency  current 
is  best  for  light.  Current  with  as  low  frequency  as  above 
named  will  not  do  for  light  at  all,  as  the  illumination  fur- 
nished by  it  is  flickery  and  unsteady.  It  has  been  found  that 
60  cycle  current  answers  fairly  well  for  both  purposes  and 
that  is  the  standard  being  adopted  by  practically  all  new 
commercial  plants  designed  to  furnish  both  light  and  power. 
Even  the  old  plants  originally  furnishing  very  high  or  very 
low  frequency  current  are  changing  their  generators  to  60 
cycle  machines,  so  that  is  the  alternating  current  you  will 
now  most  frequently  meet  with. 

Direct  current  needs  no  detailed  explanation.  Being  gen- 
erated in  the  dynamo  it  flows  out  on  one  (the  positive)  wire, 
performs  its  work  and  returns  to  the  dynamo  via  the  other 
("negative)  wire.  You  are  not  likely  to  have  to  cut  into  any 
high  tension  direct  current  systems  and  will  almost  invariably 
find  direct  current  to  be  at  a  pressure  of  no  volts,  except 
where  the  three-wire  system  is  used.  From  this  sysetm  (as 
will  be  explained  further  on)  you  can  get  either  no  or  220 
volts,  according  to  the  way  you  "hitch  up"  to  it. 

In  handling  steam  we  use  the  term  "pound'  to  denote 
pressure.  In  handling  water  its  volume  or  quantity  is  ex- 
pressed in  "gallons." 

Electricity  has  pressure  just  exactly  as  has  steam  in  a 
boiler,  but  this  pressure  is  expressed  in  "volts"  instead  of,  as 
in  steam,  in  pounds.  Electric  current  has  volum.e,  or  quanti- 
ty, just  as  has  flowing  water,  and  this  quantity  is  measured, 
or  expressed,  in  "amperes,"  instead  of  in  gallons,  as  is  the 
case  with  water. 


FOR    MANAGERS    AND    OPERATORS  7 

Fix  it  firmly  in  your  mind  that  the  term  "VOLT"  MEANS 
PRESSURE  and  nothing  else  but  pressure,  just  exactly  as 
pounds  means  pressure  in  a  water  pipe  or  a  steam  boiler, 
and  that  "AMPERES"  MEANS  VOLUME,  OR  QUANTI- 
TY, of  current  Howing,  exactly  as  gallons  would  mean  the 
•ciuantity  of  water  flowing  in  a  water  pipe. 

Electric  current  has  both  pressure  and  volume,  exactly 
the  same  as  has  water  in  a  watermain,  and  the  terms  volt 
and  ampere  mean  in  electrical  practice  precisely  the  same 
thing  as  do  pounds  and  gallons  when  applied  to  a  water- 
main  carrying  water  under  pressure. 

The  "ohm"  is  the  term  used  to  express  resistance  to  the 
passage  of  an  electric  current.  Current  in  passing  through  a 
wire  meets  with  resistance,  just  as  a  water  pipe  offers  re- 
sistance to  the  flow  of  water  through  friction.  This  resistance 
is  expressed  in  ohms. 

The  term  "Watt"  is  used  to  measure  the  amount  of  work 
performed  by  an  electric  current.  In  other  words,  it  means 
electro-motive  force  or  horsepower.  Merely  for  the  sake 
of  convenience  the  term  "kilo-watt"  is  much  used,  meaning 
1,000  watts.     A  watt  is  1/746  of  a  horsepower. 

DEFINITIONS  OF  TERMS. 

These  definitions  are  the  clearest,  simplest  the  writer  has 
been  able  to  discover  after  a  search  of  many  standard  works 
on  electricity.  He  believes  that  a  close  inspection  of  them 
will  enable  the  average  man  to  arrive  at  a  pretty  close  under- 
standmg  of  what  the  terms  really  mean.  At  any  rate  they 
cannot  be  put  in  simpler  language. 

VOLT:  The  practical  unit  of  electric  pressure,  or  electro- 
motive force.  The  pressure  required  to  move  one  ampere 
against  a  resistance  of  one  ohm.  The  electro-motive  force  in- 
duced in  a  conductor,  usually  an  armature  coil,  which  is 
cutting  100,000,000  magnetic  lines  (of  force)  per  second. 

AMPERE:  The  unit  of  electric  current  (quantity  or 
volume).  That  amount  of  current  which  can  be  driven  by 
a  pressure  of  one  volt,  the  unit  of  electric  pressure  or  electro- 
motive force,  through  one  ohm,  the  unit  of  electric  resistance. 
Such  a  rate  of  flow  of  electricity  as  would  transmit  one 
coulomb  per  second  (a  coulomb  is  defined  as  the  unit  of 
electrical   quantity.     That  quantity  of  current  which  would 


8  MOTION   PICTURE  HANDBOOK 

pass  in  one  second  through  a  resistance  of  one  ohm,  under 
a  pressure  of  one  volt.).  A  current  of  such  strength  as 
would  deposit  .005084  grains  of  copper  per  second.  The  unit 
rate  of  flow  per  second. 

[NOTE. — Some  writers  say  Uiat  the  term  amijcre  does  not  represeut 
quantity,  but  only  indicates  tUe  strengtli  of  tlie  current;  quantity  being* 
represented  in  coulombs,  which  means  the  quantity  passing  a  point  in  a 
given  time  (coulombs  equal  the  amperes  times  and  secouds).  Thij  is 
splitting  hairs  altogether  too  line  for  the  average  operator.  Technically 
the  above  statement  is  quite  true,  but  for  the  operator's  purpose  it  Is 
well   enough    to  say   that   amperes  represent  quantity.] 

OHM  (there  are  several  standards,  viz.,  the  Board  of  Trade 
Ohm,  English  Ohm,  British  Association  Ohm,  Legal  Ohm 
and  the  Standard  Ohm):  The  "Legal"  ohm  is  the  standard 
used  in  the  United  States,  and  it  is  defined  as  follows:  The 
resistance  of  a  column  of  mercury  (the  resistance  such  a 
body  of  mercury  would  offer  to  current)  106  centimeters  in 
length,  having  an  area  of  cross-section  of  one  square  milli- 
meter at  0  degrees  Centigrade  or  32  degrees  Fahrenheit.  This 
is  now  the  international  value  of  the  ohm. 

WATT:  The  unit  of  electrical  activity  or  power.  The 
number  of  watts  is  numerically  equal  to  the  amperes  times 
tile  voltage.  One  volt  times  one  ampere  equals  one  wait  or 
1/746  horsepower.    Sometimes  called  the  "Volt-Ampere." 

HOW  TO  MAKE  CALCULATIONS. 

Knowing  the  voltage  and  number  of  ohms  resistance  the 
number  of  amperes  flowing  may  be  determined  by  dividing 
the  volts  by  the  ohms;  as,  for  instance,  having  no  volts  pres- 
sure and  a  rheostat  offering  3  ohms  resistance  how  many 
amperes  will  we  get?  no  divided  by  3  equals  36  2/3,  the 
number  of  amperes.  Knowing  the  voltage  and  number  of 
amperes  flowing,  the  ohms  resistance  offered  may  be  deter- 
mined by  dividing  the  volts  by  the  amperes;  as,  for  instance, 
with  220  volts  pressure  and  40  amperes  flowing  how  many 
ohms  resistance  have  we?  220  divided  by  40  equals  5^/l>, 
the  ohms  resistance  offered  to  current  passage.  Knowing 
the  number  of  amperes  flowing  and  the  ohms  resistance  we 
may  find  the  voltage  by  multiplying  the  amperes  by  the 
ohms;  as,  for  instance,  if  we  had  3  ohms  resistance  and  were 
getting  30  amperes  of  current  we  would  find  the  pressure  by 
multiplying  30  by  3,  which  would  tell  us  the  voltage  was  90 


FOR    MANAGERS    AND    OPERATORS  9 

RULE  OF  THUMB. 

The  following  formula,  known  as  the  "Rule  of  Thumb,"  is 
correct  and  is  very  convenient  in  aid  of  memory.  In  this 
formula,  V  equals  volts,  A  amperes  and  O  ohms.  Re- 
membering that  it  is  expressed  as  a  fraction  and  that  the 
line  means  "divided  by"  and  that  with  the  upper  quantity 
eliminated  the  two  lower  should  be  multiplied  together,  just 
cover  up  the  quantity  desired  and  what  remains  will  equal 
the  quantity  covered  up.  For  instance:  I  wish  to  ascertain 
the  resistance,  knowing  the  amperage  and  voltage.  I  place 
my  thumb  over  the  "O"  and  see  that  V  divided  by  A  will 
give  it. 

V 


O    A 

To  find  the  watts  being  consumed  you  simply  multiply  the 
voltage  by  the  number  of  amperes  flowing;  as,  for  instance, 
we  have  30  amperes  at  no  volts.  How  many  watts?  no 
multiplied  by  30  equals  3,300  watts.  How  many  kilowatts 
is  that?  3,300  divided  by  1,000  equals  33/10  kilowatts. 
How  many  horsepower  is  it?  One  watt  is  1/746  of  a  horse- 
power, the'refore  3,300  watts  would  equal  3,300  divided  by  746 
or  4  and  158/^3  horsepower. 


10  MOTION   PICTURE   HANDBOOK 


Wiring. 


INSULATION. 

This  is  a  matter  of  the  UTMOST  IMPORTANCE  to 
which  too  little  attention  is  usually  paid.  In  too  many  in- 
stances current  bills  are  excessive  simply  for  the  reason  that 
there  are  unsuspected  current  leakages  due  to  faulty  insula- 
tion. By  this  it  is  not  necessarily  meant  that  the  wire  cover- 
ing is  faulty.  Insulation,  in  its  true  sense,  means  keeping  the 
current  from  contact  with  the  ground,  in  any  degree,  at  all 
points,  also  keeping  the  opposite  wires  of  a  circuit  from 
electrical  contact  with  each  other. 

We  confine  electricity  to  the  wires  by  insulation,  and  the 
higher  the  pressure  (voltage)  the  more  perfect  must  be  the 
insulation.  If  there  be  a  small  "pin-hole"  in  the  seam  of  a 
boiler  the  steam  will  still  be  confined  at  pressure  but  some 
of  it  will  be  escaping,  thus  causing  constant  waste.  If  there 
be  a  slight  imperfect  "ground"  (imperfect  connection  between 
the  earth  and  the  wire)  there  will  be  a  small  but  constant 
current  leakage,  which  will  tell  in  the  meter  and  therefore 
in  the  current  bill.  You  will  thus  readily  see  the  necessity 
for  very  carefully  insulating  your  wires.  Further  along  I 
will  tell  you  how  to  detect  grounds. 

Air  is  a  conductor  of  electricity,  but  a  very  poor  one.  It 
will  only  carry  current  at  enormous  voltage — far  in  excess 
of  anything  used  commercially,  with  the  single  exception  of 
wireless  telegraphy.  Air  may,  therefore,  be  said,  so  far  as 
commercial  electric  current  is  concerned,  to  be  an  absolute 
non-conductor,  and  it  follows  that  current  cannot  escape 
from  the  wires  by  way  of  the  air.  Certain  substances,  such 
as  rubber,  glass,  porcelain  and  others,  are  non-conductors  of 
electricity,  arid  by  stringing  the  wires  through  the  air,  allow- 
ing them  to  come  in  contact  with  nothing  but  non-conducting 
material,  the  current  is  confined  to  the  wire,  just  as  is  the 
steam  in  a  boiler  by  its  steel  plates  and  rivets.  Wires  are 
usually  covered  with  rubber  or  some  non-conducting  compo- 


FOR    MANAGERS    AND    OPERATORS  11 

sition,  thus  still  further  insuring  complete  insulation  and 
consequent  confinement  of  the  current. 

But  if  there  be  the  very  least  metallic  or  other  current- 
carrying  connection  with  the  earth  there  will  be  current  con- 
stantly escaping  from  the  lines,  and  this  means  waste  pure 
and  simple.  It  is  the  small  "ground"  (a  "ground"  is  a  cur- 
rent-carrying connection  between  the  wires  and  the  earth) 
that  is  dangerous  to  the  pocketbook.  If  connection  is  such  as 
to  carry  considerable  current  it  will  most  likely  manifest 
itself  by  heating,  and  may  burn  off,  but  the  small  ground 
is  different,  for  you  can't  see  it,  you  don't  have  any  visible 
evidence  that  it  is  there;  no  one  but  the  meter  knows  it 
exists,  but  all  the  same  it  works  night  and  day.  The  power- 
house man  may  know  of  it  through  his  ground  detector,  but 
he  won't  send  any  special  messengers  to  tell  you,  since  it  is 
constantly  adding  to  his  "bills  collectible." 

Be  very  careful,  therefore,  to  have  your  insulation  PER- 
FECT. 

Supposedly,  in  this  day  of  multiplicity  of  electrical  de- 
vices, nearly  every  one  understands  what  a  "short  circuit," 
familiarly  known  among  electricians  as  a  "short,"  is.  Never- 
theless I  will  explain  the  matter.  As  has  been  stated,  the 
constant  tendency  of  current  is  to  lower  its  own  pressure, 
just  as  steam  seeks  the  open  air  for  the  same  purpose.  The 
positive  wire  of  a  circuit  carries  the  full  dynamo  pressure, 
but  the  pressure  of  the  negative  wire  is  very  much  less. 
Current  will  therefore  flow  from  the  positive  to  the  negative 
the  instant  any  sort  of  current-carrying  connection  is  estab- 
lished. A  lamp  is  a  limited  short  circuit  between  the  positive 
and  negative,  limited  because  of  its  internal  resistance  which 
is  calculated  carefully  to  only  allow  a  certain  quantity  of 
current  passage.  A.  projection  arc  lamp  is  a  dead  short  cir- 
cuit when  the  carbons  are  closed,  but  the  short  is  controlled 
by  the  resistance  device  (rheostat  or  compensator)  placed 
in  series  with  it.  The  true  "short,"  however,  is  where  the 
two  wires  of  the  circuit  become  joined  through  contact  with- 
out any  such  controlling  device.  Such  a  short  may  be  by 
reason  of  the  two  wires  coming  in  direct  contact,  in  which 
case  the  fuses  will  blow  or  the  wires  heat  and  probably  burn 
off.  Fuses  are  supposed  to,  and  by  all  means  should,  be  small 
enough  to  blow  the  instant  such  a  short  is  established,  other- 


12 


MOTION   PICTURE   HANDBOOK 


wise  there  is  danger  of  the  heated  wires  causing  fire.  A  short 
may  be  caused  by  a  loose  wire  swinging  against  the  oppo- 
site conductor  or  being  carelessly  thrown  across  the  two. 
It  may  be  caused  by  some  poor  conductor  being  laid  across 
the  two  wires,  in  which  case  there  will  be  current  leakage 
until  it  is  removed,  and  this  leakage  will  represent  the  same 
waste  as  would  a  ground.  As  a  general  proposition,  how- 
ever, a  short  shows  itself  immediately  and  whatever  damage 
is  done  is  almost  instantaneous. 

WIRING. 

All  wires  used  in  inside  work,  and  most  of  those  used  for 
outside  as  well,  are  covered  with  either  rubber,  gutta-percha  or 
a  fibrous  covering  saturated  with  an  insulating  compound.  Such 
wires  may  touch  DRY  wood  without  likelihood  of  danger  but, 
on  general  principles,  should  not  be  allowed  to.  Wires  should 
never,  under  any  circumstances,  be  allowed  to  come  in  contact 
with  metal  which  has  any  kind  of  connection  with  the  earth  or 
which  reaches  (as  the  iron  sheeting  of  an  operating  room)  from 
one  wire  of  a  circuit  to  the  other.  In  saying  that  wires  should  not 
be  allowed  to  touch  metal  the  writer  is  fully  aware  that  modern 
electrical  wiring  allows  of,  in  fact,  in  some  cities,  requires  that 
wires  be  encased  in  metal  tubing,  both  wires  of  a  circuit  being 


FIG  1. 


placed  in  the  same  tube.  There  are  technical  reasons  why  this 
is  not  injurious.  There  are,  by  the  close  proximity  of  the  wires 
to  esch  other  and  to  the  conduit,  induced  currents  vihen  alter- 


FOR    MANAGERS    AND    OPERATORS 


13 


nating  is  used  but  one  current  neutralizes  the  other  so  that,  as 
a  matter  of  fact,  this  induced  current  is  not  recorded  by  the 
meter  nor  does  any  reach  the  earth  by  way  of  the  conduit,  unless 
the  wire  insulation  and  conduit  insulation  is  imperfect  allowing 
actual  contact  between  a  raw  wire  and  the  metal  of  the  conduit. 
A  technical  explanation  of  the  reasons  for  this  would  be  beyond 
even  the  average  electrician  and  will  therefore  not  be  given. 
Suffice  to  say  this  is  the  fact. 

In  running  your  house  or  operating  room  circuits  run  the  wires 
as  directly  as  possible,  stretch  them  tightly  and  fasten  them  se- 
curely to  porcelain  insulators,  types  of  which  are  shown  in  Fig.  i. 
It  is  best  to  keep  the  wires  of  a  circuit  not  less  than  2V2  inches 
or  3  inches  apart.  The  insulating  knobs  may  be  fastened  to  the 
wall  or  ceiling  either  by  nails  or  suitable  screws.  If  nails  are 
used  cut  out  a  circular  piece  of  heavy  leather  V2  to  %  inch 
in  diameter  and  drive  the  nail  through  it  first.  This  acts  as  a 
cushion  and  you  can  drive  the  nail  down  tight  on  the  head  of 
the  insulator  without  breaking  the  porcelain.    Allow  your  wires 


I — I  Porcelain  insulators. 

2  Rubber  tubing. 

3 — 4  Wires, 

5 — 5  Tape  to  hold  tubing  in  place. 


14  MOTION   PICTURE  HANDBOOK 

to  come  into  contact  with  absolutely  nothing  but  the  insulators 
except  as  hereafter  related.  To  pass  wires  through  a  wall  or 
floor  get  some  hard  rubber  insulating  tubing  from  an  electrical 
supply  house.  Bore  a  hole  as  large  as  the  outside  diameter  of 
the  tubing  through  the  wall  or  floor,  being  certain  that  the 
tubing  will  go  over  the  insulated  wire.  Run  your  wire  through 
the  hole  and  clip  on  the  tubing,  shoving  it  into  the  hole  so  that 
it  projects  slightly  on  either  side.  Pull  the  wire  tight  and  fasten 
it,  then  wrap  insulating  tape  tightly  around  the  end  of  the  tubing 
and  wire  on  both  sides  of  the  wall  to  prevent  its  slipping  out 
of  place.  Porcelain  tubes  may  be  used  instead  of  hard  rubber 
if  desired  (see  Fig.  2). 

If  the  wall  be  of  brick  take  a  piece  of  gas-pipe  and  file  saw 
teeth  notches  around  the  circumference  of  one  end.  Using  this 
as  a  drill  you  will  be  astonished  how  soon  you  can  pierce  a  hole 
through  the  wall. 

Bear  in  mind  that  this  work  is  not  designed  to  make  a  lineman 
of  you  but  merely  to  give  sufficient  direction  that  you  may  be 
able  to  run  a  circuit  properly  should  circumstances  be  such  that 
it  be  necessary.  On  the  road  an  operator  is  called  upon  to  do 
a  great  many  feats  and  frequently  if  he  can't  do  them  circum- 
stances are  such  that  they  cannot  be  done  at  all.  Moreover, 
I  wish  to  enable  the  operator  or  manager,  from  the  directions 
given,  to  be  able  to  form  at  least  an  intelligent  opinion  as  to 
whether  their  wiring  is  being,  or  has  been,  properly  done. 

Your  wires  should  be  selected  by  reference  to  the  wire  and 
lamp  current  consumption  tables  which  appear  a  little  further 
on.  It  is  generally  stated  that  "a  16  c.p.  incandescent  lamp  con- 
sumes V2  ampere  of  current."  This,  you  will  see  by  reference 
to  the  lamp  consumption  table,  is  very  wrong,  applying  only  to 
iio-volt  lamps. 

To  figure  the  size  of  wire  necessary  in  circuits  you  proceed 
as  follows:  Supposing  we  have  iio-volt  current  and  wish  to  in- 
stall a  circuit  to  carry  ten  16  candle-power  lamps.  By  reference 
to  the  lamp  consumption  table  we  find  that  each  iio-volt  16  c.p. 
lamp  will  require  %  ampere  of  current,  or  a  total  of  five  amperes. 
By  reference  to  the  wire  table  we  discover  that  a  No.  16  rubber 
covered  wire  will  carry  six  amperes,  leaving  a  one-ampere  mar- 
Hn,  so  we  select  this  size.  A  No.  18  weatherproof  wire  would 
carry  the  required  current  but  the .  underwriter's  rules  forbid 
an'^-thing  smaller  than  a  No.  16  wire  being  used  on  inside  work. 


FOR    MANAGERS    AND    OPERATORS  15 

In  using  this  table  we  must  remember,  however,  that  it  applies 
for  SHORT  LEADS  ONLY  (see  Table  No.  3).  As  the  length 
of  a  wire  increases  its  total  resistance  increases,  so  that  a  No.  16 
wire  would  not  convey  six  amperes  of  current  for  a  long  dis- 
tance without  drop  in  voltage  due  to  resistance.  If  the  lead  be 
long  a  larger  size  must  be  used  for  a  portion  of  the  distance. 
In  other  words,  if  your  lead  be  a  long  one,  it  will  be  necessary 
to  use,  for  a  portion  of  the  distante,  a  size  of  wire  capable  of 
carrying  something  more  than  the  amperage  indicated  in  the 
table,  else  there  will  be  "drop"  of  voltage  and  your  lamps  will 
not  burn  up  to  candle  power. 

The  following  table  gives  the  current  allowance  by  the  Na- 
tional Board  of  Fire  Underwriters- for  various  sizes  copper  wire, 
figured  on  a  non-heating  basis  and,  with  due  allowance  made  for 
long  leads,  it  will  meet  every  requirement  of  either  the  operator 
or  the  electrician. 


TABLE  NO.  I. 

Browne  &  Sharpe 

Rubber  Covered  Wire. 

Weatherproof  Wire. 

Gauge. 

Amperes. 

Amperes. 

No. 

18 

3 

5 

No. 

16 

6 

8 

No. 

14 

12 

16 

No. 

12 

17 

23 

No. 

10 

24 

32 

No. 

8 

33 

40 

No. 

6 

46 

65 

No. 

5 

54 

77 

No. 

4 

65 

92 

No. 

3 

76 

no 

No. 

2 

90 

131 

No. 

I 

107 

156 

No. 

0 

127 

I8S 

No. 

00 

150 

220 

No. 

000 

177 

262 

Note.— 

-The  discrepancy  in  allowance  between  rubber  covered 

and  weatherproof  wire  is  not  that  one  will  not  carry  just  as  much 

current  as  the  other 

,  but  arises  from  the  fact  that  the  least  heat- 

ing  will  ' 

cause  gradual  deterioration  of  rubber  insulation.     Wire 

with   rubber  insulat 

ion   is   therefore  rated 

very  low  in  current 

carrying 

capacity. 

16  MOTION   PICTURE   HANDBOOK 

LAMP  CONSUMPTION  TABLE. 
This  table  is  compiled  from  actual  tests  made  with  standard 
lamps  and  it  will  be  found  to  be  approximately  correct.  Used 
in  conjunction  with  the  wire  table  even  the  novice  may  figure 
out  what  size  wire  to  use  for  any  incandescent  circuit  not  ex- 
ceeding seventy-five  feet  in  length. 


TABLE  ^ 

10.  2. 

)ltage. 

C: 

mdle  Power. 

Amperes. 

Watts. 

52 

16 

1.04 

54-1 

52 

32 

2.08 

108.2 

100 

16 

.64 

64.0 

100 

32 

1.28 

128.0 

no 

16 

•  SI 

64.0 

no 

32 

1.16 

128.0 

Where  8  c.p.  lamps  are  used  in  decoration  two  of  them  equal 
one  16  c.p.  lamp  in  current  consumption. 

Light  frosted  or  ground  glass  globes  reduce  the  illuminating 
power  of  incandescent  lamps  by  about  12  per  cent.  The  average 
life  of  an  incandescent  lamp  is  about  800  hours  of  use.  Many 
will  burn  much  longer  and  some  much  less,  but  this  is  the  aver- 
age. Old  lamps  are  poor  economy  in  a  theater,  as  they  burn 
dim  and  destroy  the  illumination. 

TABLE  NO.  3. 
This  table  will  be  found  of  much  use  in  conjunction  with 
Table  No.  i.  As  has  been  said,  there  is  drop  in  voltage  in  long 
leads,  due  to  resistance.  This  table  gives  the  data  in  this  con- 
nection so  far  as  it  will  be  likely  to  be  of  the  least  use  to  the 
theater  man  or  operator. 


Voltage- 

52 

no 

292 

625 

370 

780 

473 

1000 

602 

1252 

749 

1575 

940 

1984 

n86 

2542 

1500 

3162 

1897 

3997 

2387 

5100 

Wire  No. 

Browne  &  Sharpe 

220 

Gauge. 

1247 

14 

1586 

13 

1957 

12 

2499 

II 

3175 

10 

3976 

9 

5012 

8 

6355 

7 

8032 

6 

lOIIO 

5 

FOR    MANAGERS    AND    OPERATORS 


17 


To  use  this  table  multiply  the  distance  in  feet  from  the  point 
of  departure  to  the  end  of  the  circuit  by  the  number  of  amperes 


riGS 


you  wish  to  use  on  the  circuit.  Look  in  the  table  under  the 
voltage  heading  corresponding  to  the  voltage  of  your  lines  and 
find  the  number  nearest  to  the  product  you  have  obtained  by 
the  multiplication.  Opposite  this,  in  the  right-hand  column,  will 
be  found  the  size  of  wire  necessary  to  carry  this  current  with 
3  per  cent.  loss. 

In  running  wires  along  a  wall  it  is  often  necessary  to  pass  a 
metal  pipe  which  the  knobs  will  not  be  long  enough  to  allow  the 
wires  to  clear.    This  should  be  taken  care  of  as  per  Fig.  3. 

A  is  hard  rubber  insulating  tubing.     B  is  the  pipe. 

Another  electric  wire  of  opposite  polarity  may  be  crossed  in 
the  same  manner.  A  joist  or  timber  may  be  passed  as  shown  in 
Fig.  4  or  the  wire  may  be  run  directly  through  it  by  insulating 
with  porcelain,  glass  or  hard  rubber  tubing. 

In  making  a  wire  splice,  or  joint,  it  is  of  the  utmost  importance 
that  it  be  done  right,  since  a  poorly  made  joint  will  invariably 
heat,  with  consequent  loss  of  power  and  liability  to  eventually 
burn  off.  Fig.  5  shows  some  of  the  ways  of  making  different 
joints  in  wire.  "A"  shows  the  right  and  wrong  way  to  skin 
a  wire.  If  done  as  at  1  you  are  likely  to  cut  a  slight  ring  around 
the  wire  and  this  will  cause  it  to  break  very  easily.  "B"  shows 
the  "Western  Union"  joint  which  is  most  used  by  wiremen.  In- 
variably use  two  plyers  in  making  this  joint  and  pull  it  up  per- 
fectly tight.     "C"  shows  the  proper  method  of  tying  a  wire  to 


18 


MOTION    PICTURE   HANDBOOK 


an  ins';latin£i  k.io!).     U;e  wire  (\vit!ic'.:t  removing  the  insulation) 
the  same  si;-,'  :..    the   line  yon   are   tying.     At  "D"  is  seen  the 


nci 


1 


^^SBfe^ess^ 


Qj 


> 


proper  me'.'-'d  cf  :r.:,!.;n2  a  splice  in  a  twin  wire.  When  the 
joint  is  done  i  and  2  should  be  wrapped  with  insulating  tape 
after  which  the  whole  length  from  which  the  outer  insulation 
has  been  removed  must  be  thoroughly  taped.  Twin  wires  (two 
insulated  wires  enclosed  in  one  outer  insulation)  should  be  used 
only  in  metal  conduits.  To  make  a  splice  in  a  flexible  cable  strip 
the  insulation  from  about  three  inches  of  each  end.  Clean  the 
strands  thoroughly  and  separate  the  wires  of  each  end  into 
about  four  equal  parts  two-thirds  of  the  way  back  to  the  in- 
sulation. Now  put  the  ends  together  so  that  the  strands  of 
each  end  will  come  between  each  other  and  wrap  them  down 
tight  and  solder. 

Before  making  a  wire  joint  always  CLEAN  THE  WIRES 
PERFECTLY,  scraping  them  until  they  shine.  It  is  impossible 
to  make  good  electrical  contact  unless  the  metal  is  perfectly 
clean.  After  making  a  wire  joint  always  cover  with  insulating 
tape  at  least   as  deep   as  the   original  insulation. 

To  solder  a  joint  first  heat  the  wires  with  a  gasoline  torch 
and  rub  on  a  soldering  compound,  which  may  be  had  in  stick 
form  from  electrical  supply  houses.  Then,  using  solder  wire, 
melt  sufficient  solder  by  holding  the  solder  to  the  joint  and 
playing  the  flame  on  it  to  thoroughly  fill  the  splice.  Care  should 
be  had  not  to  heat  the  wires,  especially  if  small  ones,  too  hot, 
as  it  has  a  tendency  to  weaken  them.  Those  who  cannot  secure 
soldering  compound  may  make  a  flux  as  follows :  Saturated  so- 
lution of  zinc  chloride  5  parts,  alcohol  4  parts  and  glycerine  i 
part.  A  well-made  joint  may  be  used  temporarily  without  solder- 
ing, but  a  permanent  joint  should  ALWAYS  BE  SOLDERED. 


FOR    MANAGERS    AND    OPERATORS  19 

Before  leaving  this  branch  of  the  subject  of  wiring  I  will  tell 
you  how  to  figure  the  resistance  of  wires.  You  probably  will 
never  need  to  use  the  rule,  but  for  the  sake  of  completeness  I 
will  supply  the  information.  Electrical  calculations  having  to 
do  with  wires  are  based  on  the  "circular  mil."  The  term  really 
means  the  cross  section  of  a  circle  i-iooo  of  an  inch  in  diameter. 
The  resistance  of  a  commercial  copper  wire  having  a  length 
of  one  foot  and  a  cross  section  of  one  mil  is  10.8  ohms.  This 
resistance  increases  as  the  length  increases  and  decreases  as  the 
cross  section  increases.  In  other  words,  the  longer  the  wire  the 
more  resistance,  and  the  larger  it  is  the  less  resistance  it  offers 
to  a  given  current.  To  find  the  resistance  any  copper  wire  will 
offer  you  simply  multiply  its  length  in  feet  by  10.8  and  divide 
the  product  thus  obtained  by  the  number  of  circular  mils  the 
wire  contains.  To  turn  this  rule  to  practical  account  we  must 
go  further.  To  find  the  size  wire  necessary  to  transmit  any 
given  current  a  given  distance  with  a  certain  percentage  of  loss 
proceed  as  follows :  Multiply  the  number  of  amperes  by  the  total 
number  of  feet  of  wire  in  both  legs  of  the  circuit  and  multiply 
this  by  10.8.  Multiply  the  voltage  by  the  percentage  of  loss  you 
propose  to  allow  and  divide  one  product  by  the  other  and 
the  result  will  be  the  area  of  the  required  wire  in  circular 
mills. 

B.  &  S.  Gauge. 

No.   16  wire  has  an  area  of     2,583  c.  m. 

No.  14  wire  has  an  area  of     4,107  c.  m. 

No.  10  wire  has  an  area  of  10,380  c.  m. 

No.     8  wire  has  an  area  of  16,510  c.  m. 

No.     6  wire  has  an  area  of  26,250  c.  m. 

No.     4  wire  has  an  area  of  41,740  c.  m. 
The  above   table    contains   all   the   sizes   of   wire   likely   to 
be  used  in  an  ordinary  theater. 

SWITCHES. 

Those  attempting  to  pass  an  examination  will  find  it  quite 
essential  to  know  considerable  about  switches,  especially  the 
correct  names  of  those  in  most  common  use.  To  this  end 
illustrations  of  some  of  them  are  incorporated.  Fig.  6  shows 
a  single  throw,  double  pole  knife  switch  such  as  is  almost 
invariably  used  for  light  circuit  service  switches,  also  for 
the   projection   arc   lamp   circuit.     This   is   the   switch   most 


20 


MOTION  PICTURE  HANDBOOK 


commonly  encountered,  but  it  comes  in  many  forms.  The 
"snap"  switches  which  are  enclosed  in  a  small,  round  metal 
case  and  operate  with  a  button  are  one  form  of  this  switch. 
A,  Fig.  6,  is  arranged  for  link  (A,  Fig.  lo)  and  B  for  cartridge 
(Fig.  9)  fuses.  Fig.  7,  A,  shows  the  triple  pole,  single  throw 
knife  switch;  Fig.  7,  B,  the  single  pole,  single  throw  knife 
switch,  and  Fig.  7,  C,  the  double  pole,  double  throw  knife 
switch.  Fig.  7,  A,  is  arranged  to  carry  cartridge  fuses  (Fig. 
9),  while  Fig.  7,  B  and  C,  must  have  link  fuses  (A,  Fig.  10) 
or  plain  fuse  wire. 


Where  a  switch  is  made  with  two  sets  of  contacts,  as  in 
C,  Fig.  7,  so  that  it  may  be  thrown  clear  over  making  another 
contact  on  the  other  side,  it  is  called  a  "double-throw" 
switch;  otherwise  it  is  a  "single-throw." 

Taking  A,  Fig.  6,  as  an  example:  the  wires  attach  to  bind- 
ing posts  1-2-3-4,  being  intended,  in  this  case,  to  be  soldered 
into  the  lugs  (called  "Terminals")  shown.  These  lugs  are 
by  no  means  necessary,  however,  as  the  wires  may  be  attached 


FOR    MANAGERS    AND    OPERATORS  21 

directly  to  the  switch  binding  posts.  C-C  are  the  switch 
"contacts."  The  fuses  attach  between  binding  posts  a-a  and 
b-b,  this  switch  requiring  the  use  of  link  fuses  (A,  Fig.  lo) 
or  plain  fuse  wire.  B,  Fig.  6,  is  arranged  for  cartridge  fuses, 
such  as  are  shown  in  Fig.  g.  B,  Fig.  6  and  A,  Fig.  7,  shows 
cartridge  fuses  in  place. 

Switches  should  invariably  be  mounted  on  slate,  porcelain 
or  other  insulating  base,  slate  being  the  most  common  mate- 
rial for  this  purpose.  Tt  is  important  that  contacts  c-c.  Fig.  T. 
6,  be  kept  clean  and  smooth.  They  will,  where  strong  current 
is  used,  become  roughened  in  course  of  time,  due  to  arcing 
when  the  switch  is  opened.  This  may  be  smoothed  off 
with  a  fine  file,  but  if  the  contacts  are  charged  at  the  time 
you  must  stand  on  an  insulating  mat  or  a  wooden  chair 
while  doing  it  and  avoid  touching  both  contacts  at  once,  or 
anything  which  will  ground  you,  or  you  will  get  a  shock. 
Live  wires  may  be  handled  with  impunity  provided  you  are 
completely  insulated  from  the  ground  and  don't  touch  bcmh 
wires  at  the  same  time. 

A  dry  wooden  chair  insulates  you  for  ordinary  voltages. 
An  asbestos,  rubber  or  lineoleum  mat  does  the  same.  There 
is  no  danger  from  an  ordinary  shock  from  lines  charged  up 
to  220  volts,  though  you  can  get  a  "jolt"  that  will  make  you 
take  very  decided  notice.  Also  it  is  possible  to  be  painfully 
burned  by  even  that  voltage,  though  such  a  thing  is  very 
tmlikely  to  occur.  The  point  T  wish  to  make,  however,  is 
that  you  may  touch  and  work  with  a  "live"  switch  contact  or 
wire  when  necessary  by  exercising  care  in  keeping  yourself 
insulated. 

SWITCHES  SHOULD  INVARIABLY  BE  MOUNTED 
EITHER  HORIZONTALLY  OR  SO  THAT  THE 
SWITCH  HANDLE  WILL  HANG  DOWNWARD  WHEN 
THE  SWITCH  IS  OPEN.  This  is  of  importance,  since  if 
mounted  the  other  way  there  is  always  liability  of  the  switch 
lever  accidentally  falling  into  place,  thus  closing  the  switch, 
which  might  cause  you  to  get  some  unpleasant  shocks,  and  even, 
under  certain  circumstances,  do  other  and  much  worse  dam- 
age. 

The  fuse  end  of  the  switch  (where  the  fuse  is  attached 
i!o  the  switch  base)  should  always  be  the  "dead"  end.  That 
is  to  say:  binding  posts,  i  and  2,  Fig.  6,  A,  should  be  the 


22 


MOTION    PICTURE   HANDBOOK 


"live"  end,  and  not  posts  3  and  4.  The  "live  end"  means  the 
end  attached  to  the  supply,  the  other  end  being  "dead"  (not 
charged)  when  the  switch  is  open.  In  the  case  of  the  oper- 
ating room  arc  lamp  switch  the  live  end  would  be  attached  to 
the  wires  coming  from  the  main  house  switchboard.  In  the 
main  house  switch  it  would  be  the  end  attached  to  the  wires 
entering  the  building. 


FIG.  7         B. 

Contacts  d-d,  Fig.  6,  must  be  kept  as  tight  as  may  be 
without  unduly  binding  the  action  of  the  switch.  Unless 
these  contacts  are  kept  snug  they  will  heat  more  or  less, 
moreover  the  switchbars  will  "wabble"  and  won't  strike 
contacts  c-c  squarely  when  closing.  Always  keep  the  con- 
nections between  the  handle  crossbar  (e,  Fig.  6)  tight.  A 
loose,  wabbly  switch  indicates  a  slovenly  workman.  In  pur- 
chasing switches  LOOK  CAREFULLY  TO  THE  LAST 
NAMED  CONNECTIONS.  In  some  makes  of  switches  this 
joint  is  very  poorly  made  and  causes  constant  trouble,  par- 
ticularly in  the  smaller  switches. 

INVARIABLY  OPEN  A  SWITCH  WITH  A  QUICK 
JERK,  especially  if  it  be  one  carrying  heavy  current.  This 
reduces  the  arcing.  Arcing  roughens  and  injures  the  con- 
tacts and  the  less  there  is  of  it  the  better. 


FOR    MANAGERS    AND    OPERATORS 


23 


Triple  pole  switches  are,  of  course,  used  only  on  the  three- 
wire  system.  A  switch  enclosed  in  a  casing  of  sheet  metal 
is  called  an  "enclosed  switch." 

SWITCHBOARDS. 

It  is  not  designed  to  go  deeply  into  this  subject,  but  merely 
to  give  you  some  ideas  from  which  you  will  be  able  to  trace 
out  ordinary  switchboard  connections  for  yourself.  In  most 
theaters  where  there  is  a  switchboard  it  will  be  found  ar- 
ranged about  as  Fig.  8,  A  or  B.  ^ 

A,  Fig.  8,  is  a  two-wire  board,  a-a  being  the  feeding  mains, 


FIG.  6 

b-b  the  fuses,  c  the  main  house  switch  and  d-d-d-d-d-d-d-d-d-d 
the  circuit  service  switches.  The  two  rows  of  circles  are  the 
circuit  fuses,  being  of  the  "plug"  variety,  (B,  Fig.  lo).  Look- 
ing closely  you  will  see  screw  heads  in  the  face  of  the  bars. 
These  screws  indicate  the  contacts,  circuits  being  run  in 
either  direction  from  each  contact.  As  tothe  two-wire  board, 
I  do  not  believe  any  explanation  is  necessary;  but  the  three- 
wire  board  is  more  confusing,  though  it  is  quite  simple  after 
all.  Now  an  examination  shows  us  that  the  first  circuit  has 
contact  with  the  right  hand  and  neutral  bars,  as  has  also  the 
next  one,  which  means  that  these  four  circuits  (there  are 
two  circuits  to  each  contact,  if  all  are  working)  are  on  one 
"side."    The  next  two,  however,  we  find  to  have  contact  with 


24  "  MOTION   PICTURE  HANDBOOK 

the  neutral  and  the  left  hand  bar,  which  means  that  they  are 
connected  with  the  opposite  side.  Thus  far,  if  the  circuits 
are  all  working  and  have  equal  number  of  the  same  candle 
power  lamps  the  board  is  equally  "balanced."  The  next,  or  top 
circuit,  however,  wc  find  to  be  connected  to  the  neutral  and 
the  right  hand  bar  so  that  there  are  three  contacts  with  six 
circuits  on  one  side  and  two  contacts  with  four  circuits  on  the 
other.  COUNTING  THE  SCREW  HEADS  IN  EITHER 
OUTSIDE  BAR  WILL  TELL  YOU  THE  NUMBER  OF 
CONTACTS  THERE  ARE  ON  THAT  SIDE.  One  side  of 
ALL  circuits  are  connected  to  the  neutral  (center)  bar.  To 
lind  which  side  a  circuit  is  connected  to,  disregard  the  screw 
heads  in  the  center  bar  and  find  the  screw  connecting  it  to 
the  outer  bar.  This  will  show  you  which  side  it  is  on.  These 
two  illustrations  are  given  that  you  may  study  them  closely. 
Large  switchboards  are  very  confusing,  but  as  a  matter  of 
fact  they  are  extremely  simple.  Remember  that  the  light 
circuit  running  from  a  three-wire  board  HAS  BUT  TWO 
WIRES,  NOT  THREE.  Remember,  also,  that  a  circuit  can 
be,  and  usually  is,  run  each  way  from  a  switchboard  con- 
tact; in  other  words,  each  contact  usually  carries  two  separate 
and  distinct  circuits. 

Pulling  switch  c  kills  the  whole  board,  of  course,  and  ex- 
tinguishes every  light  it  controls.  Blowing  a  fuse  on  the 
two-wire  board  has  the  same  effect,  except  that  the  wires 
will  still  be  alive  in  the  sense  that  a  shock  will  be  had  if 
you  touch  them.  Fuse-blowing  on  the  three-wire  board  is 
more  complicated,  however.  If  one  of  the  outer  fuses  blows 
the  lights  on  the  circuits  connected  to  that  side  will  go  out, 
but  those  on  the  other  will  still  burn.  If  the  central  (neutral) 
fuse  blows  out  there  will  be  no  effect  at  all  provided  the 
board  is  evenly  balanced — has  an  equal  number  of  candle 
power  on  each  side.  This  is  by  reason  of  the  fact  that  under 
these  conditions  there  is  no  current  in  the  neutral  wire  at 
all,  the  lamps  of  the  two  sides  burning  in  series  with  each 
other.  If,  however,  there  be  a  greater  candle  power  on 
one  side  than  on  the  other  there  is  curent  flowing  in  the 
neutral  wire  equal  to  the  difference  and  if  the  neutral  fuse 
blows  the  side  having  the  lesser  candle  power  will  burn  above 
candle  power  until  the  fuse  is  reinstalled.  This  is  the  practical 
effect  of  the  blowing  of  a  neutral  fuse  since  the  even  balanc- 


FOR    MANAGERS   AND    OPERATORS  25 

ing  of  a  three-wire  system  is  seldom  accomplished,  though  it 
might  be  balanced  evenly  enough  on  one  board  to  show  no 
perceptible  effect  through  the  blowing  of  a  neutral  fuse.  The 
reasons  for  the  installation  of  three-wire  systems  will  be 
explained  under  "Wire  Systems"  further  on. 

The  main  house  switchboard  should  invariably  be  mounted 
on  slate,  marble  or  other  insulating,  non-combustible  mate- 
rial and  the  whole  board  should  be  enclosed  in  a  metal 
cabinet  with  a  door  having  a  substantial,  easily  manipulated 
latch.  If  the  board  is  of  considerable  size  it  should  be  placed 
in  charge  of  some  competent  man  and  none  other  be  allowed 
to  touch  it.  The  fuses  of  all  circuits,  except  the  stage,  exit 
and  operating  room  arc  lamp  circuits  should  be  located  on 
the  main  switchboard. 

The  proper  place  for  the  main  house  switchboard  is  the 
lobby,  preferably  at  a  point  from  whence  a  view  of  the  stage, 
or  curtain,  may  be  had.  The  writer  considers  it  exceedingly 
good  practice  to  have  the  main  switchboard  equipped  with 
two  main  switches,  as  follows:  The  main  house  switch  which 
pulls  everything  except  the  exit  lamps  and  a  sub-main  switch 
which  pulls  all  lights  it  is  desired  to  extinguish  to  darken 
the  auditorium,  with  the  exception  of  one  circuit  handled  by 
the  operator  as  afterward  explained.  Darkening  the  audi- 
torium by  pulling  half  a  dozen  circuits  one  after  another 
makes  a  very  bad  effect.  This  switch  should  not  prevent  the 
installation  of  all  the  regular  circuit  switches  but  be  supple- 
mental to  them.  This  applies  to  large  houses  only,  where 
there  are  several  auditorium  circuits.  On  large  switchboards 
it  is  well  to  label  all  switches  plainly,  indicating  just  what 
circuit  they  control,  thus:  "Proscenium,"  "Ceiling  Clusters," 
etc.,  etc. 

EXIT  LIGHT  CIRCUITS. 

In  some  cities  it  is  required  that  exit  lights  be  operated 
with  non-explosive  oil  burned  in  suitable  lamps.  If  electric 
light  is  allowed  for  exit  lamps  the  circuit  should  in  all  cases 
be  controlled  from  the  box  office,  never  from  the  main 
switchboard,  and  this  circuit  should  in  no  case  be  controlled 
by  the  main  house  switch.  There  is  no  telling  what  a  nervous 
man  will  do  when  excited.  He  might  pull  the  main  house 
switch   at  an  alarm  of  fire,   thus   throwing   everything,   in- 


26  MOTION   PICTURE   HANDBOOK 

eluding  the  exit  lights,  in  darkness.  Tap  in  your  exit  light 
circuit  ahead  of  the  main  house  switch  (i.  e.,  between  the 
switch  and  the  street  mains)  and  run  it  directly  to  a  switch 
located  in  the  box  office,  where  proper  fuses  should  be  in- 
stalled. Thence  run  the  service  wires  to  the  various  exit 
lamps.  Exit  lamps  should  be  enclosed  in  a  box  with  ground 
glass  front  on  which  the  word  "EXIT"  has  been  blocked  out 
in  translucent  red,  the  letters  not  less  than  five  inches  in 
height.  These  signs  should  be  placed  over  all  exits  and  the 
lights  in  them  be  kept  burning  at  all  times  when  an  audience 
occupies  the  auditorium. 

It  is  desirable  that  one  of  the  auditorium  circuits,  prefer- 
ably the  ceiling  lights,  be  controlled  from  the  operating 
room,  as  well  as  from  the  main  switchboard.  This  is  ac- 
complished by  running  the  circuit  service  wires  from  the 
main  switchboard  service  switch  through  the  operating  room, 
bringing  them  past  a  position  on  the  wall  DIRECTLY  IN 
FRONT  OF  THE  OPERATOR  and  in  easy  reach  from 
operating  position.  Install  a  sub-service  switch  so  that  the 
operator  can  reach  both  it  and  the  dowser  at  the  same  tirne. 
Now  when  the  signal  is  given  the  operator  to  start,  all  the 
circuits  except  that  controlled  by  him  are  pulled  from  the 
main  switchboard.  The  operator,  when  ready  to  start,  pulls 
the  above  described  switch  with  one  hand  as  he  pulls  the 
dowser  or  starts  the  machine  with  the  other.  The  effect  is 
to  darken  the  house  and  throw  the  picture  at  one  and  the 
same  instant.  In  stopping  the  order  is  reversed  and  the  pic- 
ture is  off  and  the  lights  on  simultaneously.  It  is  NOT  ad- 
visable to  have  all  circuits  handled  thus,  since  the  man  at 
the  main  switchboard  should  be  able  to  light  the  auditorium 
instantly,  in  casie  of  alarm,  which  he  could  not  do  were  all 
circuits  controlled  by  an  operating  room  switch,  until  the 
operator  threw  in  his  switch.  The  main  switchboard  service 
switch  of  the  circuit  controlled  by  the  operator  is  not  touched 
at  all — is  left  shut  at  all  times  except  when  the  house  is 
closed. 

STAGE  SWITCHBOARDS. 

Stage  switchboards  should  all  be  assembled  at  one  point, 
preferably  just  to  the  right  of  the  proscenium  arch — the  right 
as  you  face  the  auditorium  from  the  stage — and  mounted  on 


FOR    MANAGERS    AND    OPERATORS  27 

insulating,  non-combustible  material.  Each  circuit  must  have 
its  own  service  switch,  as:  "ist  border,"  "2d  border,"  "Foots," 
etc.,  etc.,  and  each  switch  should  be  plainly  labeled  with  the 
name  of  the  circuit  it  controls.  NOTHING  BUT  EN- 
CLOSED FUSES  SHOULD  BE  ALLOWED  ON  A 
STAGE  UNDER  ANY  CIRCUMSTANCES.  Plug  fuses  (B, 
Fig.  10)  or  cartridge  fuses  (Fig.  9)  are  proper  fuses  for  stage 
use.  Great  care  should  be  taken  to  have  all  binding-post  con- 
tacts and  wire  joints  tight  to  prevent  any  heating,  and  espe- 
cial care  must  be  had  that  the  insulation  of  wires,  switches, 
etc.,   is   perfect. 

FUSES. 

As  has  been  stated,  the  electric  current  generates  heat  by  elec- 
trical friction  as  it  passes  through  the  wires.  A  short  circuit, 
ground  or  overload,  might  cause  such  large  quantities  of  current 
to  flow  as  would  heat  the  conductor  red  hot,  thus  causing  in- 
numerable fires,  or  an  excess  of  current  might  burn  out  large 
numbers  of  incandescent  filaments  were  it  not  for  the  protection 
aflforded  by  what  is  called  the  "fuse."  This  latter  is  a  short 
piece  of  soft  metal  possessing  very  high  conductivity  (current 
carrying  capacity),  but  which  fuses  (melts)  at  about  the  same 
temperature  as  does  lead,  of  which  metal  it  is  largely  com- 
posed. Hence,  inserting  a  short  piece  of  fuse  wire  in  a  circuit 
protects  both  lamps  and  wires  from  excess  of  current  since  the 
instant  the  current  flow  increases  above  the  capacity  of  the  fuse 
it  "blows  out"  (melts),  thus  automatically  breaking  the  circuit 
and  stopping  all  flow  of  current  until  a  new  fuse  has  bt-en  in- 
stalled, which  cannot  be  done  until  the  cause  of  excess  has  been 
removed.  It  follows,  however,  that  the  size  of  fuse  used  on  any 
given  circuit  must  be  proportionate  to  the  current  used  on  that 
circuit.  To  install  a  six-ampere  fuse  on  a  circuit  carrying  but 
three  amperes  would  not  protect  the  wires  except  to  a  lim- 
ited extent,  the  lamps  practically  not  at  all.  To  install  a 
fuse  of  greater  carrying  capacity  than  the  wires  it  is  designed 
to  protect  would  be  almost  as  bad  as  installing  none  at  all.  It 
is  not  desirable,  however,  to  put  in  fuses  barely  large  enough  to 
carry  the  ciirrent  flow  of  a  given  circuit,  since,  if  this  is  done, 
there  is  likely  to  be  excessive  and  needless  blowing  of  fuses, 
but  it  must  be  borne  in  mind  that  fuses  ordinarily  will  carry 
about  20  per  cent,  overload.     In  the  smaller  fuses  it  is  well  to 


28 


MOTION   PICTURE  HANDBOOK 


allow  just  a  little  leeway  over  even  this,  but  not  too  much. 
Use  common  sense  and  judgment.  The  lamps  and  wires  must 
be  fully  and  adequately  protected,  still  there  is  such  a  thing  as 
excess  of  caution.  The  writer  knows  of  nothing  in  this  wide 
world  not  capable  of  being  overdone.  The  novice  will  do  well 
to  proceed  carefully  in  this  matter,  however,  until  he  knows 
just  exactly  what  he   is   doing.     He  would  better  be  too  safe 


Fig  0. 


Fi§.  iQ 


FOR   MANAGERS   AND    OPERATORS  20 

than  not  safe  enough.  In  time  he  will  learn  just  how  far  he 
may  go  without  encountering  the  danger  signal.  There  are 
several  types  of  fuses  in  common  use  besides  plain  fuse  wire, 
which  latter  is  simply  attached  between  the  binding  posts  the 
same  as  you  would  a  piece  of  copper  wire.  Before  going  further, 
let  me, caution  you  on  one  point:  never,  under  any  circum- 
stances, put  a  piece  of  copper  wire,  or  anything  else  but  the 
proper  size  fuse,  in  place  of  a  fuse  that  has  blown  out!  Have  an 
ample  supply  of  extra  fuses  at  all  times.  When  a  fuse  on  an 
incandescent  circuit  blows  out  it  is  a  pretty  certain  indication 
that  something  is  wrong..  If  you  install  another  and  it  blows 
as  soon  as  you  close  the  switch  you  may  begin  to  hunt  for  a 
ground  or  short  circuit  at  once. 

Fig.  9  shows  two  types  of  what  is  commonly  known  as  "cart- 
ridge" fuses.  These  are  reliable,  quickly  and  easily  installed 
and  emit  no  visible  flash  when  they  blow  out.  They  are  in 
every  way  excellent.  Fig.  10,  A,  shows  the  "Link"  fuse,  which 
is  installed  by  simply  compressing  the  hooks  under  the  binding 
post  screws.  This  type  is  an  excellent,  inexpensive  operating 
room  fuse.  Fig.  10,  B,  shows  the  "plug"  fuse  and  receptacle, 
the  whole  being  commonly  known  as  a  "plug  cut-out."  This 
form  of  fuse  is  in  very  general  use  and  is  most  excellent  for 
circuits  of  moderate  capacity,  say  not  exceeding  ten  amperes. 
For  heavier  current  better  use  one  of  the  other  types,  though 
the  plugs  are  made  to  carry  as  much  as  fifty  amperes.  They 
are  easily  and  quickly  installed,  and  the  contacts  are  excellent. 
Be  sure,  however,  that  you  screw  the  plug  in  tight.  There  is 
no  possibility  of  fire  from  this  type,  as  the  fuse  wire  is  entirely 
enclosed  by  the  brass,  or  mica,  cap.  Switches  may  be  had  with 
this  type  of  fuse  receptacle  if  desired.  All  things  considered, 
this  type  is  perhaps  best  to  install  on  your  switchboard  unless 
you  care  considerably  about  extra  fine  appearance,  in  which  case 
Fig.  9  style  might  be  preferred.  Plug  and  cartridge  fuses  are 
the  only  ones  which  should  be  allowed  on  a  stage. 

The  operating  room  projection  lamp  circuit  is  a  thing  to  itself. 
It  is  subject  to  heavy  and  frequent  fluctuations  of  current  and 
must  be  fused  accordingly.  There  is  absolutely  nothing  about  a 
projection  arc  lamp  which  momentary  excess  of  current,  within 
reasonable  limits,  can  in  the  least  injure.  The  writer  uses  No.  6 
wire  for  his  operating  room  projection  circuit  and  fuses  with 
fifty    ampere    fuses.      He    has    never    experienced    the    slightest 


30  MOTION   PICTURE   HANDBOOK 

trouble  through  so  doing.  Of  course,  where  lighter  wires  are 
used,  a  smaller  fuse  must  be  installed.  A  good  rule  is  "fuse 
ten  amperes  over  the  current  you  pull  under  normal  conditions." 
Be  careful,  however,  that  the  main  house  fuses  (fuses  attached 
to  main  house  switch)  are  equal  in  capacity  to  all  circuit  fuses, 
plus  your  operating  fuses,  else  they  might  blow  and  leave  every- 
thing in  darkness.  Link  fuses  (Fig.  10,  A)  are  excellent  for 
operating  fuses,  as  they  are  cheap  and  easily  installed. 

When  using  plug  or  cartridge  fuses  promptly  throw  them 
away  when  they  blow  out.  They  are  of  no  more  use  to  you  or 
any  one  else,  and,  if  they  get  mixed  with  the  good  ones,  it  sim- 
ply causes  aggravation.  Keep  the  various  sizes  separate  and  the 
whole  lot  in  some  handy  place  near  the  switchboard. 

Be  sure  and  have  your  fuse  connections  tight.  Loose  con- 
nections heat  and  very  little  heat  will  melt  a  fuse.  A  dirty 
contact  is  equivalent  to  a  loose  one. 

WIRE  SYSTEMS. 

There  are  two  wire  systems  in  general  use  in  incandescent 
lighting,  viz. :  the  multiple  arc  and  the  three-wire.  But  there 
are  two  others  occasionally  encountered,  viz. :  the  multiple  series 
and  series  multiple.  To  this  must  be  added  the  high  potential 
system,  which  is,  in  practical  use,  a  multiple  arc.  What  is  known 
as  a  series  arc  system  is  used  exclusively  in  arc  lighting  and  is 
of  no  interest  to  the  operator  except  that  he  be  able  to  know  it 
when  he  sees  it,  so  that  he  will  let  it  severely  alone.  A  projec- 
tion arc  lamp  cannot  be  connected  into  this  system  under  any 
conditions. 

In  the  following  diagrams  the  circle  represents  the  dynamo 
and  the  X  lamps;  -j-  indicates  positive  and  —  negative. 

X X X X ^ ^ 


ncn 

Fig.   11   is  a  diagram  of  the  series  arc  system.     This  system 
carries  about  hfty  volts  pressure  for  each  lamp  in  the  circuit. 


FOR    MANAGERS    AND    OPERATORS 


31 


A  twenty-lamp  circuit  would  have  about  1,000  volts  pressure. 
Each  lamp  must  carry  the  entire  pressure  and  all  the  current, 
which  latter  seldom  exceeds  ten  amperes.  You  cannot  connect 
a  projection  arc  lamp  to  this  system  under  any  circumstances. 
Fig.  12  is  a  diagram  of  the  multiple  arc  system  of  wiring, 
illustrating  the  method  of  connecting  a  projection  lamp  thereto. 
You  may  connect  in  anywhere,  simply  attaching  one  wire  to  one 
wire  of  the  light  circuit  and  the  other  wire  to  the  opposite,  being 
sure  that  the  wires,  switches,  fuses,  meters,  etc.,  are  large  enougn 
to  carry  your  current.  Before  connecting  ascertain  the  voltage 
of  course,  and  arrange  the  amount  of  your  rheostat  resistance 
accordingly.     In  practice  lamps  are  not  usually  attached  between 


1 .27y>^i»o 
J, ,  /!l\.tosid.i 
3  ■  /4m  p. . 


riGi2. 


u 


the  main  wires,  as  is  shown  in  the  illustration.  Light  circuits 
are  run  from  the  mains,  as  shown,  and  are  called  "service 
circuits." 


2  ■  /»c«.nde5Cff/it  Circalt 

i,        I  /f  (l  t  Off  i  t  s 


FID  13 


Fig.  13  shows  the  three-wire  system,  which  is  used  mainly  for 
direct  current.  In  this  system  two  dynamos  are  run  in  series, 
producing  a  pressure  across  the  outer  wires  of  220  volts  (usually) 
or  a  pressure  of  110  volts  between  cither  the  outer  and  center 


32  MOTION   PICTURE   HANDBOOK 

("neutral")   wire.     As  has  been  said,  the  main  reason  for  the 
use  of  alternating  current  lies  in  the  fact  that  it  can  be  generated 
at  high   voltage,   carried   to   the   place   desired   at  that   pressure 
and  there  easily  transformed  to  lower  voltage.     This  cannot  be 
done  with  direct,  or  at  least  it  is  not  practical  to  do  it.     Direct 
current    is    to    be    preferred,    but    for    this    one    objection 
and    the    three-wire    system    was    evolved    as    a    means    of 
carrying  relatively  large  quantities  of  direct  current  electro- 
motive   force    without    prohibitive    wiring    cost.       The    dia- 
gram   shows    two    methods    of   attaching    a    projection    lamp 
to   this   system.      In   one  we  attach   to  the   two  outer  wires 
and    will    get    the    full    series    pressure    of    the    two    dyna- 
mos,  usually    (practically  always)    iio-volt   machines,  which 
will  be  220  volts,  and  we  must  provide  rheostat  resistance  for 
that  pressure.    The  other  and  usual  method  is  to  attach  to  the 
center  (neutral)   and  one  outer  wire,  which  gives  us  the  pres- 
sure of  one   dynamo,   usually    110  volts.     Incandescent   service 
circuits  are  run  by  attaching  to  one  outer  and  the  neutral  wires 
and  using  110-volt  lamps.     Service  circuits  may  be  attached  to 
the  two  outer  wires,  however,  by  using  220-volt  lamps,  but  it 
is  not  desirable  to  do  so,  since  the  high  resistance  lamp  is  not 
so  efficient.    In  this  system  the  center  wire  is  called  the  neutral, 
and  is  both  positive  and  negative.    In  practice  the  service  circuits 
are  run  from  both  sides  and  kept  as  evenly  balanced  as  is  prac- 
tical.   The  lamps  of  the  circuits  on  the  two  sides  burn  in  series, 
and  the  neutral  only  carries  current  equal  to  the  difference  in 
the  load  on  the  opposite  sides.    If  the  load  of  the  opposite  sides 
is  evenly  balanced  there  will  be  no  current  at  all  flowing  in  the 
neutral.     It  is  possible,  therefore,   for  the   fuse  of  the   neutral 
main  to  blow  without  affecting  the  lights  of  the  system  at  all. 
As  a  matter  of  fact,  however,  it  is  seldom  or  never  that  a  sys- 
tem   is   thus    evenly   balanced.     You    may   cut   your   projection 
lamp  in  on  any  service  circuit,  which  is  heavy  enough  to  carry 
the  load  by  simply  attaching,  as  instructed  for  Fig.   12  system. 
You  may  also  attach  direcly  to  the  mains  if  desired. 

Fig.  14  is  a  diagram  of  the  multiple  series  system  of  wiring, 
not  much  in  use,  however.  In  this  system  a  very  considerable 
range  of  voltage  is  possible,  the  lamps  being  burned  in  series. 
Ascertain  the  voltage  of  the  lamps  by  looking  at  the  tag  pasted 
on  them  and  multiply  the  voltage  of  the  lamp  by  the  number  of 
lamps  in  the  series,  and  the  product  will  be  the  total  voltage  car- 


FOk    MANAGERS    AND    OPERATORS 


33 


ried  by  the  mains.  Thus,  if  you  find  the  lamps  are  110-volt 
and  there  are  two  in  series  multiply  110  by  2.  If  there  are  five 
SO-volt  lamps  in  a  series  multiply  50  by  5  for  the  line  voltage, 


J 

) 

t                 3C 

1 ..^^ 1 

<          ; 

c         ; 

c              y- 

ntiM 


etc.     You  may  attach  a  projection  arc  lamp,  as  shown,  by  pro- 
viding rheostat  resistance  according  to  the  line  voltage. 

SERIES  MULTIPLE. 

The  series  multiple  system  is  a  very  bad  form  of  wiring  and 
is  so  little  in  use  that  it  is  hardly  worth  while  describing.  A 
projection  arc  lamp  may  easily  be  connected  to  it. 

HIGH  POTENTIAL  ALTERNATING  SYSTEM. 

The  high  potential  system  is  a  two-wire  system,  in  effect  the 
same  as  the  multiple  arc  system.  It  is  always  alternating  and 
the  mains  carry  pressure  from  2,000  to  as  high  as  20,000  volts, 
usually  about  2,000,  however.  With  the  mains  we  have  nothing 
at  all  to  do,  since  they  must  be  handled  only  by  an  expert  elec- 
trician. Never  attempt  to  touch,  handle  or  meddle  in  any  way 
with  the  mains  of  a  high  tension  system,  unless  you  hanker  to 
reach  the  hereafter  by  a  very  expeditious  route. 

In  this  system  there  is  what  is  called  a  "primary"  and  a 
"secondary"  current.  The  current  on  the  mains  is  high  tension, 
but  is,  by  means  of  a  transformer  (Fig.  15),  reduced  for  com- 
mercial use,  usually  to  110  volts.  The  secondary  current  is  taken 
from  the  secondary  coils  of  the  transformer  on  two-wire  service 
circuits,  which  are  the  same  as  the  multiple  arc  system  (Fig.  12), 
and  your  connections  are  made  exactly  the  same  as  directed  for 
that    system.     A    full   explanation   of   the   transformer   will   be 


34  MOTION   PICTURE. HANDBOOK 

given  under  the  head  of  "Resistance  Devices"  further  on,  but  for 
the  benefit  of  road  operators  and  showmen  the  following  instruc- 
tions are  given : 
Fig.  15  shows  a  transformer  attached  to  a  pole.    That  is  where 

\ 

iJ  -  .r 


/ 


A   I 


2? 


Fig.  15. 
you  will  usually  find  them.  1 — 1  are  the  high  tension  wires, 
which  you  must,  on  no  account,  touch  since  they  will  probably 
be  charged  with  a  pressure  of  at  least  2,000  volts.  2 — 2  are  the 
secondary  wires,  carrying  usually  110  volts,  to  which  you  may 
attach  your  arc  lamp  wires.  A — A  are  the  fuse  boxes,  some- 
times set  in  the  sides  of  the  transformer  and  sometimes,  as  in 
this  case,  isolated.  The  fuses  are  carried  in  iron  plugs,  which 
may  be  pulled  or  screwed  out.  For  ordinary  service  circuits 
these  fuses  will  be  very  small.  The  reason  is  this :  they  carry 
high  tension  current,  being  located  between  the  mains  and  the 
transformer.  One  ampere  of  current  at  2,000  volts  becomes 
about  10  amperes  after  it  is  reduced  to  110  volts  pressure,  so 
that  a  three-ampere  transformer  fuse  on  a  2-000-voIt  system  will 
carry  what  will  become  30  amperes  at  110  volts  after  passing 
through  the  transformer.  In  many  places  it  will  be  found  that 
the  wires  entering  the  building  (ofttimes  a  church)  where  the 
show  is  to  be  given  are  not  large  enough  to  carry  projection 


FOR    MANAGERS    AND    OPERATORS  35 

arc  lamp  current,  and  it  will  be  necessary  to  run  your  own 
temporary  wires  to  the  transformer.  First  ascertain  from 
the  light  company  whether  or  not  the  transformer  is 
large  enough  to  carry  your  current  plus  whatever  else 
it  must  take  care  of.  This  is  important,  since,  if  too 
small,  you  might  burn  it  out  and  have  to  pay  for  it. 
Commercial  transformers  will  stand  a  pretty  heavy  over- 
load for  two  or  three  hours  without  damage,  but  this  is  easily 
overdone.  Next,  be  sure  that  the  transformer  fuses  are  large 
enough  to  take  care  of  your  current  plus  the  other  load  they 
must  carry.  These  two  points  taken  care  of,  you  may  climb 
the  pole  and  attach  your  wires  to  the  secondary  wires  (2 — 2, 
Fig.  15),  just  as  close  to  the  transformer  as  possible.  If  the 
machine  is  large  enough  to  carry  your  load  the  secondary  wires 
will  not  likely  be  smaller  than  No.  8  or  No.  10,  and  either  of 
these  will  carry  your  current  for  the  few  inches  from  where  you 
attach  to  the  transformer  coils.  Attach  by  stripping  the  insula- 
tion, scraping  the  wires  perfectly  clean  and  wrapping  the  well- 
cleaned  ends  of  your  wire  around  very  tightly  five  or  six  times. 
Run  your  wires  through  your  switch,  fuses  and  rheostat  to  the 
lamp  in  the  usual  way.  Of  course  this  direction  is  for  a  tem- 
porary job,  to  use  one  or  two  nights  only.  Your  wires  may  be 
supported  on  temporary  insulators  in  any  convenient,  safe  man- 
ner. If  the  wires  running  into  the  building  are  heavy  enough 
you  can  attach  to  them  just  as  you  would  to  the  multiple  arc 
system  (Fig.  12),  but  in  all  cases  ascertain  whether  or  not  the 
transformer  and  its  fuses  are  large  enough  or  you  may  have 
trouble.  A  high-tension  transformer  is  a  dangerous  thing  to 
fool  with,  and  unless  you  are  very  certain  you  know  just  what 
you  are  doing  you  had  better  let  it  severely  alone.  Sometimes, 
however,  the  operator  on  the  road  is  practically  forced  to  do 
these  things,  and  the  above  directions  may  be  of  great  as- 
sistance. 

METERS. 

When  on  the  road  one  must  frequently  hitch  up  on  wires 
controlled  by  a  meter.  Let  me  caufion  you  that  you  must  in  all 
cases  ascertain  positively  that  the  meter  is  large  enough  to  carry 
your  projection  current  plus  whatever  else  it  must  take  care  of 
or  it  will  burn  out.  If  too  small,  arrange  with  the  light  com- 
pany to  allow  you  to  hitch  on  ahead  of  the  meter  and  pay  a  flat 
rate  for  the  current  used.     (See  Miscellaneous  Section.) 


36  MOTION    PICTURE   HANDBOOK 


Resistance  Devices. 


Resistance  is  perhaps  the  one  most  important  thing  to  the 
operator,  and  many  have  been  the  heated  arguments  as  to  the 
relative  merits  of  various  types  of  machine  made  for  this  pur- 
pose. Generally  speaking,  resistance  devices  may  be  divided  into 
four  classes,  viz. :  rheostats,  transformers,  choke  coils  and  arc 
rectifiers. 

The  rheostat  is  the  oldest  form  of  projection  resistance,  and 
for  direct  current  is  the  only  one  available.  Resistance  is  neces- 
sary from  the  fact  that  the  carbons  of  a  projection  arc  lamp 
form  a  dead  short  circuit  when  brought  together.  Means  must 
therefore  be  provided  to  allow  of  but  a  certain  limited  quantity 
of  current  passing  through  the  short  thus  made  or  the  wires 
would  burn  up  instantly  were  it  not  for  the  fuses,  since  the 
lamp  would  take  far  more  current  than  the  fuses  and  wires 
would  carry.  In  fact,  could  such  a  condition  be  maintained,  the 
only  limit  to  current  flow  would  be  the  capacity  of  the  dynamo 
feeding  the  system.  To  prevent  this,  resistance  is  inserted  in 
the  circuit,  and  we  will  hrst  consider  that  form  known  as  the 
rheostat.  Difil'erent  metals  possess  different  degrees  of  con- 
ductivity (current-carrying  power),  copper  wire  being  the  best 
of  any  metal  commercially  available.  That  is  to  say,  a  copper 
wire  of  a  given  size  will  carry  a  larger  amount  of  current  with- 
out heating  than  a  wire  made  from  any  other  metal  combining 
the  toughness  and  ductility  necessary  and  at  the  same  time  not 
too  costly.  On  the  other  hand,  an  alloy  of  certain  other  metals 
possesses  high  resistance  to  current,  and  wire  made  from  this 
alloy  is  used  in  rheostats.  The  resistance  device  is  to  the  elec- 
tric circuit  exactly  what  the  valve  is  to  the  water  pipe.  If  you 
wish  to  get  a  certain  quantity  of  water  from  a  water  pipe  you 
don't  take  the  cap  off  its  end — you  install  a  valve  and  open  it 
just  enough  to  let  through  the  desired  quantity.  If  you  wish 
a  certain  quantity  of  current — say  forty  amperes — from  a  wire 
charged  at  110  volts,  you  cut  the  wire  and  connect  in  a  certain 
length  of  resistance  wire  calculated  to  allow  40  amperes  to  pass 
at  a  pressure  of  110  volts.    If  the  pressure  were  suddenly  raised 


FOR    MANAGERS    AND    OPERATORS'  37 

to  220  instead  of.  110  volts,  you  would  have  to  insert  more  resist- 
ance wire  or  you  would  get  more  current  and  your  resistance 
would  heat  unduly.  The  more  resistance  wire  of  a  given  size 
you  insert  in  a  circuit  at  a  given  pressure  the  less  current  you 
will  get,  and  the  less  resistance  the  more  current  will  go  through. 
The  higher  the  voltage  the  more  resistance  you  must  have  to 
get  a  given  number  of  amperes.  The  rheostat  is  nothing  more 
nor  less  than  a  case  carrying  a  certain  number  of  feet  of  resist- 
ance wire  wound  into  coils  to  save  space  and  mounted  on  insula- 
tors. Some  are  so  arranged  that  a  part  of  the  coils  can  be  cut 
out  or  cut  in  by  moving  a  lever  or  changing  a  connection.  In 
the  non-adjustable  rheostats  there  are  two  binding  posts,  one 
being  attached  to  the  end  of  the  first  coil  and  the  other  to  the 
end  of  the  last  coil,  the  current  thus  being  obliged  to  pass  through 
the  entire  length  of  all  coils  in  the  machine.  Now,  if  a  binding 
post  be  attached  to  the  end  of  the  fourth  coil  of  a  rheostat  con- 
taining six  coils  and  one  of  the  wires  be  attached  to  that  post 
instead  of  the  one  at  the  end  of  the  sixth  coil,  two  of  the  coils 
would  be  "cut  out,"  thus  decreasing  the  resistance  by  one-third 
and  correspondingly  increasing  the  resultant  current.  When  you 
see  a  rheostat  with  more  than  two  binding  posts,  it  is  that  kind 
of  an  arrangement  exactly.  One  post  is  always  a  "permanent" 
and  one  wire  must  always  be  attached  to  it,  but  you  vary  the 
amount  of  current  according  to  which  post  you  attach  the  other 
wire.     The    adjustable    rheostats,    which   have   a    sliding   lever, 


■B 

ElkM 

amount  to  the  same  thing,  each  contact  being  in  effect  the  same 
as  a  separate  binding  post  as  above  described.  The  coils  of 
rheostats  are  connected  with  each  other,  as  shown  in  A,  Fig.  16. 
Taking  A,  Fig.  16,  as  an  example :     1  is  the  permanent  binding 


38  MOTION   PICTURE   HANDBOOK 

post  to  which  one  wire  is  always  attached.  2  is  the  binding 
post  at  the  other  end,  3,  4  and  5  being  intermediate  posts  and 
A  and  B  the  wires.  Now,  if  you  attach  to  binding  posts  1  and  2, 
you,  of  course,  will  see  that  the  current  must  pass  through  the 
entire  resistance,  and  you  will  thus  be  cutting  down  your  cur- 
rent all  you  can  with  that  machine.  If,  however,  you  were  to 
attach  a  wire  to  binding  post  3,  connecting  it  with  wire  B.  with 
a  switch  at  X,  you  would  "cut  out"  half  of  one  coil  when  the 
switch  was  closed,  since  the  current  seeks  the  line  of  least  resist- 
ance. If  you  attach  in  the  same  manner  to  binding  post  4,  with 
a  switch  at  X,  you  cut  out  two  whole  coils  when  the  switch  is 
closed,  but  cut  them  in  again  (compel  the  current  to  pass  through 
them),  when  it  is  again  opened.  If  you  attach  in  the  same  way 
to  binding  post  5  with  a  switch  at  X,  you  would  cut  out  three 
coils  when  the  switch  is  closed.  I  have  sketched  this  out  to 
show  you  that  you  may  connect  your  wire  anywhere,  even  in  the 
center  of  a  coil  and  cut  in  or  out  as  much  resistance  as  you 
desire;  also  to  show  you  the  principle  on  which  the  adjustable 
rheostats  operate.  B,  Fig.  16,  shows  a  type  of  rheostat  often 
encountered.  In  this  sketch  we  are  looking  down  at  the  top  ends 
of  the  coils.  You  will  observe  that  the  two  rows  of  coils  are 
connected  at  one  end  but  not  at  the  other,  binding  posts  being 
placed  at  1,  2  and  3.  Now,  if  you  connect  your  wires  at  1  and  2, 
it  will  readily  be  seen  that  the  coils  are  all  placed  in  series  and 
the  current  must  pass  through  them  all.  If  connection  is  made 
at  1  and  3,  you  will  be  using  just  half  the  machine,  the  other 
half  being  idle.  If  you  connect  at  1  and  3  and  then  connect 
binding  posts  1  and  2  together  with  a  piece  of  copper  wire 
(jumper  it  is  called)  as  per  the  dotted  line,  you  will  have  placed 
two  halves  of  the  rheostat  in  multiple  and  will  get  approximately 
twice  the  amount  of  current  you  would  get  by  the  second- 
named  connection. 


ri&j7 


Right  here  let  me  explain  the  terms  "series"  and  "multiple." 
This  is  something  which  confuses  many,  but  which  is,  in  reality, 
very  simple.     Series,  as  applied  to  rheostats,  means  that  all  cur- 


FOR    MANAGERS    AND    OPERATORS 


39 


rent  which  reaches  the  lamp  must  first  pass  through  all  the 
resistance  in  two  or  more  rheostats  one  after  the  other,  Fig.  17. 

I  think  this  is  simple  and  plain  enough  to  require  no  further 
explanation,  except  to  say  that  adding  rheostats  in  series  reduces 
the  current.  Multiple  puzzles  many,  however,  and  I  will  explain 
it  fully. 

Fig.  18  is  a  diagram  of  two  water  pipes  connected  together 
with  two  valves,  and  the  effect  is  precisely  the  same  as  connecting 
rheostats  in  multiple  (Fig.  19).    By  opening  both  valves  you  get 


just  double  the  quantity  of  water  through  into  pipe  No.  2  that 
you  would  with  only  one  valve  open,  just  as  you  get  additional 
current  to  the  capacity  of  each  rheostat  added  to  multiple.     I 


jUfCLY     W/^f 


r/c  19  < 


think  a  little  study  of  Figs.  17,  18  and  19  will  make  this  matter 
clear  to  you.     It  certainly  ought  to. 

Some  rheostats  are  composed  of  a  number  of  separate  "cells," 
each  cell  being  in  itself  a  complete  rheostat.     They  are  really 


40  MOTION    PICTUkE   HANDBOOK 

two  or  more  complete  rheostats  enclosed  in  one  case.  One  oi 
the  best  known  of  this  type  is  the  "Chicago  Stage  Lighting  Rheo- 
stat." This  tj^pe  of  machine  is  quite  flexible,  as  the  cells  may, 
by  means  of  "jumpers,"  be  connected  in  any  desired  manner, 
both  series  and  multiple,  or  each  cell  may  be  used  separately. 

RHEOSTATS. 

In  the  matter  of  rheostats  their  design  is  almost  legion, 
but  the  really  good  ones  are  limited.  The  writer  would 
like  to  personally  recommend  a  few  he  has  found  to  be  strictly 
first  class,  but  in  a  work  of  this  sort  it  is  manifestly  im- 
possible. Moreover  he  has  not  tried  or  even  seen  all  kinds 
and  might  do  an  injustice  to  some  excellent  machines  with 
which  he  is  not  acquainted.  In  view  of  this  circumstance  he 
has  concluded  to  confine  his  remarks  largely  to  the  rheostats 
sent  out  with  and  as  a  part  of  machine  outfits. 

In  setting  up  your  rheostat  be  sure  to  insulate  it  thor- 
oughly. True,  the  coils  are  insulated  from  the  frame,  but 
this  insulation  is  not  always  to  be  relied  upon.  A  coil  may 
weaken  and  swing  out  against  the  casing  or  other  things 
may  happen  to  produce  the  same  effect.  If  the  casing  itself 
is  not  insulated  this  will  mean  serious  current  loss  unless 
the  "ground"  be  heavy  enough  to  burn  itself  out,  blow  a  fuse 
or  otherwise  evidence  its  existence.  Set  your  rheostats  on 
heavy  asbestos  board,  slabs  of  marble,  slate,  glass  or  other 
non-combustible  insulating  material.  If  they  be  placed  near 
a  wall  other  than  stone,  brick  or  tile  protect  the  wall  with 
sheet  asbestos  with  air  space  of  one  inch  back  of  it.  Never 
set  rheostats  near  anything  inflammable,  as  they  are  liable 
to  become  very  hot,  especially  if  overloaded — as  rheostats 
too  often  are.  Be  sure  to  connect  your  wires  tightly,  setting 
the  binding-post  screws  down  with  plyers.  Don't  overdo 
this,  however,  and  twist  the  screws  ofif.  Use  a  little  judgment 
and  common  sense.  Don't  let  the  plyers  slip  and  mangle 
the  screw  tops — that  is  an  evidence  of  carelessness. 

Clean  the  wire  thoroughly  before  inserting  it  in  the  bind- 
ing post.  A  dirty  connection  is  almost  as  bad  as  a  loose  one. 
If  the  wire  is  too  small  for  the  post  (and  most  rheostats 
have  binding-posts  with  too  small  a  hole  in  them — manufac- 
turers take  notice)  use  a  copper  terminal,  cut  of  which  will 
be  shown  later.     If  the  wires  of  the  rheostat  show  red  the 


FOR    MANAGERS    AND    OPERATORS  41 

machine  is  overloaded.  If  the  coils  are  all  in  and  show  red 
the  machine  is  too  small  for  the  work  and  you  should  in- 
stall a  larger  one.  If  not  all  in  cut  them  in  and  add  another 
rheostat  in  multiple.  It  is  very,  very  poor  economy  to  over- 
load a  rheostat.  It  won't  last  very  long  with  that  sort  of 
usage  and  will  waste  much  current  through  excessive  heat- 
ing while  it  does  last. 

When  using  an  adjustable  rheostat  with  sliding  contacts 
keep  the  contacts  clean  and  see  to  it  that  the  contact  is  tight, 
otherwise  they  will  quickly  become  roughened  by  almost  in- 
visible arcing.  Should  this  happen,  remove  the  lever  and  care- 
/ully,  with  a  fine  file,  smooth  up  the  contacts  and  face  of 
lever  contact  and  fix  the  latter  so  that  it  will  make  firm  con- 
nection with  the  contacts.  Remember  this:  a  poorly  con- 
structed rheostat  is  the  most  expensive  article  you  can  buy. 
By  all  means  get  a  good  machine.  It  will  save  you  money 
every  hour  you  run  if  you  are  on  metered  service.  For 
motion  picture  work  it  is  best  to  get  one  with  which  morr- 
current  than  is  normally  used  may  be  cut  in  by  the  operator. 
You  will  occasionally  get  a  very  dense  film  and  if  the  oper- 
ator is  able  to  increase  his  current  strength  in  such  cases  it 
is  a  great  help.  Unless  required  by  local  law  the  rheostat 
should  not  be  located  in  the  operating  room  in  Summer 
unless  there  is  a  hood  over  them  connecting  with  a  vent  pipe 
to  carry  off  the  heat.  They  may  be  placed  in  a  dry  base- 
ment, being  very  sure  that  they  are  thoroughly  insulated 
from  the  ground  and  protected  from  contact  with  anything 
inflammable.  In  Winter  one  rheostat  may  be  placed  in  the 
ticket  office,  where  it  furnishes  heat  without  extra  bother  or 
expense.  Unless  for  mere  temporary  use  the  best  rheostat 
is  always  the  cheapest  in  the  long  run.  A  poorly  constructed 
one  is  an  abomination  and  makes  for  heavy  current  bills  and 
poor  light.  Without  good  light  you  won't  have  a  good  show 
and  without  a  good  show  the  nickels  will — well,  if  you  don't 
know  what  they  will  do,  experience  (the  fool's  only  teacher) 
will  demonstrate  the  matter  in  course  of  time.  Some  rheo- 
stats are  made  with  cast  metal  resistance  instead  of  wire 
coils.  The  writer  has  had  no  actual  experience  with  this  type 
of  resistance,  but  sees  no  reason  why  it  should  not  be  all 
right  if  made  of  proper  alloy.  Possibly  it  might  even  be 
some  better  on  alternating  current,  since  it  ought  not  to  havQ 


42  MOTION   PICTURE  HANDBOOK 

the  vibration  so-frequently  present  in  wire  coil  machines  when 
used  on  alternating.  These  machines  are,  however,  consider- 
ably heavier  (some  I  have  seen  are  excessive  in  weight)  than 
the  wire  coil  rheostats  and  this  is  very  objectionable  in 
road  work.  In  purchasing  a  rheostat  see  to  it  that  the 
machine  complies  fully  with  requirements  of  local  law;  that 
its  coils  are  well  separated,  well  insulated,  well  fastened  to 
the  insulators  and  are  not  loose  and  "flabby."  See  to  it  that 
♦he  binding  posts  will  accommodate  wires  the  size  you  pro- 
pose to  use — and  that  should  be  No.  6  if  used  on  motion  pic- 
ture lamp.  If  adjustable,  with  sliding  contact,  see  to  it  that 
the  contacts  are  ample  in  size  and  that  the  contact  is  such 
that  it  can  be  kept  tight — this  latter  is  of  the  utmost  import- 
ance. Don't  look  at  the  price  half  as  closely  as  you  do  the 
machine.  With  direct  current  the  writer  prefers  connecting 
the  rheostats  on  the  positive  wire,  since  this  gives  a  some- 
what lower  voltage  at  the  lamp.  The  effect  will  be  the  sarpe 
whichever  wire  the  resistance  is  on,  but  if  you  get  a  "jolt" 
(electricians'  name  for  shock)  it  won't  be  quite  so  heavy. 
With  alternating  either  wire  is  the  same.  How  to  determine 
which  is  the  positive  and  which  the  negative  wire  will  be 
fully  explained  later  on.  The  rheostat  cuts  the  voltage  down 
somewhat  since  resistance  always  causes  drop  in  voltage. 
The  more  resistance  the  greater  the  "drop."  The  arc  itself  is 
supposed  to  cause  a  drop  of  40  volts  through  internal  re- 
sistance. Owing  to  this  resistance  an  arc  cannot  be  sprung 
(started)  with  less  than  40  volts  pressure. 

Fig.  20  shows  the  25  ampere,  adjustable  rheostat  put  out 
with  the  Powers  machine.  This  rheostat  is  well  made,  but 
does  not  comply  with  Underwriters'  requirements  in  that  it 
has  no  casing.  It  supplies  a  maximum  of  25  amperes  on  no 
volts  direct  or  104  volts  alternating.  On  the  left  is  one 
binding-post  to  which  one  of  the  wires  must  always  be  at- 
tached. This  post  connects  directly  with  the  adjustment 
lever.  The  adjustment  cuts  out  or  in  one  coil  for  each  con- 
tact. On  the  right  are  two  binding  posts.  When  the  wire 
is  attached  to  the  inner  one,  two  of  the  coils  are  dead  and 
with  all  resistance  cut  in  eight  coils  are  working.  With 
wire  attached  to  outer  post  all  ten  coils  are  working  when 
all  resistance  is  cut  in.  The  inner  post  is  only  useful  when 
working  on  very  low  pressure  current.     The  Powers  people 


FOR    MANAGERS    AND    OPERATORS 


43 


also  put  out  with  their  machines  a  rheostat  identical  with 
the  above  except  that  it  is  non-adjustable  and  has  casing, 
thus  complying  with  Underwriters'  rules. 

Let  me  say  here  that  when  using  an  adjustable   rheostat 


Fig-.  20. 


on  which  appear  the  words  "in"  and  "out"  on  opposite  sides 
of  the  contacts,  swinging  the  lever,  or  knob,  towards  the  "in" 
cuts  in  more  resistance  and  reduces  the  current.  Swinging 
toward  the  "out"  has,  of  course,  the  opposite  effect.  Before 
turning  current  on  an  adjustable  rheostat  for  the  first  time, 
set  the  adjustment  clear  around  to  "in,"  then  close  switch 
and  move  the  lever  until  you  get  the  current  you  want. 

Fig.  21  shows  two  other  rheostats  put  out  with  Powers 
machines.  The  smaller  is  well  made  and  has  a  maximum  capacity 
of  35  amperes  on  voltage  ranging  up  to  I20.  The  construction 
is  first  class,  the  contacts  excellent  and  the  adjustment  ar- 
rangement very  convenient.  There  are  but  two  binding  posts. 
Attach  a  wire  to  each  is  all  the  instruction  necessary,  setting 
the  lever  so  that  the  resistance  is  all  in  before  turning  on 
current,  of  course.  The  larger  machine  may  be  used  on 
voltage  from  52  to  240.  It  is  exceptionally  well  made  and 
is  quite  light.  The  writer  has  found  it  par-excellent  for  road 
work.  There  are  two  binding-posts,  one  of  which  connects, 
of  course,  directly  with  the  central  adjustment  lever  post, 
and   the   other  with   the   end   of  the   coil  opposite  the  post. 


44 


MOTION   PICTURE   HANDBOOK 


On  this  machine  by  side  of  a  binding  post  appears  "in  52" 
with   an  arrow,  meaning  that   for  52  volts  the   lever  should 


Fig.  21. 

be  in  this  position  and  moved  in  direction  of  arrow  to  cut  in 
resistance.  Be  very  sure  not  to  turn  on  current  when  the 
lever  is  against  the  stop  post  on  this  side,  as  then  the  re- 
sistance is  all  out  and  it  would  be  a  dead  short  circuit  when 
the  lamp  carbons  were  closed  and  there  would  be  fireworks 
and  blown  fuses.  For  52  volts  set  the  lever  back  about  five 
points  before  turning  on  current  and  then  move  it  to  suit. 
From  the  contact  beside  "in  52"  the  coils  connect  straight 
around  the  machine  and  the  further  you  move  the  lever  the 
more  resistance  you  have.  For  no  volts  set  the  lever  around 
about  seven  contacts,  turn  on  current  and  move  to  suit.  For 
220  volts  set  lever  clear  around  against  stop  post,  opposite 
the  "240"  and  move  back  to  suit.  This  machine  is  divided 
into  two  halves  which  may  be  used  singly,  in  series  or  in 
multiple.  As  the  machine  reaches  you  the  two  halves  are 
connected  in  series  by  a  wire  jumper  between  the  eighth  and 
ninth  contacts.  To  use  the  two  halves  separately  on  different 
lamps  remove  the  jumper,  set  the  lever  against  post  on  the 
2^0  side.     Connect  one  set  of  wires  to  the  "in  52"  binding 


rOR    MANAGERS    AND    OPERATORS 


45 


post  and  to  the  eighth  contact  and  the  other  set  to  the  other 
post  and  the  ninth  contact.  The  last  named  half  will  be  ad- 
justable but  not  the  other.  To  use  in  multiple  remove  the 
jumper,  set  lever  against  stop  post  on  the  "220  out"  side. 
Connect  one  wire  to  both  binding  posts  and  the  other  to  both 
the  eighth  and  nintli  contacts.  The  "220  out"  side  will  be 
adjustable  but  not  the  other.  There  are  eight  coils  on  one 
side  and  six  on  the  other  but  the  wire  is  different  gauge  so 
that  the  resistance  of  the  two  sides  is  essentially  the  same. 
With  the  two  contacts  inside  the  circle  you  need  not  con- 
cern yourself.  At  that  point  two  coils  are  cut  in  or  out  in- 
stead of  one,  though  for  what  reason  the  writer  himself  is 
unable  to  understand. 


Fig.  22  shows  the  very  flexible  rheostat  put  out  by  the 
Viascope  Company  (Chicago)  with  the  Viascope  machine. 
On   no  volts  one  may  get   10,  20,  25,  30,  35   or  40  amperes 


46  MOTION   PICTURE  HANDBOOK 

by  manipulating  three  switches — an  excellent  arrangement 
for  the  operator.  The  machine  complies  with  Underwriters' 
rules  and  may  be  used  on  any  voltage  from  52  to  220.  The 
resistance  wire  in  this  machine  is  all  in  one  piece,  which  is 
an  advantage  in  some  ways  but  makes  it  difficult  to  replace 
coils,  should  such  an  operation  be  necessary.  The  coils  are 
in  two  rows,  the  rows  joining  at  binding-post  i.  By  con- 
necting one  wire  to  post  2  and  the  other  to  post  3  the  two 
sides  are  in  series  (switch  4  being  open,  of  course).  When 
using  the  machine  thus  be  very  sure  that  switch  4  cannot  be 
closed,  as  that  would  cut  out  all  resistance,  making  a  dead 
short  circuit.  By  connecting  at  posts  i  and  2  or  i  and  3, 
with  switch  4  open,  you  use  one  side  singly,  the  other  being 
idle.  Close  switch  4  and  the  two  sides  are  in  multiple. 
Switch  B  cuts  in  five  additional  amperes  when  in  lug  4  or 
ten  amperes  when  in  lug  5.  Switch  C  in  lug  6  adds  15 
amperes,  in  lug  7  it  adds  20  amperes. 

Fig.   23   shows  the  two  excellent  rheostats  put  out  with  the 
Edison  machines.    The  smaller  is  an  adjustable,  climax  wire 


Fig.  23. 

coil  machine,  each  coil  being  independent  and  quickly  re- 
moved by  loosening  two  set  screws.  The  coils,  terminals, 
contacts,  etc.,  are  well  insulated.  The  machine  supplies  a 
maximum  of  25  amperes  on   no  to   125  volt  direct  current. 


FOR    MANAGERS    AND    OPERATORS 


47 


May  be  used  on  alternating  also.  The  contacts  are  good  and 
the  machine  in  every  way  well  made,  complying  with  Under- 
writers' requirements.  There  are  but  two  binding  posts. 
Attach  a  wire  to  each,  set  the  lever  to  "in,"  turn  on  current 
and  adjust  to  suit.  The  larger  machine  is  of  the  cast  metal 
gird  tj'pe  and  the  company  claims  for  it  great  excellence. 
It  gives  a  maximum  of  40  amperes  on  100  to  125  volt  current. 
It  is  adjustable,  with  excellent  contacts  inside  the  casing  and 
therefore  well  protected.  The  girds  are  well  insulated.  The 
top  and  bottom  is  covered  with  perforated,  and  the  back, 
front  and  sides  with  solid  sheet  metal.  No  instructions  are 
necessary.  Connect  the  wire  to  either  binding-post,  set  the 
knob  around  to  "in,"  turn  on  current  and  adjust  to  suit. 


nMMk 


Fig.  24. 


Fig.  25. 


The  makers  of  the  Motiograph  machine  put  out  three 
rheostats  with  their  machine.  The  writer  has,  at  the  request 
of  that  company,  very  carefully  examined  these  devices 
and  in  justice  must  say  that  they  certainly  are  very  finely 
constructed  machines.  All  comply  fully  with  Underwriters' 
rules.  Their  "A  C  R  Dandy"  is  similar  to  the  "Universal" 
(Fig.  24),  but  non-adjustable  and  but  25  amperes  capacity 
on  no  volt  pressure,  either  direct  or  alternating.  It  has  but 
two  binding  posts.  Attach  a  wire  to  each.  Fig.  24  shows 
the  "Universal,"  which  has  a  capacity  of  45  amperes.  It  is 
in  effect  two  separate  rheostats  in  one  case.     The  two  cells 


48  MOTION   PICTURE   HANDBOOK  ' 

may  be  used  singly,  in  series  or  in  multiple.  By  different 
connections  you  may  get,  on  no  volt  pressure,  12,  25  or  45 
amperes.  There  are  four  binding-posts  located  on  bottom  of 
machine.  There  is  one  cell  in  each  end  of  the  machine  and 
the  two  binding-posts  opposite  each  other  across  (the  thin 
way)  the  machine  belong  to  the  same  cell.  By  attaching 
your  wires  to  either  of  these  two  sets  of  posts  you  will  be 
using  one  cell  singly  and  fet  a  little  less  than  25  amperes. 
By  attaching  one  wire  to  both  posts  on  one  side  the  long 
way  of  the  machine  and  the  other  wire  to  the  other  two  posts 
the  two  cells  will  be  in  multiple  and  you  will  draw  45  amperes. 
By  attaching  one  wire  to  either  of  the  four  posts  and  the 
other  wire  to  the  post  at  opposite  diagonal  corner  and  con- 
necting the  other  two  posts  with  a  jumper  (piece  of  copper 
wire)  the  two  cells  will  be  in  series  and  you  will  get  about 
12  amperes.    All  the  above  refers  to  no  volt  pressure. 

Fig.  25  shows  the  "A  C  R  Adjustable,  Underwriters' 
Model."  This  machine  has  two  binding  posts,  one  of  which 
connects,  of  course,  directly  with  adjustment  lever.  Connect 
a  wire  to  each  post.  Move  lever  clear  over  to  "in,"  turn  on 
current  and  adjust  to  suit.  The  contacts  are  excellent.  Keep 
them  clean.  In  case  the  contact  spring  should  ever  get  loose 
remove  the  lever  and  bend  the  spring  down  a  trifle.  The 
adjustment  is  on  a  slate  base,  located  under  a  heavy  metal 
cap.  The  machine  is  quite  light  and  the  contact  arrangement 
being  so  well  protected  it  is  an  excellent  rheostat  for  road 
work.  Capacity  45  amperes  on  no  volts  or  25  amperes  on 
220  volts.  All  these  machines  are  protected  by  perforated 
sheet  metal  casing.  The  coils  are  independent  of  each  other 
and  are  very  easily  removed  and  replaced.  The  coil  connec- 
tion is  through  machine  turned  lugs,  the  coils  being  held  in 
place  by  two  set  screws.  As  a  matter  of  plain  justice  to  the 
Motiograph  people  it  must  be  said  that  their  rheostat  con- 
struction is  very  fine. 

The  rheostat  put  out  with  the  Standard  machine  is  of  the 
metal  gird  type  and  is  very  light  in  weight.  It  complies  fully 
with  Underwriters'  requirements.  The  makers  claim  it  will 
supply  75  amperes,  although  built  for  normal  load  of  but  25. 
This  is  rather  a  large  claim,  it  seems  to  me.  Has  but  two 
binding  posts  and  is  non-adjustable. 

There  is  a  rheostat  put  out  by  the  Chicago  Stage  Lighting 


FOR    MANAGERS'    AND    OPERATORS  49 

Company  and  another  of  the  same  type  put  out  by  the  Kleine 
Optical  Company  which  are  in  such  general  use  that  they 
must  be  mentioned,  though  not  put  out  with  a  machine  outfit. 
These  machines  comply  with  Underwriters'  rules  and  consist 
of  a  number  of  cells  in  one  case.  They  are  well  made  and 
in  every  way  first  class  machines.  Each  cell  is  in  effect  a 
separate  rheostat  and  the  various  cells  may  be  used  singly, 
in  series  or  in  multiple.  The  five-cell  rheostat  is  an  excellent 
machine  for  road  work. 

TRANSFORMERS. 

The  use  of  the  rheostat  form  of  resistance  on  alternating 
current  is  out  of  date.  Too  much  power  is  wasted  in  heat, 
besides  which  they  do  not  furnish  nearly  so  satisfactory 
projection  current  as  does  a  rightly  constructed  transformer. 
The  "Inductors,"  "Economizers,"  "Compensarcs,"  etc.,  so 
widely  advertised,  are  nothing  more  or  less  than  low  voltage 
transformers.  The  claims  made  as  to  current  saving  through 
their  use  are  probably  somewhat  exaggerated,  but  that  they 
are  very  much  more  economical  than  is  the  rheostat  is  be- 
yond question.  There  is,  however,  a  very  decided  difference 
in  different  makes  of  these  machines  and  you  will  do  well  to 
investigate  carefully  before  purchasing,  especially  as  they 
are  somewhat  expensive  in  first  cost.  Their  weight  renders 
them  undesirable  for  road  work.  In  ordering  it  is  well  to 
state  the  number  of  cycles  of  the  current  it  is  to  be  used 
on.  A  good  transformer  used  on  the  current  cycle  it  is  de- 
signed for  is  absolutely  noiseless  and  you  should  be  able  to 
lay  your  hand  on  it  anywhere,  at  any  time,  without  feeling 
undue  heat.  Usually  they  are  adjustable,  giving  about  three 
different  amperages,  ranging  from  30  to  50,  from  35  to  55  or 
40  to  60  in  different  machines.  It  is  quite  possible  to  get 
practically  as  good  projection  light  from  60  cycle  alternating 
current,  by  the  use  of  one  of  these  machines,  as  from  direct 
current,  but  very  close  attention  must  be  paid  to  setting  the 
carbons,  as  will  be  explained  further  on  under  different 
heading. 

The  current  you  get  from  a  transformer  has  no  kind  of 
mechanical  contact  with  the  street  mains.  It  is  not  the 
same  current  as  that  with  which  they  are  charged,  but  an 
induced   current   of   much   lower   voltage.     The    transformer 


50 


MOTION   PICTURE  HANDBOOK 


operates  as  follows:  Within  a  soft  iron  core  (shell  type, 
Fig.  26),  made  up  of  laminated  plates  of  soft  iron,  are  four 
coils  of  insulated  wire,  two  of  which  are  called  the  "primary" 
and, two  the  "secondary"  coils.  The  two  latter  (I  am  speak- 
ing now  of  the  projection  transformer,  though  all  transform- 
ers operate  in  essentially  the  same  manner)  are  connected 
directly  with  the  projection  lamp.  The  relative  number  of 
turns  and   size  of  wire   in   the  primary   and    secondary   coils 


A^ 


S 


FIG.  26 


will  determine  the  pressure  and  amount  of  current  you  will 
get  from  a  given  line  voltage.  The  secondary  coils  will  have 
a  less  number  of  turns  of  larger  wire  than  will  the  primary. 
Were  this  condition  reversed  the  machine  would  then  be  a 
"step-up"  transformer,  furnishing  current  of  higher  voltage 
than  that  of  the  line.  Should  you  connect  your  line  wires 
to  the  wrong  set  of  binding  posts  this  is  precisely  the  con- 
dition you  would  establish  and  fireworks  would  be  due  real 
soon.  When  current  is  switched  on  the  primary  coils  the  iron 
plates  become  magnetized  and  a  current  is  induced  in  the 
secondary  coils  to  which  your  lamp  is  attached.  Those  who 
wish  to  learn  all  about  induced  currents  should  consult  stand- 
ard electrical  works  at  their  public  library. 

In  Fig.  26  P,  P'  are  the  primary  and  S,  S'  the  secondary 
coils.  Wires  a,  c  would  connect  to  the  binding  posts  marked 
"Lamp."  Shell  type  transformers  are  the  kind  used  almost 
exclusively  in  projection  work.  Transformers  cannot  be  used 
on  direct  current  under  any  conditions.  In  making  connec- 
tions  you   will    find,   on   most   machines,   two   binding   posts 


FOR    MANAGERS    AND    OPERATORS  Si 

marked  "Lamp."  Connect  a  wire  to  each  post  and  run  one 
(either  one)  to  one  lamp  binding  post  and  the  other  to  the 
other  lamp  binding  post.  Some  machines  have  but  two  other 
binding  posts,  they  being  marked  "Line."  Run  wires  from 
operating  room  switch  to  these  posts.  That  is  all  there  is 
to  it.  Other  machines  have  four  line  binding  posts,  connec- 
tions being  made  to  different  posts  for  different  voltages. 
Instructions  will  come  with  these  machines  for  connecting. 
A  well  built  transformer,  used  on  the  current  it  is  designed 
for,  will  last  indefinitely.  If  at  any  time  there  is  smoke  or 
odor  of  burning  insulation  coming  from  the  machine  it  indi- 
cates that  one  of  the  coils  is  burning,  due  to  overloading  or 
faulty  insulation.  The  machine  must  be  cut  out  at  once  and 
the  coil  removed  and  rewound — which  is  a  job  for  the  manu- 
facturer. Do  not  attempt  to  run  the  machine  after  it  begins 
to  burn  else  you  may  injure  the  other  coils,  thus  very  greatly 
increasing  the  damage.  Transformers  should  be  set  on  in- 
sulation the  same  as  directed  for  rheostats.  Cuts  of  the 
various  machines  may  be  seen  in  the  advertising  columns  of 
the  Moving  Picture  World.  They  are  a  comparatively  new 
thing  and  manufacturers  are  changing  their  designs  so  often 
that  it  is  not  advisable  to  run  cuts  of  them  in  this  matter. 
The  Nicholas  Power  Company,  J.  H.  Hallberg,  New  York 
City;  Kleine  Optical  Company,  General  Electric  Company, 
Electric  Appliance  Company,  Bell  &  Howell  Company,  Chi- 
cago—any one  or  all  of  them  will  send  you  full  information 
about  their  machines,  all  of  which  are  standard,  well  made 
and  efficient. 

MERCURY   ARC   RECTIFIER. 

This  is  a  new  device  put  out  by  the  General  Electric  Com- 
pany. It  is  too  new  to  the  trade  to  be  well  known  as  yet, 
but  the  company  claims  big  things  for  it.  This  machine 
transforms  alternating  current  into  direct.  The  machine 
operates  somewhat  as  follows:  In  the  first  place  it  is  not 
attached  directly  to  the  street  mains,  but  behind  a  trans- 
former, working  on  the  secondary  circuit.  There  is  a  large 
glass  bulb  with  two  wings  standing  out  on  either  side,  near 
the  bottom,  to  each  of  which  the  alternating  wires  are 
attached. 

At  the  bottom  is  a  short  tube  in  which  is  a  small  quantity 


52  MOTION   PICTURE   HANDBOOK 

of   mercury.     Near   it,   also   pointing   downward,   is   another 
short  tube  containing  mercury.    By  tipping  the  tube,  or  bulb, 
slightly  an  electric  arc  is  sprung  between  these  two  bodies 
of  mercury  and  this  arc  creates  a  mercury  vapor  which  fills 
the  whole  bulb,  acting  as  a  sort  of  conductor  for  the  main 
current  which   enters   through   the   two   side   wings,   passing 
down  and  out  of  the  bottom  mercury  tube,  to  which  is  at- 
tached   the   positive   lamp   wire.     As   has   been    stated,   alter- 
nating current  flows   first  in  one   direction   and  then  in  the 
other,  changing  direction  120  times  per  second  in  a  60  cycle 
current.     When  the  current  direction  is  toward  the  left  hand 
wing  (called  an  anode)   it  enters  and  passes  to  the  lamp  as 
indicated    above,   but    when    the   direction    of   the    current    is 
reversed  it  cannot  flow  up  and  out  by  reason  of  the  exces- 
sive resistance.     The  opposite  wing  (anode),  however,  is  con- 
nected to  the  other  v/ire  of  the  circuit  and  when  the  direction 
changes  the  current  in  that  wire  is  then  flowing  toward  that 
wing  and  passes  through  to  the  lamp  just  as  it  did  on  the 
other  side,  but  it  will  be  noted  that  this  brings  the  direction 
of  current  flow  through  the  mercury  tube  always  in  one  di- 
rection.    This  is  the  principle  the  machine  works  on.     There 
are  other  very  important  details  concerning  reactance  which 
maintains   the   arc  during  the   instant  of  time   in  which   the 
direction   of  current  movement  is   reversed,  but  this   matter 
would  be  too  deep  for  the  average  operator  and  is  of  little 
importance  from  the  operator's  point  of  view.     The  machine 
seems   to   be    entirely   practical    and    the    company    claims    it 
reduces  current  bills.     They  are  quite  simple  to  operate. 

MOTOR    GENERATOR    SETS. 

Another  very  satisfactory  method  of  changing  A.  C.  to 
D.  C.  is  by  means  of  an  alternating  current  motor  driving  a 
direct  current  dynamo  of  low  voltage.  The  motor  and  dy- 
namo may  be  on  the  same  shaft,  which  forms  a  very  com- 
pact outfit,  or  they  may  be  separate  and  connected  by  belt. 

By  this  method  the  current  is  transformed  from  A.  C.  to 
D.  C.  with  slight  loss,  provided  the  machines  be  mechanically 
and  electrically  eflicient.  In  such  a  set,  the  lower  you  can 
have  the  dynamo  voltage  the  less  resistance  you  will  have  to 
have  in   the  lamp  circuit,  therefore   the  less  amount  of  loss 


FOR    MANAGERS    AND    OPERATORS  53 

there  will  be.  It  is,  of  course,  understood  that  the  dynamo 
cannot  be  less  than  a  50-volt  machine,  since  it  requires  about 
45  volts  to  overcome  the  internal  resistance  and  strike  an  arc. 

The  motor  generator  set  merely  amounts  to  driving  a 
D.  C.  dynamo  with  A.  C.  current.  Such  sets  are  in  use  in 
many  houses  and  give  satisfaction. 

Certain  companies  put  out  a  D.  C.  "current  saver,"  for 
which  large  claims  are  made.  These  sets  amount  to  a  D.  C. 
dynamo  of  the  line  voltage  driving  a  D.  C.  dynamo  which 
supplies  the  arc,  at  the  arc  voltage,  thus  eliminating  rheo- 
stat heat  waste.  The  only  loss  is  through  the  mechanical 
and  electrical  friction  in  the  two  machines.  The  motor  and 
dynamo  are  both  on  one  shaft  and  the  outfits  are  very  com- 
pact.   They  are,  or  should  be,  practically  noiseless. 


54  MOTION   PICTURE   HANDBOOK 


The  Operating  Room. 


Before  taking  up  lamps,  carbons,  lenses,  machines,  etc., 
etc.,  we  will  consider  the  operating  room  itself.  In  nine  cases 
out  of  every  ten,  particularly  in  theaters  of  the  "store  room" 
variety,  the  operating  room  of  the  past  has  been  miserably 
planned  and  constructed,  the  prevailing  idea  seeming  to  have 
been  that  any  space  which  could  not  possibly  be  used  for 
anything  else  on  earth,  and  that  was  in  sight  of  the  curtain, 
would  do  for  the  operating  room.  As  to  size,  some  man- 
agers seem  to  have  considered  anything  above  4  feet  square 
by  4  deep  as  a  sinful  waste  of  space.  The  whole  show,  or 
the  greater  portion  of  it,  at  least,  comes  from  the  operating 
room,  and  to  expect  an  operator  to  produce  the  best  possi- 
ble results  on  the  screen  when  cooped  up  in  a  little  2x4 
iron-lined  cracker  box  is  expecting  just  a  little  too  much. 
The  very  least  permissible  operating  room  dimensions  should 
be  7  feet  square  by  6  in  the  clear  from  floor  to  ceiling.  The 
writer  well  knows  it  is  often  difficult  to  get  the  latter  di- 
mension, but  a  room  that  is  too  low  to  allow  plenty  of 
head  room  below,  floor  thickness  and  6  feet  above  is  not  fit 
for  a  theater.  A  13-foot  ceiling  will  do  it  easily.  In  build- 
ing the  operating  room  be  very  sure  and  get  the  floor  per- 
fectly solid.  The  least  vibration  will  produce  very  bad  ef- 
fects on  the  curtain,  especially  when  the  stereo  picture  is  on. 
The  writer  has  seen  an  operating  room  floor  so  loose  that 
every  time  the  operator  would  move,  when  running  the 
stereo,  the  picture  would  jump.  The  walls  may  be  built 
of  3  or  4-inch  hollow  tile,  set  in  rich  cement  mortar,  plastered 
inside  and  out:  or  they  may  be  made  of  wood  and  fireproofed 
with  sheet  iron  and  asbestos,  covering  floor  and  ceiling 
with  the  fireproofing  also,  of  course.  Where  studding  walls 
are  to  be  covered  with  iron  and  asbestos  they  should  be  first 
covered  with  rough  lumber.  Nailing  the  iron  and  asbestos 
directly  to  studding  is  very  objectionable  from  any  point  of 
view.     Cover  walls,  floor  and   ceiling  completely  with  sheet 


FOR    MANAGERS    AND    OPERATORS  SS 

asbestos,  which  should  be  at  least  V^  inch  and  preferably  % 
inch  thick. 

Cover  this  with  sheet  iron  or  steel,  with  joints  well  nailed 
down.  This  latter  is  very  important,  as  otherwise  the  seams 
will  buckle  and  open  up  with  the  heat  of  a  fire.  If  the  walls, 
floor  and  ceiling  have  been  completely  covered  with  asbestos 
and  iron,  properly  put  on,  the  room  will  stand  a  surprisingly 
heavy  fire  without  material  damage.  Where  depth  is  limited 
by  reason  of  lack  of  head  room  below,  2  inches  may  be  made 
to  answer  for  floor  thickness  instead  of  the  usual  5  to  7 
inches.  Cut  good,  sound  2x12  planks,  sized  on  one  side, 
the  length  you  want  your  operating  room.  By  length  I  mean 
from  front  to  back.  Ship-lap  them  %  to  %  inch  and  lay  them 
side  by  side  with  plenty  of  dowel  pins  between.  The  back 
end  may  rest  on  a  2x6  lag  screwed  to  inside  of  front  wall. 
At  other  end,  on  top  and  flush  with  ends  of  planks  lay  a 
good,  sound  2x4,  to  which  fasten  each  plank  with  two  ■'/i  x 
4%-inch  bolts.  This  completes  the  floor,  which  may  be 
supported  from  balow  or  hung  from  the  ceiling  joists  with 
one  y-i  inch  rod  every  3  feet.  The  floor  will  be  solid  if  you 
have  used  plenty  of  dowel  pins  and  set  them  in  tight,  and 
will  be  just  2  inches  thick.  It  may  be  covered  with  sheet 
metal  below  and  painted  or  covered  with  canvas  and  papered. 
If  the  planks  are  more  than  8  feet  long  there  should  be  some 
rod  hangers  in  center  of  floor.  Use  dry,  seasoned  lumber  or 
cracks  will  open.  In  the  smaller  cities  it  is  not  usually  re- 
auired  by  law  that  operating  rooms  be  made  fireproof. 
Better  do  it  anyhow,  however.  It  may  save  your  whole  house 
from  destruction.  By  thoroughly  fireproofing  the  operating 
room  as  above  it  is  quite  possible  to  burn  a  whole  reel  ot 
film,  or  even  two  of  them,  and  the  audience  hardly  know  of 
the  disaster.  To  accomplish  this,  however,  you  must  protect 
the  lens  and  peep  holes,  which  may  be  done  with  small,  in- 
dividual shutters  for  each  hole,  arranged  to  slide  up  and 
down  in  grooves,  or  hung  from  a  hinge.  The  latter  method 
is  not  so  good,  however,  as  the  shutters  will  not  close  tightly. 
All  must  be  held  up  by  one  cord  which  must  be  so  arranged 
that  the  operator  can  reach  it  and  instantly  close  all  shutters. 
The  cord  should  be  carried  directly  over  the  machine  head 
so  that  the  fire  will  reach  and  sever  it  quickly  should  the 
operator  lose  his  head.    Another  and  better  way  is  to  hang  a 


$6  MOTION   PICTURE   HANDBOOK 

wide  sheet  of  iron  in  grooves  on  the  front  of  the  operating 
room  wall.  This  sheet  should  be  wide  enough  to  cover  all 
holes  and  be  stiffened  so  that  it  will  remain  perfectly  flat. 
Hang  with  cord  running  into  room,  so  arranged  that  operator 
can  drop  it  instantly,  or  fire  will  sever  the  cord  quickly.  In 
addition  to  this  there  must  be  a  large  vent  pipe  from  the 
ceiling  of  the  operating  room  to  the  open  air.  This  pipe 
should  be  not  less  than  i  and  preferably  2  feet  in  diameter. 
With  such  an  operating  room  the  films  may  burn  and  the 
audience  scarcely  know  it.  Where  a  large  vent  pipe  is  im- 
practical an  ordinarj^  stovepipe,  with  firmly  riveted  joints, 
run  from  near  the  operating  room  ceiling  to  a  chimney  flue 
will  help  a  lot,  though  of  course  it  will  not  carry  off  near  all 
the  smoke  from  a  burning  film.  It  helps  amazingly  in  ven- 
tilating the  room,  too,  in  Summer.  In  the  front  wall  should 
be  a  window  arranged  to  open  for  ventilation.  It  may  be 
covered  on  the  outside  with  ornamental  lattice  if  the  bare 
window  detracts  from  the  appearance  of  the  front.  The  door 
to  the  operating  room  should  open  outward,  being  held  shut 
with  a  stiff  spring.  If  a  trap  door  is  used  it  should  be  not 
less  than  30  inches  square. 

FITTINGS   FOR   OPERATING   ROOM. 

Every  operating  room  should  have  a  small,  substantial 
work  bench,  made  from  2-inch  lumber  and  equipped  with 
a  small,  solid  vise  with  anvil  attachment.  Repair  bills  may 
not  be  so  heavy  if  you  give  the  operator  a  fair  show  to  fix 
things  himself.  But  if  you  won't  even  give  him  a  decent 
work  bench  and  vise  (a  "work  bench"  made  of  i-inch  stuff 
isn't  "decent")  he  is  not  very  much  to  be  blamed  if  he 
takes  no  great  interest  in  trying  to  make  repairs.  Around 
the  wall  should  be  plenty  of  coat  hooks  or  stout  nails  on 
which  to  hang  things,  and  a  substantial  shelf  should  be  con- 
veniently located  high  enough  to  be  out  of  the  way.  Always 
and  invariably  there  must  be  a  metal  can  in  which  to  throw 
carbon  butts  and  the  operator  who  puts  them  anywhere  else 
should  be  promptly  fired,  before  he  fires  your  house.  It  is 
well  to  locate  a  small  shelf  jlist  under  the  peephole,  to  be 
used  for  announcem.ent  slides,  oil  can,  cement,  song  slides, 
etc.  There  must,  of  course,  be  an  electric  fan,  but  its  loca- 
tion will  depend  on  circumstances,  but  under  no  conditions 


FOR    MANAGERS    AND    OPERATORS  !>7 

should  the  air  current  from  it  be  allowed  to  strike  the  con- 
denser directly,  or  even  the  lamphouse  itself. 

TOOLS. 

The  best  and  most  satisfactory  plan  is  for  the  operator  to 
own  his  own  kit  of  tools.  Tools  furnished  by  the  house 
will  usually  be  neither  complete  or  satisfactory.  The  fol- 
lowing list  contains  nothing  superfluous  and  may  be  added 
to  at  will,  but  it  constitutes  a  fairly  good  kit  and  costs  but 
a  few  dollars;  in  buying  tools  it  always  pays  to  get  the  best 
puality  obtainable:  One  pair  "Button"  plyers,  8  or  lo-inch; 
'^ne  pair  8  or  lo-inch  lineman's  side  cutting  plyers  (I  leave 
the  matter  of  size  open,  as  some  prefer  one  and  some  the 
other);  one  pair  8  or  lo-inch  gas  plyers;  one  large  and  one 
medium  screw  driver;  one  screw  driver  with  good  length  of 
carefully  tempered  blade  for  small  machine  screws;  one  lo 
or  i2-inch  cabinet  rasp  for  sharpening  carbons;  one  small 
riveting  hammer;  one  plaw  hammer;  one  small  cold  chisel; 
one  medium  size  punch;  one  very  small  punch  for  star  and 
cam  pins;  one  pair  small  tinner's  snips;  one  blunt  nose  film 
shears  (such  as  clerks  use);  one  small  gasoline  torch  for 
soldering  wire  joints.  With  this  kit  you  will  be  able  to  do 
almost  any  ordinary  job,  but  you  will  have  use  for  them  all. 
In  addition  to  the  above  the  house  should  furnish  one  8  and 
one  lo-inch  flat  file,  one  %  round  file,  one  8-inch  "rattail"  file, 
a  small  bench  vise  with  anvil,  some  soldering  flux,  solder  wire, 
film  cement,  slide  cover  glass,  mats  and  binders,  and  wire 
of  various  sizes  likely  to  be  needed. 

Tools  should  be  arranged  neatly  and  conveniently  on  the 
wall,  preferably  over  the  work  bench,  though  plyers  and 
screw  drivers  should  always  be  hung  within  reach  of  the 
machine.  The  writer  has  found  the  clamps,  such  as  are  used 
to  fasten  mental  conduit  to  the  wall,  to  be  the  neatest  and 
best  tool  holders.  They  are  very  cheap  and  may  be  had  in 
any  size.  Get  %-inch  ones  for  plyers  and  smaller  sizes  for 
other  tools.  Never,  never  leave  tools  lying  around.  When 
through  with  a  tool  put  it  back  in  its  place  instantly.  It 
will  take  a  second  or  two  to  do  this,  but  "I  had  that  screw 
driver  a  minute  ago,  now  where  in  thunder  is  it?"  is  alto- 
gether too  common  a  remark  and  it  spells  Slouchy  Workman 
in  big  letters.     Keep  your  tools  in  place  and  don't  have  tQ 


58  MOTION   PICTURE  HANDBOOK 

rummage  all  over  the  room  every  time  you  need  something. 
It  is  cheaper  by  far  in  the  long  run.  It  is  a  shame,  but  it  is 
a  fact,  so  far  as  the  observation  of  the  writer  goes — and  he 
is  frequently  called  to  theaters  to  straighten  things  out,  there- 
fore has  seen  many  operating  rooms — that  not  one  operating 
room  in  ten  is  equipped  with  a  half-way  complete  set  of  tools 
and  in  not  one  in  fifty  are  even  the  few  tools  there  hung  up  in 
orderly  fashion.  All  this  means  wasted  energy  and  lessens 
a  man's  chances  of  Heaven  (if  the  showman  has  any,  any- 
how) through  fracturing  the  third  commandment.  I  might 
add  that  it  is  a  good  plan  to  wrap  plyer  handles  and  screw- 
driver blades  to  within  a  couple  of  inches  of  their  ends  with 
insulating  tape.     It  will  save  you  many  unpleasant  shocks. 

OPERATING  ROOM  SWITCHES. 

The  operating  room  switches  must  be  installed  in  com- 
pliance with  local  law,  which,  in  many  cities,  requires  a  metal 
cabinet  with  a  door.  All  switches  should  be  assembled 
directly  in  front  of  the  operator,  as  he  sits  in  operating  posi- 
tion, except  that  the  dissolver  switch,  if  one  be  used,  may 
be  located  convenient  to  that  machine.  In  wiring  an  operat- 
ing room  make  the  electrical  connection  of  each  machine 
entirely  independent  of  every  other  machine.  A  tremendous 
mistake  is  frequently  made,  where  two  machines  are  used, 
of  installing  a  double  throw  switch  attaching  one  machine  to 
each  end.  This  is  very  bad  if  the  machines  are  to  be  used 
alternately  on  steady  run,  since  it  is  desirable  many  times 
to  have  both  lamps  burning  at  once.  To  explain:  You  are 
running  one  machine,  but  must  switch  over  to  the  other 
when  that  film  runs  out.  Now  with  independent  wiping  your 
helper  can  start  the  lamp  of  the  other  machine  and  start  that 
machine  so  as  to  not  leave  the  curtain  dark  for  an  instant, 
but  with  double  throw  switches  between  you  must  stop  your 
machine,  throw  the  switch,  start  the  lamp  (perhaps  with  new 
carbons)  and  start  the  other  machine  all  while  the  house  is 
standing  dark.  It  is  surprising  how  many  good  houses 
have  their  machines  wired  on  the  foolish  double  throw 
switch  plan.  It  is  to  be  condemned  from  any  and  every  point 
of  view.  Have  your  operating  room  incandescent  lights 
equipped  with  snap  switch  sockets,  but  also  have  a  snap 
switch  on  the  wall  beside  the  peephole  with  which  you  can 


FOR    MANAGERS    AND    OPERATORS  59 

put  them  all  out.  If  one  of  the  auditorium  light  circuits  is 
handled  by  the  operator,  as  it  should  be,  have  this  switch 
located  by  the  side  of  the  peephole.  Keep  all  switch  contacts 
clean,  smoothing  them  up  occasionally,  if  necessary,  with  a 
fine  file.  Keep  the  handles  and  crossbars  of  switches  tight; 
a  loose,  wobbly  switch  is  an  abomination  and  none  but  a 
lazy,  shiftless  workman  will  tolerate  it. 

Keep  your  operating  room  clean.  Under  no  circumstances 
allow  loose  papers  or  trash  of  any  kind  to  accumulate  on 
the  floor.  Make  it  your  invariable  practice  to  sweep  the 
room  thoroughly  once  each  day.  The  operator  who  has  not 
enough  ambition  to  keep  his  operating  room  at  least  decently 
clean  had  better  quit  and  go  into  the  junk  business.  He 
can  then  mess  around  all  he  wants  to.  If  he  doesn't  leave,  I 
would  earnestly  recommend  that  his  pay  be  stopped.  Keep- 
ing an  operating  room  clean  is  so  small  a  matter  that  there 
is  absolutely  no  excuse  on  earth  for  failure  to  do  so.  When 
running  it  is  necessary  to  have  the  operating  room  in  dark- 
ness if  you  get  the  best  results.  With  lights  burning  in  the 
operating  room  you  cannot  nearly  so  readily  distinguish 
shadows  on  the  picture.  It  is  harder  on  the  eyes,  too.  The 
darker  the  room  is,  the  better.  In  front  of  the  lamp  house, 
especially  if  the  floor  be  ironclad,  should  be  an  insulating 
mat  about  24x30  inches  in  size.  This  may  be  rubber,  heavy 
linoleum  or  asbestos  board — not  sheet  asbestos,  but  asbestos 
board.  But  whatever  it  is  it  should  be  well  fastened  down, 
or  let  into  the  floor  flush  with  its  surface.  The  writer  insists 
on  a  comfortable  chair  with  a  back.  He  doesn't  propose  to 
sit  bunched  up  on  an  uncomfortable  stool.  He  tries  to  give 
good  service,  as  every  man  should,  but  he  demands  reason- 
able comfort  in  his  work  as,  also,  every  man  should.  Of 
course  this  item  does  not  make  much  difference  on  a  short 
evening  run,  but  for  long  runs  it  does. 

THE    LAMP. 

A  good  picture  cannot  possibly  be  produced  without  good 
light  and  the  better  the  light  is,  other  things  being  equal, 
the  better  will  be  the  picture.  Good  light  cannot  be  had  with 
a  poor,  dry  lamp  with  2  or  3  inches  of  the  cable  ends  burned 
to  a  crisp.  It  is  astonishing  how  little  attention  many  op- 
erators pay  to  their  lamp.     I  have  been  sent  for  by  theater 


60  MOTION   PICTURE   HANDBOOK 

managers  to  see  what  was  the  trouble  that  their  light,  was 
so  poor  and  found  that  I  could  only  move  the  lamp  ad- 
justment screws  by  grasping  the  handle  and  twisting  hard 
enough  to  very  nearly  break  things.  And  that  was  all  in 
the  world  that  was  wrong.  No  matter  what  make  of  lamp 
you  use,  take  it  entirely  apart  just  as  soon  as  its  adjustments 
move  the  least  bit  stiff  and  proceed  as  follows:  After  re- 
moving all  screws  and  taking  the  lamp  entirely  apart,  grease 
all  parts  thoroughly  with  vaseline.  Now  wipe  off  the  sur- 
plus grease  and  drop  the  parts  into  a  box  of  good  graphite. 
Shake  (don't  wipe)  off  the  surplus  and  put  the  lamp  together. 
If  you  have  been  using  a  dry  lamp  you  will  be  astonished  at 
the  difference  and  how  much  more  accurately  you  can  adjust 
your  light.  A  very  common  fault  with  many,  in  fact,  almost  all 
lamps,  is  the  tendency  of  the  carbon*  arms  to  "wobble"  side- 
wise,  due  to  the  fact  that  the  rack  bars  (the  bars  which 
slide  up  and  down  to  adjust  the  carbons)  being  too  small. 
With  these  small  bars,  if  there  be  the  very  least  play  in  the 
boxing  which  holds  them  it  is  magnified  many  times  out  at 
the  ends  of  the  carbon  arms,  which  frequently  you  can  swing 
fully  Vs  of  an  inch.  These  lamps  may  be  all  right  when 
new,  but  after  being  used  a  short  time  the  fault  develops. 
The  metal  warps  a  trifle  through  heat — at  least  I  suppose 
that  is  what  causes  it — and  then  there  is  lost  motion.  The 
rack  bar  should  be  flat  and  wide.  From  front  to  back  it 
need  not  be  more  than  ^  inch  thick,  but  the  other  way  it 
should  be  at  least  i  inch  wide.  Exactly  like  a  flat  tongue  in 
a  wide  slot  so  it  cannot  wobble  sideways.  In  that  case 
a  little  lost  motion  wouldn't  count  for  much. 

This  fault  is  one  that  is  very  aggravating,  especially  when 
working  with  alternating,  which  requires  very  close  ad- 
justment of  the  carbons  for  the  best  results.  With  direct 
current  the  play  is  not  usually  enough  to  do  material  damage. 
Every  few  days  dress  off  the  inside  of  your  carbon  contacts. 
They  gradually  accumulate  scale  and  get  rough  so  that  good 
contact  with  the  carbon  is  not  had.  This  is  very  bad  since 
it  adds  electrical  heat  to  the  natural  heat  from  the  arc,  re- 
sulting in  loss  of  power  and  the  weakening  of  the  carbon 
arms  and  clamps.  The  bronze -clamps  put  out  with  most 
lamps  have  but  little  strength  when  hot.  If  you  are  troubled 
with  excessive  breakage  have  a  blacksmith  make  you  a  set 


FOR    MANAGERS    AND    OPERATORS' 


61 


of  arms  and  clamps  of  Bessemer  steel,  using  the  old  one 
for  pattern.  They  will  last  for  years.  Another  almost  uni- 
versal fault  with  lamps  is  too  small  a  binding  post  hole.  If 
your  binding  post  won't  take  No.  6  wire  run  a  drill  through 
the  old  hole  if  there  is  metal  enough.  If  not,  then  attach 
your  wires  by  using  a  copper  terminal,  an  excellent  form  of 
which  is  the  Bell  terminal,  shown  in   Fig.  27. 


Fig.  27, 

To  attach  a  copper  terminal  to  a  flexible  cable,  strip  the 
insulation  from  about  2  inches  of  the  wire,  cleaning  it  and 
the  inside  of  the  clip  thoroughly.  Now  lay  the  wire  in  the 
clip,  as  shown  in  the  top  illustration.  Fig.  27,  leaving 
enough  wire  projecting  beyond  small  lug  to  bend  back  and 
reach  well  into  the  large  lug.  Clench  small  lugs  down  tightly, 
bend  wire  back  over  and  clench  down  large  lugs,  as  shown 
in  lower  illustration.  Fig.  27.  Large  lugs  are  intended  to 
hold  the  insulation  in  place,  but  clenching  them  down  on  the 
raw  wire  ends  makes  just  that  much  additional  contact.  To 
attach  to  lamp,  remove  binding  post  screw  and  put  some 
washers  on  it,  put  it  through  hole  in  clip  and  screw  down 
tightly,  clamping  clip  to  binding  post.  These  minute  direc- 
tions may  seem  unnecessary  to  some  of  the  older  operators, 
but  you  would  be  amazed  at  the  number  of  "operators"  who 
can't,  or  don't,  do  the  smallest  job  properly. 

Unless  there  is  an  extension  on  the  carbon  arm  for  the 
purpose  of  removing  the  cable  from  the  intense  heat  of  the 
arc  it  is  not  advisable  to  attach  your  cables  directly  to  the 
lamp  binding  posts  if  you  are  using  a  powerful  light.  The 
heat  from   the  arc  is   so  intense   that   the   cable   ends   soon 


62  MOTION   PICTURE  HANDBOOK 

become  charred,  thus  necessitating  the  removal  of  2  or  3 
inches,  frequently.  Also  the  wires  are  liable  to  burn  off  at 
any  time.  The  reason  for  this  is  that  copper,  when  sub- 
jected to  heat,  has  a  tendency  to  oxidize  or  scale  and  when 
the  individual  strands  of  a  cable  are  so  fine  and  each  is 
subject  to  the  action  over  its  entire  surface  it  does  not  take 
long  to  reduce  the  available  current  carrying  cross  section 
to  a  point  where  it  is  too  small  to  carry  the  current.  Elec- 
trical heating  is  now  added  to  the  heat  of  the  arc  and 
of  course  the  whole  thing  soon  burns  off.  Some  manu- 
facturers have  recognized  this  condition  and  have  added 
an  extension  to  their  carbon  arms  which  takes  care  of  the 
matter  nicely.  Where  these  are  not  present  you  may  over- 
come the  difficulty  by  making,  from  No.  8  steel  wire,  an 
arrangement  like  Fig.  28. 


Fig.  28. 

Attach  one  end  to  the  binding  post  the  same  as  you  would 
a  copper  terminal  and  to  the  other  attach  the  cable  end, 
using  a  small  stove  bolt  with  washers  and  clamping  the  cable 
and  wires  together  tightly.  Make  the  extension  of  a  length 
to  suit  your  own  individual  case,  but  3  inches  usually  is 
plenty  long  enough.  If  too  long  it  will  interfere  with  the 
free  movement  of  the  lamp.  This  kind  of  extension  will 
last  indefinitely.  When  you  get  a  new  lamp,  or  put  in  a  new 
carbon  arm,  remove  the  lamp,  put  in  two  long  carbons, 
clamping  them  firmly  in  place.  Now  squint  along  the  two 
carbons  and  see  if  they  line  with  each  other  sidewise.  That 
is  to  say  (to  make  myself  clear),  would  they  appear  in  line 
with  each  other  were  the  lamp  in  place  and  you  looking 
through  the  condenser  opening?  If  not,  carefully  file  your 
carbon  arms,  with  %  round  file,  until  the  carbons  line 
exactly.  This  is  of  much  importance,  especially  with  alter- 
nating, if  you  expect  to  get  the  best  results  and  get  them 
all  the  time.  Where  the  lamp  house  is  not  asbestos  lined 
the  writer  has  found  it  a  good  scheme  to  lay  a  sheet  of 
asbestos  in  the  bottom,  letting  it  bend  up  in  front  as  far  as 
bottom   of  condenser  opening.     Where  lamps  have   a  back- 


FOR    MANAGERS    AND    OPERATORS  63 

ward  and  forward  movement  adjustment  screw  with  fine 
thread,  the  writer  disconnects  this  screw  entirely  and  at- 
taches a  handle  so  that  he  can  pull  the  lamp  back  or  push 
it  ahead.  The  handle  must  extend  through  back  of  lamp 
house,  of  course.  Be  very,  very  careful  that  the  insulation 
between  the  carbon  arms  and  lamp  is  perfect.  If  it  is  poor 
on  both  there  may  be  current  leakage  which  will  be  waste 
pure  and  simple  and  will  keep  your  lamp  house  charged  all 
the  time.  Sometimes  the  lamo  house  may  be  charged  and 
and  you  cannot  discover  where  it  comes  from.  After  ascer- 
taining that  none  of  the  fine  cable  strands  are  doing  the 
mischief  brush  off  the  top  of  the  lower  carbon  arm  care- 
fully. Sometimes  carbon  dust  or  a  piece  of  carbon  will 
bridge  the  insulation  enough  to  carry  current  to  give  you 
a  lively  shock. 

THE  LAMP  HOUSE. 

Little  need  be  said  on  this  subject.  All  lamp  houses  have 
their  good  and  bad  points  and  all,  so  far  as  the  writer  knows, 
lack  ventilation  which  can  be  controlled  by  the  operator, 
except  to  a  very  limited  extent.  Personally  the  writer  pre- 
fers ample  ventilation  in  a  lamp  house,  but  arranged  so  far 
as  possible  to  avoid  direct  currents  of  air,  though  he  is  not 
sure  that  even  these  are  hurtful.  Lack  of  ample  ventilation 
creates  excessive  heat  in  the  lamp  house,  which  in  turn  ab- 
normally heats  the  back  condenser  lens,  as  well  as  the  wires 
inside  the  lamp  house.  The  hotter  your  lens  the  greater  the 
exnansion  and  consequent  liability  to  breakage.  Some  say 
keep  the  lamp  house  tightly  closed  or  you  will  br-r-eak 
your  condensers — let's  see!  The  front  condenser  lens  gets 
pretty  warm  itself,  doesn't  it?  It  is  exposed  to  every  vagrant 
breeze  that  blows,  is  it  not?  It  scarcely  ever  breaks,  does 
it?  It  seems  to  me  there  is  a  moral  lying  around  loose 
here  somewhere.  The  writer  firmly  believes,  and  has  proven 
it  to  his  owm  satisfaction,  that  there  will  be  little  condenser 
breakage  (provided  other  conditions  are  right,  see  "Con- 
densers") if  one  could  run  with  the  whole  back  out  of  his 
lamp  house.  But  running  with  closed  lamp  house  and  then 
opening  the  door,  if  for  but  a  second,  soen  after  the  lamp 
is  cut  off,  produces  a  sudden  change  in  temperature,  and  bing! 
there    it   goes.      Give   the   back   condenser    plenty   of   air   all 


64  MOTION    PICTURE   HANDBOOK 

the  time,  the  same  as  the  front  one  has,  is  the  rule  I  have 
adopted.  Of  course,  there  is  somewhat  greater  liability  of 
breaking  the  back  lens,  since  that  gets  the  hottest,  but  the 
front  one  gets  pretty  hot,  too.  There  is  not  so  much  dif- 
ference after  all.  I  don't  assert  positively  that  I  am  right, 
but  I  think  I  am,  and  I'm  not  breaking  many  condensers 
either — maybe  one  in  a  month,  maybe  not  so  often.  Keep 
your  lamphouse  clean  and  the  rods  it  slides  on  well  lubri- 
cated. Keep  the  screen  which  covers  the  vent  holes  clean. 
It  clogs  up  rapidly  with  a  fine,  white  ash,  the  residue  of  the 
water  glass  contained  in  carbon  cores. 


l^OR    MANAGERS    AND    OPERATORS  65 


Lenses. 


Hundreds  of  managers  and  operators  have  written  the 
writer  asking  whether  the  high  priced  condensing  lenses 
were  really  to  any  appreciable  extent  better  than  the  cheaper 
grades.  Unquestionably  they  are,  provided  you  deal  with  a 
reliable  firm  which  send  you  the  really  high-grade  lenses  in 
return  for  the  higher  price.  I  am  sorry  to  say,  however, 
that  some  unscrupulous  firms,  well  knowing  that  the  average 
manager  or  operator  is  qualified  neither  by  knowledge  or 
experience  to  judge  the  quality  of  a  lens,  ship  out  a  cheap 
lens  to  the  man  who  has  paid  for  a  high  grade.  One  manager 
sent  me  a  fragment  of  a  condensing  lens  he  had  paid  $2 
for.  I  make  no  pretense  to  expertness  in  judging  lenses,  but 
even  the  novice  could  see  it  was  a  very  poor  quality  of  lens, 
probably  one  retailing  for  75  cents.  The  high-class  lens, 
being  made  more  carefully  and  of  better  materials  has,  or 
should  have,  more  even  density,  therefore  withstanding  the 
shock  of  expansion  and  contraction  better.  The  glass  does 
not  have  the  greenish  tinge  present  in  the  cheaper  lenses 
and  therefore  yields  a  considerably  whiter  light.  More  than 
this,  they  are  much  more  accurately  ground  and  for  that 
reason  give  a  greater  amount  of  light  at  the  aperture 
plate  for  a  given  arc  strength.  To  sum  up:  The  high-grade 
lenses  give  a  whiter,  stronger  light  and  do  not  break  quite 
so  readily,  though  they  will  break,  as  will  any  glass  subjected 
to  rapid  and  extreme  expansion  and  contraction.  When 
the  condensing  lens  fits  into  a  metal  round,  it  should  fit 
loosely,  with  fully  1-16  inch  play.  The  glass  expands  more 
in  diameter  than  does  the  metal  round  and  if  the  fit  is  snug 
when  cold  the  round  will  bind  and  may  crack  the  glass  when 
heated.  If  your  lens  is  too  large  you  can  easily  grind  it  down 
on  a  coarse  grindstone.  An  emery  wheel,  unless  very  fine 
and  low  speed,  will  chip  the  edges  badly.  You  cannot  tell 
when  a  condenser  is  dirty  (unless  very  dirty)  simply  by  look- 
ing through  it.  Look  through  the  casing  vent  holes  when 
the  arc  is  burning  and  if  the   lens   looks   foggy  it   is   dirty 


66  MOTION    PICTURE   HANDBOOK 

and  needs  cleaning.  The  outside  you  will,  of  course, 
polish  thoroughly  every  day  before  starting  the  run.  Lenses 
may  be  cleaned  by  wiping  with  a  wet  cloth  or  breathing 
on  them,  polishing  afterward  with  soft,  dry  cloth  or 
chamois.  Wood  alcohol  is  best,  however,  for  the  pur- 
pose. Wet  (not  dampen,  but  wet)  a  bit  of  cloth  with 
alcohol  and  wash  the  lens  off  with  it,  polishing  quickly, 
before  the  alcohol  evaporates,  with  soft,  dry  cloth  or  cham- 
ois. Keep  the  alcohol  tightly  corked,  as  it  evaporates  very 
rapidly.  Don't  keep  alcohol  in  the  operating  room.  In  case 
of  fire  it  would  help  things  along  amazingly.  As  to  the  dis- 
tance the  condensing  lens  should  be  from  the  film;  the  writer 
considers  12  inches  about  right,  but  has  been  unable  to 
see  that  a  variation  of  an  inch  either  way  makes  any  mate- 
rial difiference,  though  under  certain  circumstances  he  has 
been  able  to  remove  a  "ghost"  (dark  spot  in  center  of  cur- 
tain) by  moving  the  lamp  house  forward  or  back.  As  to  the 
matter  of  condenser  breakage  the  writer  does  not  feel  justi- 
fied in  saying  much  more  than  hcs  already  been  said.  He  has 
a  grave  suspicion  (may  be  all  wrong,  though)  that  up  to  a 
certain  degree  of  heat  there  is  small  danger  of  breakage, 
other  things  being  right,  but  when  that  point  is  passed  the 
dr.nger  is  very  largely  increased.  He  has  about  come  to  the 
conclusion  that  this,  fitting  lenses  too  tightly  in  metal  rounds, 
and  very  sudden  changes  in  temperature,  due  to  excessive 
heat  in  lamphouse,  are  the  three  causes  responsible  for  nine- 
tenths  of  all  condenser  breakage.  Where  condensing  lenses 
of  the  same  focal  length  are  used  front  and  back  the  writer 
believes  danger  of  breakage  is  materially  reduced  if  when 
putting  in  a  new  lens  it  be  placed  in  front,  the  old  lens  being 
moved  to  the  rear  next  the  light.  He  believes  a  lens  that  has 
been  used  in  front  for  some  time  has  become  "seasoned" 
(I  use  that  term  for  want  of  a  better),  so  that  it  will  stand  the 
comparatively  severe  service  next  the  lamp  better  than  will 
a  new  one.  This  may  be  imagination,  pure  and  simple,  but — 
try  it  out,  anyhow. 

That  condenser  breakage  is  a  serious  item  of  expense  in 
many  cases  is  proven  by  the  fact  that  the  writer  has  re- 
ceived more  than  five  hundred  letters  from  managers  and 
operators,  during  the  past  year  alone,  on  this  very  subject. 

Some  believe   that  placing  a   new  lens   in   cold   water  and 


FOR    MANAGERS    AND    OPERATORS  67 

bringing  it  to  a  boil,  then  allowing  it  to  remain  in  the  water 
until  cold  anneals  the  lens  to  a  certain  degree  and  reduces 
liability  of  breakage.  Personally,  the  writer  does  not  believe 
in  it  much,  but  it  does  no  harm,  anyhow,  and  may  do  some 
good. 

FINDING   THE   FOCAL   LENGTH    OF   LENSES   AND 

FINDING  THE   SIZE   LENS   REQUIRED   TO 

PROJECT  A  GIVEN  SIZE  PICTURE 

AT  A  GIVEN  THROW. 

Finding  the  focal  length  (commonly  termed  the  "focus") 
of  a  lens  is  a  very  simple  operation,  but  one  very  little  un- 
derstood by  operators.  To  ascertain  the  focal  length  of  a 
condenser  lens,  pin  a  sheet  of  blank  paper  on  the  wall  oppo- 
site to.  and  removed  at  least  ten  feet  from,  a  window  through 
which  comes  strong  light.  Next, 
holding  the  lens  as  in  Fig.  29  A,  with 
the  flat  surface  square  with  the  wall, 
move  it  back  and  forth  until  the  im- 
^(?^^  age  of  the  window  appears  sharply 
-■pfa.^  defined    on    the    paper.      Holding   the 

lens  at  point  of  sharpest  definition, 
measure  from  its  flat  side  to  the  wall, 
and  this  measurement  is  the  focal 
length,  or  "focus,"  of  the  lens.  An 
incandescent  lamp  will  answer  equally 

ijT  well   for   illuminant    if   not    less    than 

"  i  "u  3  ten  feet  distant.     Get  sharp  image  of 

<  >*»\giK   ^  the    lamp    filament    on    the    wall    and 

measure  as  before. 

Measuring  focal  length  of  projec- 
tion lenses  is  done  in  precisely  the 
same  way,  except  that  you  must  first 
make  the  central  point  between  the 
two  lenses  (see  Fig.  29  B)  and  meas- 
Fig.  29.  lire  from  that  point.     This  will  be  the 

equivalent  focus  of  the  lens.  The  dis- 
tance from  the  lens  nearest  wall  to  wall  will  be  the  back 
focus  of  the  lens. 

Finding    the    focal    length    of    lens    required    to    project    a 
certain  width  of  picture  at  a  given  distance  is  equally  sim- 


68  MOTION   PICTURE  HANDBOOK 

pie,  though  a  dense,  dark  mystery  to  very  many  operators. 
Multiply  the  distance  from  lens  to  curtain,  in  feet,  by  width 
of  picture  opening  (aperture  opening  in  motion  pictures  and 
slide  mat  in  stereo),  in  inches.  Divide  this  result  by  desired 
width  of  picture,  in  feet,  and  result  will  be  equivalent  focus  of 
required  lens,  in  inches. 

Example:  What  lens  will  project  a  is-foot  motion  picture 
at  60  feet?  Answer:  60  x  iO  (aperture  plate  is  it  inch  wide) 
equals  56j4.  which  divided  by  15  equals  3}i,  so  we  shall  want  a 
3^-inch  lens.  Example:  What  lens  will  project  a  stereo  pic- 
ture 15  feet  wide  at  60  feet?  Answer:  60x3  (width  of  stand- 
ard slide  mat)  equalb  180,  which  divided  by  15  equals  12,  so 
we  shall  want  a  12-inch  stereo  lens.  This  will  not  be  abso- 
lutely accurate,  since  aperture  plates  are  about  15-16  of  an  inch 
wide  and  mats  usually  exceed  3  inches  by  about  l-i6th 
inch. 

Moreover,  the  cheap  lenses  are  not  ground  absolutely  accu- 
rate and  there  will  be  some  variation  there,  too.  But  the  rule 
answers  for  all  practical  purposes.  The  same  result  is  at- 
tained by  dividing  the  distance  by  the  size  of  the  picture 
and  multiplying  by  the  opening.  In  using  this  rule,  don't 
guess  at  distances  and  expect  accurate  results.  Measure  from 
curtain  to  lens  with  a  tape  line,  no  matter  if  someone  has 
"told"  you  it  is  a  certain  distance.  Reject  any  odd  inches  in 
the  measurement  below  six  and  add  a  foot  if  the  fraction  be 
more  than  six  inches.  If  throw  is  more  than  fifty  feet,  meas- 
ure the  aperture  opening  and  multiply  by  its  exact  width  to 
get  accurate  results,  as  on  long  throw  the  least  variation  of 
aperture  will  mean  considerable  on  the  curtain. 

Before  starting  the  day's  run  remove  the  projection  lens 
and  make  sure  there  is  no  oil  on  its  back  lens.  If  there  is, 
you  cannot  get  a  clear  picture.  When  using  a  lens-tube,  the 
position  of  the  picture  may  often  be  shifted  on  the  curtain  as 
much  as  a  foot,  up,  down  or  sidewise,  simply  by  turning  the 
tube  around  in  the  jacket.  About  once  a  month  take  the  pro- 
jection lens  all  apart  and  clean  the  lenses  thoroughly  by 
washing  with  wood  alcohol  and  polishing  carefully  with  a 
soft  dry  cloth  or  chamois.  Because  the  projection  lens  looks 
perfectly  clean  and  clear  when  you  look  through  it  is  no 
evidence  that  it  is  so.  Be  very  careful,  however,  to  get  the 
lens  back  just  as  it  was,  or  you  will  have  trouble  galore.     In 


FOR    MANAGERS    AND    OPERATORS 


69 


CO 

o 

w 

< 


o 

CO 

W 

CO 

;^ 

w 

w 


CO 

w 


w 
o 

CO 

a 

o 


;?: 


.2    Tl-    00    O    •*    X    O    CC' 


C^]rOrO'*Tl-iOt^f>..-(iOCg 


.2ovOOyD<-ivO(MOOtNoOOO 
'TJ'  .c^^(MfO'd■u^Lc^o^^O^OlOOO 
iS    -t!  ^    ^    (M    rrj 

a: 


'  ii  "-^  i-H  .-I  c\j  to 


_Oo^"^COCv)vOO>sOOfOiOt>.>-i 


'^     rH     00     «M 

0^ 

>-i    CO   c^q    ■* 

tn  *j 

^s 

^.5<Nl<^03NO\<-oON'*0>OrOOvo 
,>     .;fO^'*^r^CT^O'M'*>OcOTHvO 


O    O    O)    Tt 
"*   ir>  vo  00 


_n  \o  -!■  ^  to  o 

^-    rO    ■*    "^    t^    <^ 


OCO'+OONf-HlOj-H 

Oi-HtOiOvOiOrOo 
THi-Hi-HrHrHCMfOio 


oco^-^Tt-coo..^ 

»-lfMTj-\00Ct^t^lO 

T-lrH,-li-l,-lCV)COlO 


.5    O    '^    O    O    O    O 
_^-    •^    rf    10    00    O    CJ 


0000 
\0    00    O    O 


i— '    Osl    (O    •^    VD 


•iO\Ot^O<N|ior^OC<IlOt^aNrO 


5  ^ii  o 


O  10  o  10  o  o 

T^     Tf     10     t^     O     lO 


.2  O 


CO    3 


cs.o 

«^ 

V  cd 

II 


CO  ^ 


70  MOTION    PICTURE   HANDBOOK 

projection  work  the  lenses  should  be  ground  accurately 
enough  to  give  clear,  sharp  definition,  but  beyond  this,  quality 
does  not  seem  to  count  for  very  much  in  the  motion  picture 
lens.  There  is  probably  a  difference,  but  the  eye  does  not 
seem  to  be  finely  discerning  enough  to  catch  it.  In  the  stereo 
lens,  qualit}--  cuts  more  figure,  but  even  here  it  is  size  that 
counts.  A  good,  clear-cut  stereo  picture  cannot  be  pro-, 
jected  with  what  is  known  as  a  "quarter-size"  lens,  which  is 
the  article  which  usually  (always,  I  believe,  unless  otherwise 
agreed)  goes  with  the  regular  machine  outfit.  These  lenses 
are  a  nuisance.  A  really  good  stereo  picture  cannot  be  pro- 
jected with  anything  less  than  a  "half-size"  lens,  and  that  is 
what  you  should  by  all  means  have.  The  foregoing  refers 
only  to  stereo  lenses  of  greater  equivalent  focus  than  lo 
inches.  Below  lo  inches  equivalent  focus,  the  quarter  size 
stereo  is  satisfactory.  The  road  man  should  have  stereo 
lenses  for  various  distances  and  a  motion  picture  lens  jacket 
with  lens  tubes  for  various  distances. 

Be  verjf  sure  to  have  your  picture  in  exact  focus.  It  may 
look  all  right  to  you  from  the  operating  room,  still,  a  frac- 
tion of  a  turn  of  the  adjustment  screw  may  improve  it  con- 
siderably. With  the  stereo  it  is  a  good  plan  to  throw  a  pic- 
ture on  the  screen  before  the  show  and  get  someone  to 
work  the  adjustment  screw  for  you  while  you  go  down  in  the 
house  and  direct  him.  Get  it  so  that  every  detail  comes  out 
sharp  and  clear.  A  scene  with  grass,  flowers,  shrubbery  or 
trees  is  best  for  focusing.  Once  set,  it  will,  of  course,  remain 
so  until  disturbed.  It  is  close  attention  to  such  details  as 
this  that  marks  the  real  operator.  The  "Oh,  that's  good 
enough"  man  never  gets  ahead — he  oughtn't  to!  Knowing  a 
thing  does  no  manner  of  good  unless  you  apply  your  knowl- 
edge— remember  that. 

Once  in  a  great  while  a  peculiar  accident  will  happen  to 
a  stereo  lens.  In  some  of  these  lenses  the  two  pieces 
of  glass  which  go  together  at  each  end  are  cemented 
together  with  balsam  gum.  Poor  gum  is  sometimes  used 
and  it  melts  under  heat  and  runs  in  between  the  two 
glasses,  which,  however,  remain  glued  together.  You  may 
get  them  apart  by  placing  in  cold  water  and  bringing  to  a 
boil.  Take  the  lens  out  of  the  boiling  water  and,  working 
very  fast,  with  considerable  force,  slip  the*two  lenses 'apart. 


FOR   MANAGERS   AND   OPERATORS  71 

Don't  try  to  pry  them  apart.  Slip  one  off  the  other — they 
don't  come  apart  easy  even  when  hot.  Clean  the  balsam  oft 
with  turpentine,  polishing  carefully  afterward.  After  having 
cleaned  the  lenses  carefully,  you  may  use  them  without  ce- 
menting. Of  course  the  really  better  way  is  to  send  the 
lens  to  the  maker,  who  will  clean,  repolish  and  recement  it 
for  a  dollar  or  two.  You  may  have  to  drop  the  lenses  in 
the  boiling  water  several  times,  slipping  them  a  ilttle  more 
each  time,  as  the  balsam  holds  very  tight.  Be  very  sure 
you  get  the  lenses  together  again  the  same  way  they  were 
or  you  will  have  trouble. 

Should  one  of  the  lenses  of  a  projection  lens  get  broken 
the  whole  set  is  ruined.  It  cannot  be  replaced,  or,  at  least, 
it  would  cost  more  than  would  an  entire  new  lens.  To  test 
your  motion  picture  lens  for  accuracy  of  projection,  get  a 
piece  of  clear  mica  four  or  five  inches  long  and  cut  it  the 
width  of  a  film.  Now  with  ruler  lay  it  ofif  both  ways  for  two 
inches  near  one  end  with  straight  lines  about  one-eighth  inch 
apart,  scratched  with  the  knife  point,  forming  a  sort  of 
miniature  checkerboard.  Put  this  ruled  portion  over  the 
aperture  plate  in  exactly  the  position  the  film  would  occupy 
(as  regards  the  tracks  and  tension  springs),  close  the  gate 
and  turn  on  the  light.  Now  focus  the  scratch  marks  on  the 
curtain,  and  if  they  appear  clear,  straight  and  without  dis- 
tortion of  any  kind  the  lens  is  true  and  accurate.  In  making 
this  test  be  certain  the  lens  is  clean,  particularly  that  it  has 
no  oil  on  its  inner  end.  This  mica  strip  can  be  used  every  day 
before  the  show  to  test  the  focus  and  get  it  exactly  right;  but 
you  must  get  it  in  the  machine  in  exactly  the  position  the 
film  will  occupy.  In  this  relation  let  me  say  that  the  lens 
sometimes  gets  blamed  for  what  is  really  the  fault  of  a  worn 
aperture  plate.  The  variation  of  as  little  as  i-64th  of  an  inch 
in  the  distance  of  the  film  from  the  lens  as  it  passes  through 
the  machine  will  affect  the  focus.  Now,  it  frequently  happens 
that  aperture  plate  tracks  do  not  wear  evenly.  There  may 
be  a  sort  of  bow,  or,  worse  yet,  double  bow,  in  the  tracks 
where  the  short  spring  contact  comes,  or  the  pressure  of 
the  tension  springs  may  cause  the  outside  or  inside  of  one  or 
both  tracks  to  wear  faster  than  the  other  side.  These  things 
have  a  decided  tendency  to  cup  ihe  film  in  such  manner  that 
it  is  impossible  to  get  the  whole  picture  in  focus.     Under- 


n 


MOTION   PICTURE  HANDBOOK 


stand,  I  do  not  mean  by  the  above  that  i-64th  inch  would 
make  any  difference  provided  the  whole  picture  were  moved 
that  much  to  or  from  the  lens,  but  the  cupping  I  refer  to 
causes  one  portion  of  the  film  to  be  nearer  the  lens  than 
another,  and  this  will  not  do,  even  though  the  variation  be 
but  the  amount  named.  The  ."Im  must  be  perfectly  flat  as  it 
passes  the  aperture  opening. 

THE  SPOT. 


Many  operators  govern  their  light  almost  entirely  from  the 
appearance  of  the  light  which  shines  on  the  gate,  called  the 
"spot."  This  is  decidedly  wrong.  Aside  from  the  length  of 
the  arc  and  effects  produced  by  something  wrong  in  the 
carbons  the  thing  which  should  be  your  sole  guide  in  regulat- 
ing your  light  is  the  picture  itself.  Aside  from  the  two 
above  named  things  it  will  tell  you  every  lamp  adjustment 
you  should  make,  tell  you  when  you  have  made  it  just  right, 
and  tell  you  better  than  can  anything 
else.  Looking  at  a  bright,  brilliant 
spot,  or  sitting,  as  the  operator  must, 
where  it  strikes  the  eyes,  is  very  hard 
on  them.  The  writer  protects  the  spot 
with  a  rather  light  (but  not  too  light) 
strip  of  green  glass.  This  glass,  which 
must  be  made  different  sizes  and 
shapes  for  different  machines,  he  has 
a  tinner  bind  the  glass  in  a  narrow 
frame  of  tin  to  which  is  soldered  a 
flange,  by  which  it  is  attached  by  two 
screws  to  the  gate  or  cooling  plate. 
Fig.  30  shows  the  idea.  You  must 
drill  screw  holes  in  the  cooling  plate 
or  gate,  usually,  to  attach  it.  The 
glass  should  stand  out  about  V/i 
inches  and  be  deep  enough  up  and 
down  to  show  the  whole  spot,  espe- 
cially its  top  edge.  This  glass  takes 
away  all  the  glare  and  one  may  look 
straight  at  the  spot  as  long  as  one 
likes   with   absolutely   no   eye   strain   at   all.     After  you  have 


0 


0 


FOR    MANAGERS'   AND    OPERATORS  73 

used  it  a  day  or  two  you  will  wonder  how  on  earth  you  ever 
got  along  without  it,  though  at  first  it  will  bother  you  some. 
Use  hard  solder  for  fastening  on  the  flange  or  have  it  made 
in  one  piece  with  the  frame.  Some  operators  use  a  metal 
plate  instead  of  the  glass,  but  the  latter  is  best.  The  shield 
should  be  set  back  about  5^  of  an  inch  from  the  picture 
opening,  on  the  operating  side,  of  course. 

The  writer  has  said  in  his  hand-books  and  in  various  arti- 
cles, and  now  repeats,  that  the  operator  who  produces  the 
best  results  watches  his  picture  and  not  his  spot,  making  his 
lamp  adjustments  according  to  what  he  sees  on  the  curtain. 
Like  all  other  rules,  however,  this  must  be  qualified.  At 
times  it  will  be  found  impossible  to  get  the  desired  result 
by  any  lamp  adjustment  you  may  make.  This  indicates  that 
there  is  something  radically  wrong,  and  nine  times  in  ten 
the  trouble  will  be  found  in  the  arc  itself.  Perhaps  a  "mush- 
room" has  formed  on  the  lower  carbon  tip.  Perhaps  your 
carbons  are  not  set  just  right.  But  to  ascertain  precisely 
what  is  wrong  and  intelligently  remedy  it  without  stopping, 
you  must  be  able  to  closely  examine  the  arc.  This  may 
be  done  as  completely  as  you  would  examine  the  flame  of 
a  tallow  candle,  and  with  less  eye  strain.  When  burning 
a  crater  on  a  new  carbon  before  the  show  starts  the  writer 
frequently  opens  the  lamphouse  door  and  watches  the  whole 
operation.  He  can  gaze  right  into  the  crater  and  examine 
every  detail  of  his  carbon  tips  and  does  do  it  several  times 
in  the  course  of  each  day.  How?  Simply  by  the  use  of 
two  pieces  of  glass,  5  inches  long  by  4  wide,  one  red  and  the 
other  green.  But  the  shade  must  be  just  right  to  get  the 
best  result.  A  red  or  green  glass  alone  is  of  small  practical 
value  in  examining  the  arc,  unless  it  be  a  very  weak  one. 

The  top  edge  of  the  spot  is  the  best  guide  in  shortening 
the  arc  (closing  the  carbons).  When  the  carbons  are  too 
far  apart  (too  long  an  arc)  there  is  usually  a  sort  of  nebula 
of  light  forms  at  the  top  of  the  spot.  With  direct  current 
it  will  be  orange  with  a  purple  center  when  it  gets  large, 
and  with  alternating  it  will  be  purple.  With  your  carbons  set 
just  right  this  nebula  (I  use  the  term  for  want  of  a  better) 
will  form  quite  rapidly  and  the  careful  operator  will  not  let 
it  get  more  than   J4  inch  wide,  closing  the  carbons  just  so 


74  MOTION    PICTURE   HANDBOOK 

that  it  disappears.     If  closed  more   tlian  that   the  light  will 
usually  sing,  indicating  that  the  arc  is  too  short.     Trim  your 
lamp  little  and  often  is  the  only  right  rule.     The  nebula  will 
vary  somewhat  with   the   set  of   the   carbons,  also  with   the 
size  of  carbon  used,  but  if  the  carbons  are  set  right  it  nearly 
always  appears  and  forms  a  perfect  guide  for  trimming  the 
lamp.     If  it  does  not  form  it  is  usually  an  indication  that  your 
carbons   are   not   set   right   or   are   not   burning   right.     An- 
other guide  to  carbon  adjustment  is  to  drill  a  ^-inch  hole 
in  the  front  of  the  lamphouse  on  a  line  with  the  top  of  the 
condenser  and   about   i^   inches   to   its   left.     Through   this 
hole  will  be  thrown  on  the  wall  two  points  of  light  with  a 
purple  band  between.     The  width  of  the  band  will  indicate 
the  relative  length   of  the   arc.     Still  another  way  is  to  set 
the    condenser   vent-hole    (if   you    have    a    condenser    casing 
which  will   allow  it)   on  top,  or  a  little  to   the  right  of  the 
top,    and    bend    the    forward    edge    of   the    hole    in    a   trifle. 
Through  the  hole  will  be  projected   on  the  wall,  magazine 
or   film    guard    a   multi-colored    band    edged   with    orange   or 
white,  indicating  the  relative   length   of  the   arc.      But,  after 
all,  the  top  of  the  spot  is  the  best  guide  for  carbon  adjust- 
ment and  he  who  can  read  all  that  it  tells  will  find  it  a  great 
assistance    in    securing   good   light.     The   spot   should  be   as 
small    as   possible    and    get    a    good,    clear   picture,    since    all 
light   which    does   not   enter   the   picture    opening   is   wasted. 
But  even  this  must  be  qualified.     Looking  through  the  light 
beam  j'ou  will  usually  see  a   clear,  white   center  edged,  top 
and  bottom,  with  a  more  or  less  deep  strip  of  orange.     This 
latter  portion  of  the  light  is,  of  course,  very  poor  for  pro- 
jection and  it  is  possible  that  by  using  it  you  will  not  get  as 
brilliant    a    picture    as    though    only    the    white    center    were 
utilized.     This  depends  on  circumstances  and  how  "orangy" 
the  light  is.     Just  what  causes  this  phenomenon  the  writer 
is  unable  to  say,  but  believes  it  to  be  due  to   (a)  wrong  set 
of  carbons,  (b)  uneven  heating  of  crater,  (c)  imperfect  lenses, 
one  alone  or  all  combined. 

The  spot  should  be  perfectly  round.  An  oblong  spot  cor- 
nerwise  of  the  gate  indicates  carbons  out  of  line  with  each 
other  sidewise.  Oblong  straight  across  the  aperature  in- 
dicates crater  too  low  down.  Move  bottom  tip  ahead  or  top 
one  back  according  to  circumstances.     The  size  of  the  spot 


FOR    MANAGERS    AND    OPERATORS  75 

is  controlled  by  moving  the  lamp  toward  or  away  from  the 
condenser.  If  the  spot  is  edged  with  light,  bright  blue  and 
has  a  sort  of  "puckered"  appearance  the  lamp  is  too  far 
from  the  condenser.  This  is  a  condition  which  will  usually 
only  appear  when  using  long  focus  condensers.  It  is  pos- 
sibl'e  with  short  focus  lenses,  but  it  is  not  likely  you  will 
ever  get  the  lamp  that  far  back  with  them. 

THE    PRINCIPLES    OF    OPTICAL    PROJECTION. 

Reproduced  by  courtesy   of  Bauscli   &  Lamb,  Rochester,  N.   Y. 

The  following  brief  review  of  the  leading  principles  of 
projection  is  designed  for  the  reader  who,  having  no  knowl- 
edge of  the  science  of  optics,  wishes  to  understand  the 
operation  of  projection  apparatus. 

With  the  aid  of  the  apparatus  we  throw  or  project  upon 
a  screen  an  enlarged  image  of  a  transparent  object  (a  slide 
or  film).  The  process  is  almost  the  reverse  of  ordinary 
photography.  For  example,  in  photographing  a  scene  by 
means  of  the  photographic  objective  or  lens  we  obtain  a 
reduced  image  of  that  scene  on  the  ground  glass.  This 
glass  is  replaced  by  the  sensitized  plate  and  by  the  use  of 
chemicals  the  image  is  fixed  thereon.  Now  in  projection  we 
reverse  this  process.  From  the  picture  made  with  the  lens 
we  make  a  transparent  slide,  or  we  use  the  film  negatives, 
and  by  means  of  a  condensed  light  we  strongly  illuminate 
these,  and  with  an  objective  lens  an  enlarged  image  is  pro- 
jected upon  the  screen,  and  this  screen  image  corresponds 
with  the  real  objects  first  photographed. 

From  this  illustration  it  will  be  seen  that  the  first  essen- 
tial in  projection  work  is  the  lens  or  objective.  Just  as  in 
photography  the  quality  and  tone  of  the  picture  depend  to  a 
very  great  extent  upon  the  quality  and  character  of  the  lens, 
so  in  projection  the  objective  is  the  factor  which  determines 
the  excellence  of  the  screen  image. 

The  condensing  lenses  must  be  of  a  diameter  slightly 
greater  than  the  diagonal  of  the  slide  or  film  in  use.  The 
size  most  commonly  used  is  4^  inches  in  diameter. 

As  the  condensing  lenses  are  in  close  proximity  to  the  arc 
or  other  source  of  light,  they  arc,  of  course,  subjected  to 
considerable  heat  and  will  expand  and  contract  accordingly 
as  they  are  heated  or  cooled.  Some  arrangement  should, 
therefore,  be  made  for  this  expansion  and  contraction  so  that 
it  will  be  as  even  as  possible.     We  have  done  this  in  our 


76 


MOTION    PICTURE   HANDBOOK 


patent  ventilated  mount,  which  provides  for  the  circulation 
of  air  and  ensures  the  even  expansion  and  contraction  of  the 
condensers. 

The  optical  principle  of  projection  for  both  lantern  slide 
and  moving  picture  apparatus  will,  perhaps,  be  more  readily 
understood  from  the  diagram  on  this  page. 

At  E  is  an  electric  light  or  other  suitable  illuminant  the 
light  from  which  is  caught  up  by  the  condensing  lenses  or 
condenser  C;  this  condenser  is  an  arrangement  of  lenses  so 
constructed  as  firstly,  to  gather  up  as  great  a  volume  of 
light  as  possible,  and  secondly,  to  concentrate  the  light 
which  it  gathers  at  the  center  or  diaphragm  plane  of  the 
objective  when  the  objective  is  located  at  the  proper  dis- 
tance from  the  slide  or  film,  which  distance  is  determined 
by  the  focal  length  of  the  objective. 


Diagram  Showing  the  Principles,  of  ODIical  Projciiion. 

The  slide  or  film  should  be  placed  at  such  a  point  that 
the  entire  area  of  the  opening  is  fully  illuminated,  and  it 
should  also  be  placed  so  that  the  greatest  number  of  light 
rays  possible  should  pass  through  it.  Taking  into  consid- 
eration the  fact  that  the  opening  in  the  mat  in  the  lantern 
slide  is  2)4  x  3  inches  and  in  the  moving  picture  film  is 
^i  X  H  inches,  it  will  at  once  be  evident  that  the  slide  must 
be  placed  at  the  point  D  in  the  diagram  in  order  that  its 
entire  area  be  covered,  and  the  moving  picture  film  must 
be  located  at  the  point  F  in  order  that  it  may  take  in  the 
greatest  number  of  light  rays. 

Proceeding  from  the  slide  the  light  passes  through  the 
objective  O,  where  the  rays  cross,  and  the  object  is  hence 
reversed,  and  by  means  of  the  objective  the  object  is  imaged 
or  delineated  upon  the  screen  S.  The  degree  of  sharpness 
and  flatness  of  the  image  depends  upon  the  optical  corrections 
of  the  lens. 

The  relative  positions  of  the  arc,  condenser,  and  objective 


FOR    MAiSTAGERS    AND    OPERATORS  11 

must  be  such  that  an  image  of  the  light  source  will  be 
formed  at  the  diaphragm  of  the  objective.  All  the  light 
coming  from  the  condenser  is  then  utilized  and  the  image 
on  the  screen  is  at  its  brightest. 

Oftentimes  lantern  slides  and  films  are  to  be  used  inter- 
changeably, and  approximately  the  same  sized  image  is 
desired  with  both.  As  the  opening  in  the  slide  mat  is  ap- 
proximately three  times  that  of  the  moving  picture  film,  it 
is,  therefore,  necessary  to  have  a  lens  for  lantern  slides 
approximately  three  times  the  focal  length  of  that  of  the 
lens  used  for  films.  It  is  possible  to  match  the  size  of  the 
images  in  one  dimension  only  (either  width  or  height)  as 
the  two  openings  are  not  proportionate  in  size. 

It  is  necessary,  therefore,  in  ordering  to  specify  whether 
the  images  are  to  be  the  same  height  or  width. 

The  Selection  of  a  Lens. 

The  most  important  consideration  in  projection  work  is 
the  lens,  for  on  its  selection  depend  the  quality  and  size  of 
the  image  on  the  screen.  Not  the  lens  mounting,  nor  even 
the  diameter  of  the  lens  itself,  but  its  equivalent  focus  and 
distance  from  the  screen,  determine  the  size  of  the  image. 

At  a  given  distance  the  greater  the  focal  length  the  smaller 
will  be  the  image.  Shorter  focus  lenses,  therefore,  will  give 
large  images.  Do  not  make  the  mistake  of  selecting  lenses 
of  such  short  focus;  that  the  magnification  will  be  so  great 
that  when  the  observer  is  near  the  screen  much  of  the 
definition  and  perspective  will  be  sacrificed. 

Brilliant  pictures  of  medium  size  are  far  more  satisfactory. 

The  projection  distance  must  be  measured  from  the  film 
or  slide  to  the  screen. 

The  tables  on  pages  80  and  81  show  the  size  of  image 
obtained  with  lenses  of  different  focal  lengths  at  varying 
distances.  Other  sizes,  focal  lengths  and  distances  can  be 
computed  as  follows: 

Size  of  Image. — This  can  be  determined  by  multiplying  the 
difference  between  the  distance  from  lens  to  screen  and  the 
focal  length  of  the  objective,  by  the  size  of  the  slide,  and 
dividing  the  product  by  the  focal  length. 

For  example: 

Let  L  be  the  projection  distance,  40  feet  (480  inches);  S, 
the  slide  mat,  3  inches;  F,  the  focus  of  the  lens,  12  inches; 


78  MOTION  PICTURE  HANDBOOK 

then  we  have  the  formula  (in  which  d  is  the  size  of  image). 

S(L-F) 

d  = — 

F 

Substituting  for  the  letters  their  known  values  we  have 

3  (480—12) 

d=: =117  in.   or  g.)^  ft. 

12 

Focal  Length. — To  determine  this  factor  multiply  the  size 
of  the  slide  or  film  opening  by  the  distance  from  the  lens  to 
screen,  and  divide  the  product  by  the  sum  of  the  size  of  the 
image  and  the  size  of  the  slide. 

S  XL 

Thus  we  have  the  formula  F  = and  substituting  their 

d  +  S 
values  as  before 

3    X  480        1440 

= =  12   inches. 


117+    3  120 

Distance  from  Slide  to  Screen. — With  the  other  factors 
given  we  can  get  this  by  multiplying  the  sum  of  the  size 
of  the  image  and  size  of  slide  mat,  by  the  focal  length, 
and    divide    this    product    by    the    size    of    slide    mat,    thus: 

F(d  +  S) 
L  = ,  substituting  values 


12  (117 +  3) 

L  = ^480  inches  ^40   feet. 

3 

Adjustment  of  Xight. 

Successful  results  in  projection  depend  largely  upon  the 
correct  adjustment  of  the  lamp,  which  must  throw  a  bril- 
liantly illuminated  circle  upon  the  screen. 

After  the  objective  is  focused,  as  will  be  evidenced  by  a 
sharp,  clear  image  on  the  screen,  remove  slide  and  slide 
holder,  and  examine  the  illuminated  circle.  If  the  light  is 
centered  and  the  lamp  correctl}'  adjusted  this  circle  will  be 
clear  and  entirely  free  from  coloration  or  shadows. 


FOR    MANAGERS    AND    OPERATORS 


79 


The  following  diagrams  illustrate  the  results  of  defective 
centering,  showing  the  shadows  and  stating  the  causes. 
These  can  be  speedily  remedied  and  a  little  practice  will 
soon  make  one  adept  in  centering  the  light  accurately. 


In  Figs.  I  and  2  the  radiant,  i.  e.,  the  crater,  needs  to  be 
properly  adjusted  laterally,  it  is  too  far  to  the   right  or  left. 

In  Figs.  3  and  4  it  is  too  high  or  too  low. 

In  Figs.  5,  6  and  7  it  is  too  near  or  too  far  from  the  con- 
denser. 

Fig.  8  shows  it  to  be  in  correct  position,  the  field  being 
entirely  clear. 


CONDENSER  BREAKAGE. 

An  operator  in  Winnipeg,  Canada,  suggests  a  very  simple 
and  inexpensive  method  of  preventing  condensers  from  crack- 
ing. It  is  passed  on  for  what  it  is  worth.  He  places  a  new 
condenser  in  the  kitchen  oven  for  four  or  five  days,  allowing 
it  to  heat  and  cool  off  again  and  again  as  the  fire  is  used. 
By  this  method  of  tempering  he  saj^s  that  a  condenser  lasted 
fourteen  months  and  was  then  broken  only  by  accident  while 
being  cleaned. 

Boiling  the  condensers  has  also  been  suggested,  but  the 
method  of  baking  and  cooling  appears  feasible  and  is  based 
on  logical  reasons, 


80  MOTION    PICTURE   HANDBOOK 

Table  showing  size  of  screen  image  when 
moving  picture  films  are  projected. 

Size  of  Mat  opening  ]l  x  ^-^  indi 


Eqiilv. focus 

IS 

20 

25 

30 

35 

40 

45 

50 

60 

70 

80 

90 

100 

Inches 

ft. 

ft. 

ft. 

ft. 

ft. 

ft. 

It. 

ft. 

ft. 

ft. 

ft. 

ft. 

ft. 

21/3 

4.8 

6.4 

8.0 

9.6 

',,.3 

12.9 

14.5 

16.1 

6.5 

8.7 

11.0 

13.2 

15.4 

17.6 

19.8 

22.0 

2y2 

5.4 

6.8 

8.2 

9.6 

10.9 

12.3 

13.7 

16.4 

7.4 

9.3 

11.2 

13.1 

14.9 

16.8 

18.7 

22.4 

3 

4.5 

5.7 

6.8 

8.0 

9.1 

10.3 

11.4 

13.7 

16.0 

6.2 

7.7 

9.3 

10.9 

12.4 

14.0 

15.6 

18.7 

21.8 

i'A 

4.9 

5.8 

6.8 

7.8 

8.8 

9.8 

11.7 

13.7 

15.7 

6.6 

8.0 

9.3 

10.6 

12.0 

13.3 

16.0 

18.7 

21.4 

4 

4.2 

5.1 

6.0 

6.8 

7.7 

8.5 

10,3 

12.0 

13.7 

15.4 

5.8 

7.0 

8.1 

9.3 

10.5 

11.6 

14.0 

16.3 

18.7 

21.0 

4}4 

4.5 

5.3 

6.2 

6.8 

7.7 

9.1 

10.6 

12.2 

13.7 

15.4 

6.2 

7.2 

8.4 

9.3 

10.5 

12.4 

14.5 

16.6 

18.7 

21.0 

5 

* 

4.8 

5.4 

6J 

6.8 

8.2 

9.6 

10.9 

12.3 

13.7 

1 

6.5 

7.4 

8.4 

9.3 

11.2 

13.0 

14.9 

16.8 

18.7 

i'A 

4.3 

4.9 

5.6 

6.2 

7.4 

8.7 

9.9 

11.2  12.4 

5.9    6.7 

7.6 

8.4 

10.2 

11.9 

13.6 

15.3  17.0 

6 

1  4.5 

5.1 

5.7 

6.8 

8.0 

9.1 

10.3  11.4 

11  6.2 

7.0 

7.7 

9.3 

10.9 

12.4 

14.0  15.6 

i'A 

4.7 
6.4 

5.2 
7.1 

6.3 
8.8 

7.3 
10.0 

8.4 
11.4 

9.6  10.6 
13.0  14.5 

7 

4.4 
6.0 

4.9 
6.6 

5.8 
8.0 

6.8 
9.3 

7.8 
10.6 

8.8    9.8 
12.0  13.3 

VA 

4.5 

5.4 

6.4 

7.3 

8.2    9.1 

6.2 

7.4 

8.7 

10.0 

11.2 

12.3 

8 

1 

1 

5.1 
7.0 

6.0 
8.1 

6.8 
9.3 

7.7 
10.5 

8.5 
11.6 

Example;  With  a  lens  of  5}4  inch  focus  at  a  distance  of 
35  ft.  the  screen  image  will  be  4.3  x  5.9;  at  40  ft.,  4.9  x  6.7; 
a.t45ft.,  5.6x7.6  etc. 


FOR    MANAGERS    AND    OPERATORS 


81 


Table  showing  size  of  screen  image  when 
lantern-slides  are  projected. 

Size  of  Mat  opening  2^  x  3  inches 


Eguiv. focus 

15 

20 

25 

1  30 

1  85" 

40 

45 

1  50 

60 

70 

80 

90 

100 

Inches 

ft. 

iiL. 

ft.  !  ft. 

Uj^ 

ft. 

ft. 

!  ft. 

ft. 

ft. 

ft. 

ft^ 

it._ 

5 

8.0 

10.8 

13.5 

16.3 

19.0 

8.8 

11.8 

14.8 

17.8 

20.8 

S'A 

7.3 
7.9 

9.8 
10.7 

12.3 
13.4 

14.8 
18.1 

17.3 
18.8 

19.8 
21.6 

6 

6.6 
7.3 

8.9 
9.8 

11.2: 13.5 
12.3  14.8 

15.8 
17.3 

18.1 
19.8 

20.4 
22.3 

6y2 

6.1 
6.7 

8.2 

9.0 

10.4  12.5 
11.3!  13.6 

14.6 
15.9 

16.7 
18.2 

18.8 
20.5 

7 

5.7 

7.6 

9.6 

11.6 

13.5 

15.5 

17.5 

19.4 

6.2 

8.3 

10.5 

12.8 

14.8 

16.9 

19.0 

21.2 

TA 

0 

7.1 

».S 

10.8 

12.6 

14.4 

16.3 

18.1 

51 

7.8 

8.8 

11.8 

13.8 

15.8 

17.8 

19.8 

8 

6.8 

8.4 

10.1 

11.8 

13.5 

15.2 

17.0 

204 

7.3 

9.1 

11.0 

12.9 

14.8 

16.6 

18.5 

223 

i'J 

6.2 

7.9 

9.5 

11.1 

12.7 

14.3 

16.0 

19.2 

6.8 

8.6 

10,3 

12.1 

13.9 

15.6 

17.4 

20.9 

8 

5.9 

7.4 

8.9 

10.5 

12.0 

13.5 

15.1 

18.1 

21.1 

6.4 

8.1 

9.8 

11.4 

13.1 

14.8 

16.4 

19.8 

23.1 

8'i 

5.6 

7.0 

8.5 

9.9 

11.4 

12.8 

14.2 

17.1 

20.0 

6.1 

7J 

9.2 

10.8 

12.4 

14.0 

15.5 

18.7 

21.9 

10 

5.3 

6.6 

8.0 

9.4 

10.8 

12.2 

13.5 

16.3 

19.0 

21.8 

5.8 

7.3 

8.8 

10.3 

11.8 

13.3 

14.8 

17.8 

20.8 

23.8 

12 

5.5 

6.6 

7.8 

8.9 

10.1 

11.2 

13.5 

15.8 

18.1 

20.4 

6.0 

7.3 

8.5 

9.8 

11.0 

12.3 

14.8 

17.3 

19.8 

22.3 

14 

5.6 

6.6 

7.8 

8.6 

9.6 

11.6 

13.5 

15.5 

17.5 

19.4 

6.2 

7.3 

8.3 

9.4 

10.5 

12.6 

14.8 

16.9 

19.0 

21.2 

16 

5.8 

6.6 

7.5 

8.4 

10.1 

11.8 

13.5 

15,2 

17.0 

, 

6.3 

7.3 

8.2 

9.1 

11.0 

12.9 

14.8 

16.6 

18.5 

18 

5.1 

5.9 

6.6 

7.4 

8.9 

10.5 

12.0 

13.5 

15.1 

5.6 

8.4 

7.3 

8.1 

9.8 

11.4 

13.1 

14.8jl5.4 

20 

5.3 

6.0 

6.6 

8.0 

9.4 

10.8 

12.2 

13.5 

5.8 

6.5 

7.3 

8.8 

10.3 

11.8 

13.3 

14.8 

22 

S.4 

8.0 

7.3 

8.5 

9.8 

11.0 

12.3 

5.9 

6.6 

7.9 

9.3 

10.7 

12.0 

13.4 

24 

5.5 
6.0 

6.6 
7.3 

7.8 
8.5 

8.9 
9.8 

10.1 
11.0 

11.2 
12.3 

Example:  With  a  lens  of  10-inch  focus  at  a  distance  of 
20  ft.  the  screen  image  will  be  5.3  x  5.8;  at  25  ft.,  6.6  x  7.3; 
at  30  ft..  8.0  X  8.8;  at  50  ft.,  13.5  x  14.8  etc. 


82  MOTION   PICTURE  HANDBOOK 


Carbons.! 


This  subject  is  one  of  greatest  importance  since  it  involves 
the  matter  of  light — the  very  foundation  stone  of  projection. 
1  believe  it  will  be  valuable  to  the  operator  to  know  what 
carbons  are  made  of  and  how  they  are  made  and  to  that  end 
a  short  dissertation  on  their  manufacture  will  be  included. 
Carbons  are  made  from  6  inches  to  as  much  as  30  inches  in 
length.  They  are  supposed  to  be  perfectly  round  and  straight, 
but  a  variation  of  1J/2  per  cent  of  the  nominal  diameter  is 
allowed  in  the  matter  of  roundness  and  a  6-inch  carbon  may 
be  1-32  or  a  16-inch  one  1-16  out  of  true  as  to  straightness 
without  being  rejected.  Carbons  are  made  from  a  mixture 
of  three  substances  in  varying  proportions,  viz.:  soot  ob- 
tained from  the  imperfect  combustion  of  pitch,  tar,  naphtha- 
line, oils  or  resins;  retort  carbon  formed  in  process  of  making 
illuminating  gas  and  petroleum  coke  obtained  in  process  of 
distillation  of  mineral  oils.  Soot  is  the  best  form  of  carbon, 
retort  carbon  comes  next  and  petroleum  coke  is  poorest. 
The  quality  of  the  carbon  depends  largely  on  the  percetage 
used  of  the  above  named  materials.  Quality  is  judged  by 
breaking  a  carbon  and  examining  the  fracture  also  by  the 
sound  when  struck,  but  this  is  beyond  any  but  the  expert. 
Some  operators  claim  they  can  judge  of  the  quality  of  a 
carbon  by  its  color  and  gloss,  but  in  this  I  believe  they  are 
mistaken.  The  expert  in  carbons  might  be  able  to  tell 
something  from  the  exterior  of  a  carbon  but  hardly  an 
operator.  In  manufacturing  carbons  the  materials  are  first 
thoroughly  pulverized  into  a  dust,  then  purified  and  metalic 
particles  removed  by  action  of  a  powerful  electro  magnet. 
The  binder  is  now  added  and  the  mass  mixed  to  a  stiflf  dough 
or  paste.  For  binder  common  coal  tar  is  most  commonly 
used,  though  some  makers  employ  a  special  syrup  (sugar 
syrup,  I  understand  it  to  be).  After  the  binder  is  thoroughly 
incorporated  the  mass  is  passed  between  heavy  rollers  under 
great  pressure  and  is  then  stamped  into  blocks  12  inches 
in  diameter  by  about  16  inches  in  height.     These  blocks  are 


FOR    MANAGERS    AND    OPERATORS  83 

placed  in  a  hydraulic  press  in  which  is  a  steel  die  the  size 
of  the  carbon  being  made.  If  it  is  to  be  a  cored  carbon  a 
steel  needle  the  size  of  the  core  is  placed  in  the  center  of 
the  opening.  The  press  now  forces  the  mass  through  this 
die  under  pressure  of  several  thousand  pounds  per  sq.  inch. 

As  the  carbon  rod  is  leaving  the  die  a  steel  wheel  runs 
along  it  printing  the  maker's  name  and  other  marks,  usually 
denoting  quality.  The  rod  is  next  cut  into  36-inch  lengths 
which  are  allowed  to  roll  down  a  slightly  inclined  table  to 
straighten  them.  They  are  then  tied  in  large  bundles  and 
baked  for  several  days  at  a  temperature  of  about  2,700  de- 
gress F.  This  baking  reduces  the  binder  into  a  substance 
closely  resembling  very  hard  coke.  The  rods  are  now  cut 
into  stock  length,  tested  as  to  straightness,  examined  for 
imperfections  and  pointed.  Those  to  be  cored  have  forced 
into  their  centers  a  stiff  mass  formed  of  a  powder  obtained 
by  grinding  up  defective  carbons  which  have  been  baked 
mixed  with  water  glass.  The  percentage  of  water  glass  in 
the  core  is  a  most  important  matter.  The  more  there  is  of 
it  the  longer  arc,  within  certain  limits,  can  be  pulled  with 
a  given  current.  The  carbons  are  thoroughly  dried  after  core- 
ing,  but  not  again  baked,  and  are  then  ready  for  use. 

In  purchasing  carbons  it  is  better  to  get  as  long  stock  as 
you  can  use  in  your  lamphouse  and  considerable  saving  is 
effected  if  you  can  use  12,  or  even  lo-inch  carbons,  at  least 
for  the  upper.  There  is  just  so  much  waste  to  each  carbon 
in  the  form  of  a  butt,  averaging,  usually,  three  inches  in 
length.  This  waste  is  the  same  with  a  six-inch  as  with  a  12- 
inch  carbon,  but  if  your  12-inch  stock  is  cut  in  two  and  used 
in  the  form  of  two  6-inch  pieces  there  are  two  butts  instead 
of  one.  Do  you  see  the  point?  In  other  words,  when  using 
6-inch  carbons  you  waste  one-half  the  stock  in  the  form  of 
butts,  whereas  with  12-inch  carbons  you  waste  but  one-fourth. 
Where  a  house  runs  all  day  and  evening  too  this  item  will 
amount  to  more  dollars  than  you  would  imagine  in  the 
course  of  a  year.  In  a  house  using  strong  light,  running  con- 
tinuous II  hours  per  day,  there  will  be  about  350  more  12-inch 
carbons  used  in  a  year  if  cut  into  6-inch  length  than  would 
be  consumed  by  burning  12-inch  stock.  Where  12-inch  stock 
is  cut  into  6-inch  lengths  the  whole  bundle  may  easily  be 
sawed  in  two  with  an  old  carpenter's  handsaw,  provided  it 


g4  MOTION   PICTURE  HANDBOOK 

be  done  before  the  bundle  is  loosened.  A  coarse,  low-speed 
emery  wheel  is  best  to  sharpen  carbons  on,  but  in  lieu  of  that 
a  ID  or  i2-inch  cabinet  rasp  is  excellent.  If  you  are  using 
alternating  current  be  very  careful  to  sharpen  your  carbons 
with  a  true  point,  being  particular  to  get  the  small,  flat 
space  at  the  end  always  about  the  same.  The  point,  par- 
ticularly the  flat  space  at  the  tip,  will  be  your  guide  in  setting 
the  carbon  and,  as  will  be  later  explained,  it  is  of  utmost 
importance  that  you  get  your  carbons  set  exactly  right  with 
alternating  current.  Cracks  running  lengthwise  of  the  car- 
bon are  not  faults  but  rather  evidence  that  the  carbon  has 
been  well  and  thoroughly  baked.  Cracks  running  around 
the  dfameter,  however,  are  serious  faults  and  any  such  should 
be  promptly  thrown  away.  In  making  your  purchases  in- 
sist on  examining  ends  of  cored  carbons  and  reject  any 
bundles  in  which  are  many  carbons  containing  imperfect 
cores. 

You  cannot  get  a  good  light  with  a  carbon  that  has  a 
bad  core.  The  core  is  for  the  purpose  of  holding  the  cur- 
rent central  in  the  carbon.  The  soft  core  has  a  relatively 
higher  conductivity  than  has  the  hard  carbon  surrounding  it. 
This  holds  the  current  to  the  center  of  the  carbon  and 
enables  you  to  maintain  a  better  crater  and  keep  it  where 
you  want  it.  When  using  direct  current  it  will  frequently 
happen  that  the  lower  carbon  will  burn  to  a  long  "needle" 
tip  and  there  will  be  a  little  heap  of  black  powder  on  top 
of  the  lower  carbon  arm.  This  is  due  to  the  fact  that  the 
binding  material  is  burning  out,  thus  leaving  the  carbon  itself 
free  and  it  drops  away  without  being  consumed.  This  is 
due  to  abnormal  heating  through  higher  resistance  of  the 
carbon  and  may  be  remedied  to  some  extent  by  using  a  larger 
carbon,  though  even  the  ^  size  will  do  it  sometimes  when 
j'ou  are  using  a  heavy  current.  That  it  is  due  in  consid- 
erable extent  to  poor  carbon  is  proven  by  the  fact  that  one 
carbon  will  not  needle  at  all  while  the  next  one,  of  same 
size  and  kind,  will  needle  for  2  or  more  inches.  This  shows 
there  is  a  vast  difference  in  the  resistance  of  carbons — or  the 
writer  thinks  it  does  anyhow.  He  may  be  wrong,  but  this 
is  the  explanation  which  appeals  to  him.  The  formation  of 
glass-like  beads  on  a  carbon  tip  is  evidence  of  high  quality, 
this  being  the  only  residue  of  voltalized  soot.     It  frequently 


FOR    MANAGERS    AND    OPERATORS'  85 

iiappens  that  a  thin-stemmed,  mushroom-shaped  tip  will  form 
on  the  lower  carbon  when  using  direct  current.  This  is  due 
to  the  carbons  being  held  too  closely  together,  thus  ex- 
cluding the  free  passage  of  air  to  the  crater.  Under  this  con- 
dition particles  of  voltalized  carbon  are  carried  along  by 
the  current  instead  of  being  consumed.  In  the  arc  they 
are  converted  into  graphite  and  cling  to  the  tip  of  the  lower 
carbon.  This  graphite  "cap"  presents  high  resistance  to 
combustion  and  remains  until  it  falls,  or  is  knocked  off.  Once 
started  by  too  close  contact  of  the  carbons  the  mushroom 
grows  until  it  is  sometimes  half  an  inch  long  and  you  will 
have  poor  light  as  long  as  it  is  there.  It  can  be  consumed 
by  burning  a  long  arc  but  the  best  way  is  to  knock  it  off 
with  a  screwdriver  blade  and  be  more  careful  in  future. 
The  white  ash  which  forms  inside  the  lamphouse  when  using 
cored  carbons  is  the  residue  of  the  water  glass  contained 
in  the  cores. 

As  to  the  size  and  kind  of  carbons  to  be  used,  that  will 
depend  on  several  things  and  will  vary  with  individual  cases. 
For  alternating  current  it  may  be  said  that  ^  cored  above 
and  below  is  the  thing  in  practically  all  cases.  For  direct 
current  5^  cored  fills  the  bill  above,  but  either  §^,  9-16  or  J^- 
inch  cored  or  9-16  or  J^-inch  solid  may  be  best  below,  accord- 
ing to  individual  preference  or  the  current  strength  used. 
If  solid  is  used  below  do  not  get  too  hard  a  carbon  or  your 
light  will  have  a  tendency  to  be  yellow.  Try  the  different 
carbons  until  you  get  the  one  which  gives  best  results,  but 
don't  decide  by  burning  one  carbon.  Give  each  one  a  day's 
trial  at  least.  In  putting  you  carbons  into  the  clamp  it  is 
necessary  to  use  considerable  pressure  on  the  clamp,  since 
if  there  is  not  good  contact,  much  heat  will  be  generated 
through  electrical  resistance  due  to  poor  contact.  If  the 
contact  is  very  poor  there  may  be  arcing  between  the  carbon 
and  clamps  and  this  will  consume  carbon,  still  further  loosen- 
ing the  connection  and  unduly  heating  the  carbon  arm  and 
clamp.  Don't  overdo  the  matter  of  pressure,  however,  as 
the  carbon  arms  and  clamps  put  out  with  many  lamps  are 
very  weak,  especially  when  hot.  Use  judgment  and  common 
sense.  Some  advocate  using  an  upper  carbon  which  has 
been  flattened  on  one  side  with  alternating  current,  but  the 


86  MOTION    PICTURE  HANDBOOK 

writer  has  been  unable  to  detect  any  material  advantage  from 
this  practice. 

SETTING   THE   CARBONS. 

Whether  you  are  using  A.  C.  or  D.  C.  (alternating  current 
or  direct  current)  practically  all  available  illumination  comes 
from  the  "crater,"  a  saucer  shaped  depression  which  forms 
on  the  upper  (positive)  carbon  tip  with  D.  C.  and  on  both 
tips  with  A.  C.  (though  with  the  latter  the  craters  are  usu- 
ally flat,  rather  than  depressed  in  the  center,  as  with  D.  C.)- 
The  whole  endeavor  in  setting  the  carbons  should  be  to 
get  the  crater  to  form  of  good  size  and  face  the  condensing 
lens  as  squarely  as  possible.  Setting  the  carbons  with  D.  C. 
is  comparatively  easy  and  simple.  All  projection  lamps 
are  so  made  that  the  top  may  be  set  further  back  than  the 
bottom  (angling  the  lamp,  this  is  called)  so  as  to  aid  in 
getting  the  crater  square  with  the  condenser.  In  all  lamps 
but  the  Edison,  I  believe,  this  angle  may  be  varied  within 
certain  limits.  With  D.  C.  the  lamp  should  be  angled  back 
just  as  much  as  possible  and  not  get  the  lower  carbon  tip, 
or  any  part  of  it,  between  the  crater  and  condenser. 

Whether  or  no  the  lower  tip  is  interfering  is  somewhat 
difficult  to  tell  unless  one  is  able  to  closely  examine  the  tips 
by  aid  of  the  glasses  before  mentioned.  Draw  a  line  with 
the  eye,  when  the  arc  is  burning  normally,  from  the  lower 
edge  of  the  crater  to  the  lower  edge  of  the  lens  and  if  such 
a  line  strikes  the  lower  tip  there  is  interference  and  loss 
of  illumination,  though  if  slight  it  may  not  amount  to  much. 
The  greater  angle  you  can  give  the  lamp  without  this  inter- 
ference the  greater  illumination  you  will  get  from  a  given 
arc,  but  the  amount  of  angle  will  be  checked  by  the  lower 
carbon  arm  striking  the  front  wall  of  the  lamphouse  when 
the  lamp  is  wide  open,  or  the  lower  carbon  doing  the  same 
thing  when  a  new  one  which  projects  below  the  arm  is  in. 
This  must  be  taken  into  consideration  since  angling  beyond 
the  point  where  the  carbon  arm  interferes  involves  burning 
a  shorter  lower  carbon  with  consequent  greater  carbon  waste. 

I  have  already  spoken,  I  believe,  of  the  size  of  carbons 
best  to  use.  With  A.  C.  it  matters  not  at  all  which  wire  is 
connected  to  upper  or  lower  binding  post  of  lamp,  but  with 
D.  C.  the  negative  must  be  connected  to  the  lower  and  the 


FOR    MANAGERS    AND    OPERATORS 


87 


positive  to  the  upper.  There  are  several  methods  of  ascer- 
taining which  is  the  negative  and  which  the  positive  wire, 
but  the  following  is  simplest:  Connect  one  wire  from  one 
binding  post   of  operating  switch   to   lower   binding  post  of 


lamp.  Connect  other  wire  through  the  rheostat  to  upper 
lamp  binding  post.  Now,  first  being  sure  the  resistance 
is  in  if  using  an   adjustable   rheostat,   close   the   switch   and 


88 


MOTION  PICTURE  HANDBOOK 


light  the  lamp.  Let  it  burn  for  five  minutes  and  shut  it 
off.  Examine  the  carbon  tips.  If  the  lower  is  burned  to 
a  round  point  and  the  upper  has  a  saucer-like  depression  you 
are  all  right,  but  if  just  the  opposite  condition  exists  change 
the  wires  at  the  lamp  and  cut  the  rheostat  in  on  the  other 
wire.      The    latter    is    not    necessary   but    the    writer    prefers 


F\^3l 


the  rheostat  on  the  positive  wire,  since  he  thus  has  a  little 
less  voltage  on  the  lamp  and  this  makes  any  shocks  he  may 
get  somewhat  lighter.     Otherwise  it  makes  no  practical  dif- 


ference which  wire  it  is  on.  Having  ascertained  that  your 
carbons  are  in  perfect  line  with  each  other  sidewise  (see 
"The  Lamp")  set  your  carbons  in  place  as  per  Fig.  31.    Some 


FOR    MANAGERS    AND    OPERATORS  89 

operators  prefer  setting  the  top  carbon  parallel  with  the 
lamp  rack-bars  and  angling  the  lower  one  slightly  ahead, 
but  this  is  merely  a  matter  of  individual  preference.  We 
have  now  arrived  at  the  one  most  important  thing  in  secur- 
ing good  projection  light,  and  that  is  to  get  the  advancement 
of  the  lower  carbon  tip  exactly  right,  since  this  is  what  will 
in  great  measure  determine  the  position  of  your  crater.  If 
you  set  it  too  far  back  your  crater  Avill  be  too  low  down  and 
the  light  will  be  thrown  downward  instead  of  straight  ahead 
as  it  should  be.  If,  on  the  other  hand,  you  get  it  too  far 
ahead  a  long  "skirt"  will  form  on  the  back  edge  of  the  upper 
carbon  tip.  This  is  not  a  good  condition,  since  when  it 
prevails  the  crater  is  not  in  the  best  position  and  more- 
over there  is  tendency  of  this  "skirt"  to  break  off,  often  fully 
half  way  up  the  crater.  Fig  32A  shows  lower  tip  too  far 
back.  Fig.  32B,  tip  too  far  forward.  Fig.  32C  shows  an 
ideal  condition,  and  this  latter  condition  may  be  at  all 
times  maintained,  barring  imperfections  in  carbons,  by  close 
attention.  But  let  me  impress  upon  you  that  it  is  more  than 
anything  else  the  exact  amount  of  advancement  of  the  lower 
carbon  ahead  of  the  upper  which  makes  it.  I  am  assuming, 
of  course,  that  you  have  experimented  and  found  what  car- 
bon, or  combination  of  carbons,  are  best  suited  to  your  needs. 
There  is  little  or  no  difference  of  opinion  among  operators 
as  to  the  best  set  for  D.  C.  carbons,  but  there  is  a  vast 
difference  in  the  matter  of  care  to  get  the  set  exactly  right 
so  that  the  best  possible  results  will  be  obtained. 

With  A.  C.  it  is  quite  another  story.  Fig.  31  shows  one 
method  of  setting  A.  C.  carbons  and  Fig.  33,  A  and  B,  two 
more,  each  of  which  have  their  advocates.  It  is,  however, 
significant  that  whereas  three  years  ago  you  could  hardly 
find  an  operator  setting  his  carbons  as  per  Fig.  31  (the  D. 
C.  set)  you  will  find  at  present  that  nearly  all  the  high- 
class  men  set  their  carbons  the  same  for  either  D.  C.  or  A. 
C.  They  have  discovered,  as  did  the  writer,  that  while 
freelv  granting  a  higher  candle  power  for  Fig.  33  sets,  the 
crater  cannot  be  controlled  or  maintained,  hence  steady  light 
with  these  sets  is  an  impossibility,  -especially  with  set  B. 
(With  set  B,  Fig.  32,  the  lamp  itself  should  be  set  straight 
up  and  down.)  I  shall,  therefore,  confine  my  remarks  largely 
to  the  set  shown  in  Fig.  31,  which  I  strongly  advise  all  op- 


90  MOTION    PICTURE   HANDBOOK 

erators  to  use.  It  is  precisely  the  same  as  the  D.  C.  set, 
except  that  the  top  carbon  should  be  set  parallel  with  the 
lamp  rackbars  and  the  lower  carbon  angled  forward  a  trifle 
In  using  this  set  I  cannot  caution  you  too  strongly  to  be 
exceedingly  careful  to  get  your  carbons  set  exactly  right. 
"Pretty  near"  will  not  do  at  all.     They  must  be  exactly  right. 

Use  the  round  points  of  the  carbons  as  your  guide  in 
setting  and  find  out  just  how  far  to  set  the  lower  tip  ahead 
of  the  upper  and  then  keep  it  that  way.  When  you  have  it 
right  the  craters  will  be  about  as  shown  in  Fig.  33C,  which 
is  ideal.  With  such  a  crater  you  will  have  white,  steady, 
strong  light  at  all  times.  If  the  upper  crater  burns  too  flat 
advance  the  lower  tip  just  a  very  little.  If  the  lower  tip 
shows  a  tendency  to  form,  as  in  Fig.  33D,  move  it  back  just 
a  trifle,  but  remember  that  a  little  movement  of  the  tips 
backward  or  forward  may  make  a  big  diflFerence  in  the 
form  of  the  craters.  The  craters  are  small  and  i-16-inch  move 
of  either  tip  makes  a  big  change  in  their  forms.  With  al- 
ternating the  carbons  must  be  fed  little  at  a  time  and  often 
and  the  arc  must  be  comparatively  short,  but  if  too  short  a 
condition  such  as  shown  at  Fig.  33E  will  arise.  Such  a 
condition  means  carbons  kept  too  close  together.  The  remedy 
is,  if  you  get  them  in  that  shape,  burn  a  long  arc  for  a  time. 
In  fact  whenever  your  crater  is  going  wrong  and  you  change 
your  carbon  tips,  lengthen  your  arc  for  a  couple  of  minutes 
until  the  crater  form  changes.  With  A.  C.  the  colored  glasses 
I  have  spoken  of  are  almost  an  imperative  necessity,  since 
to   get  good   results   one   simply  must  watch  the  ar«   itself. 

Operators  may  argue  and  tell  what  they  can  do  until  they 
are  weary  and  breathless,  but  one  thing  they  cannot  do,  no 
matter  what  they  claim,  and  that  is  get  a  good,  steady  light 
with  alternating  without  looking  at  the  arc  itself  when  any- 
thing is  wrong  with  the  light.  With  A.  C.  use  5^  cored  car- 
bons above  and  below,  also  you  should  have  not  less  than 
45  amperes  to  get  good  results,  50  to  55  if  you  are  using 
rheostat  resistance.  Right  here  let  me  oflFer  a  criticism  which 
applies  to  nearly  all  lamps.  I  have  shown  the  importance 
of  backward  and  forward  movement  of  the  carbon  tips,  espe- 
cially with  alternating  current.  It  is  of  prime  importance 
that  the  operator  be  ;iblc  to  accomplish  this  movement  at 
any  time  while  running  and  frequently  the  necessary  move- 


FOR    MANAGERS    AND    OPERATORS  91 

nient  will  be  not  to  exceed  1-16  inch.  Yet  important  as  is 
the  matter,  most  lamps  have  absolutely  no  provision  for 
tilting  the  carbon  arms  except  to  pound  them  up  or  down 
or  accomplish  the  desired  result  by  tapping  the  carbon  tip 
itself,  which  is  imreliable  and  may  result  in  breaking  the 
carbon  off  entirely.  The  Motiograph  lamp  has  a  screw  by 
which  the  adjustment  may  be  made,  but  it  is  not  a  practical 
arrangement,  or  rather  it  does  not  work  well  in  practice — 
still  it  is  much  better  than  nothing  at  all.  I  am  told  there 
is  one  lamp  with  an  excellent  arrangement  for  this  movement 
of  the  lamp  arms,  but  I  have  not  as  yet  seen  it.  It  seems 
high  time  that  lamp  makers  woke  up  to  the  necessity  of 
.this  provision- and  gave  us  some  practical  method  of  tilting 
the  lamp  arms  while  running  it.  It  is  difficult  to  accomplish 
I  know,  but  surely  is  not  impossible.  When  you  put  in  new 
carbons  always  burn  a  very  long  arc  until  the  crater  is 
formed. 


92  MOTION    PICTURE   HANDBOOK 


The    Film. 


There  are  comparatively  few  operators  who  thoroughly 
understand  the  proper  care  of  a  motion  picture  film  and,  judg- 
ing from  conditions,  very  few  exchange  men  either.  It  seems 
hardly  necessary  to  say  that  the  film  is  a  strip  of  specially 
prepared  celluloid  which  comes  from  the  maker  in  200 
feet  lengths.  This  strip  is  i}i  inches  wide  and  of  varying 
thicknesses,  though  supposedly  5-1000  of  an  inch  of  which 
i-iooo  is  the  emulsion.  This  thickness  has  recently  been 
somewhat  increased  in  the  new  non-inflammable  stock. 
On  one  side  of  this  celluloid  strip  is  a  photographic  emul- 
sion, on  which  appears  a  succession  of  what  are  nothing 
more  or  less  than  photographic  snapshots,  54  by  i  inch, 
taken  at  the  rate  of  about  one  thousand  per  minute.  There 
are  16  photographs  to  each  linear  foot  of  film,  each  taken 
about  one-sixteenth  of  a  second  later  than  the  next  preceding. 
AH  this  has  been  told  so  often  that  its  repetition  seems 
almost  like  waste  of  space,  but  the  facility  with  which  the 
most  beautiful,  as  well  as  the  poorest,  examples  of  film  de- 
velop into  "rainstorms"  is  proof  positive  that,  while  some 
points  concerning  film  may  be  well  understood,  others  are 
not,  since  there  is  an  amazing  amount  of  ignorance  or  care- 
lessness, or  both  together,  displayed  in  the  handling  of  films 
by  both  operators  and  inspectors.  To  such  an  extent  is  this 
carried  that  it  amounts  to  nothing  less  than  an  outrage — 
an  outrage  against  the  owner  of  the  film  and  against  the 
public  who  pay  their  money  to  see  a  picture — not  a  bunch 
of  junk.  And  the  damage  is  fully  nine-tenths  due  to  just  one 
cause  and  one  cause  only,  viz.,  what  is  known  as  "pulling 
down,"  i.  e.,  holding  the  reel  stationary  while  revolving  the 
reel  to  tighten  the  film  roll.  This,  of  course,  causes  the 
whole  roll  of  film  to  slip  on  itself  under  considerable  press- 
ure, thus  applying  friction  to  both  sides  of  the  whole  film. 
Now  it  seems  to  the  writer  that  the  commonest  kind  of 
horse  sense  ought  to  tell  one  what  this  will  do  to  a  film, 
particularly  to  the   comparatively  soft  emulsion   side.     Look 


FOR    MANAGERS    AND    OPERATORS  S>3 

through  any  light  ray  and  you  will  see  that  the  air  is  con- 
stantly full  of  dust,  and  it  does  not  require  the  wisdom  of 
Solomon  or  an  examination  with  a  microscope  to  know  that 
some  of  it  is  bound  to  adhere  to  the  film,  the  more  especially 
since  celluloid,  under  combined  influence  of  heat  and  fric- 
tion of  the  tension  springs,  ger.erates  considerable  static 
electricity. 

To  be  sure,  these  particles  of  dust  are  very  fine,  but  some 
of  them  are  very  hard  and  some  particles  contain  metal, which 
is  attracted  by  the  electricity  in  the  film.  When  the  film 
slips  on  itself,  in  pulling  down,  these  pieces  become  miniature 
plows,  producing  scratches  coarse  or  fine,  according  to  size 
and  pressure.  Of  course,  all  dust  particles  are  not  large 
enough  or  hard  enough  to  produce  material  damage,  else  we 
would  have  a  film  utterly  ruined  in  a  week  of  ordinary  mis- 
usage,  since  they  are  present  by  the  million.  But  the  process 
is  repeated  many  times  in  an  ordinary  day's  run  and  then  is 
duplicated  at  the  exchange  itself.  What  is  the  remedy,  you 
ask?  Well,  it  is  very  simple;  but  getting  it  applied  is  another 
matter  entirely,  since  it  involves  a  little  more  time  and  con- 
siderably more  labor  in  rewinding — a  job  the  operator  cordially 
hates  at  best.  Also  it  involves  slower  work  by  the  inspector. 
Rewind  slowly,  applying  considerable  tension — at  least  as 
much  as  the  average  takeup  supplies.  That  is  all  there  is  to  it, 
since  there  would  then  be  no  reason  to  "pull  down."  One  of 
the  prolific  causes  of  this  pernicious  practice  is,  however,  too 
much  film  for  the  size  of  the  reel.  Reels  are  too  small.  Cus- 
tom puts  between  900  and  1,000  feet  of  film  on  a  reel.  This 
fills  a  lo-inch  reel  chock  full  with  ordinary  stock,  and  if  the 
film  happens  to  be  a  trifle  thicker  than  ordinary  it  fills  the  reel 
more  than  full.  Ten  inches  is  too  small.  They  should  be 
II  inches  and  no  more  than  a  thousand  feet  of  film  ever 
be  placed  on  one  reel.  In  some  theaters  where  the  work  is 
rapid  there  is  no  time  to  rewind  as  above  indicated  and  the 
operator  has  no  choice,  when  running  a  thousand  feet  of  film, 
except  to  pull  down.  With  an  ii-inch  reel  the  necessity 
would  not  be  present  in  nearly  so  great  a  degree,  though 
with  rapid  rewinding  either  there  must  be  no  tension  or  else 
the  labor  is  very  hard.  If  there  be  no  tension  then  the  roll 
must  be  pulled  dowm  some  or  it  will  wind  so  loosely  it  will 
"flop."    Rewinding  should  be  done  by  motor  in  such  cases  and 


94  MOTION   PICTURE  HANDBOOK 

then  the  tension  can  be  left  on.  I  have  dwelt  on  this  matter, 
since  I  consider  it  one  of  vital  importance — perhaps  of  more 
importance  than  any  other  one  thing  in  the  motion  picture 
business  to-day — and  in  time  this  will  come  to  be  recognized. 
There  arc  other  minor  causes  which  contribute  to  the  pro- 
duction of  rainmarks,  the  principal  one  being  the  practice  of 
holding  the  film  flatwise  between  the  thumb  and  fingers 
when  rewinding.  This  does  not  produce  deep  scratches,  but 
undoubtedly  it  is  responsible  for  a  multitude  of  very  fine 
ones.  Anything  which  applies  friction  to  the  surface  of  a 
film  produces  injury.  There  is  at  least  one  machine  which 
still   has   idlers   with   a   flat   surface   extending   clear   across. 

This  is  bad.  Nothing  at  all  should  touch  the  film  in  its 
passage  through  the  machine  except  on  the  track.  Such 
idlers  may  do  slight  damage  when  properly  adjusted,  but 
unfortunately  they  are  not  always  thus  and,  worse  yet, 
are  not  always  even  revolving.  Idlers  of  this  type  have 
been  discarded  on  most  machines  and  should  be  on  all.  The 
long,  deep  scratches  frequently  seen  are  usually  chargeable 
directly  to  the  ignorance  (I  use  plain  terms),  carelessness 
or  laziness  of  the  operator.  In  running  new  film  on  which 
the  emulsion  is  still  comparatively  soft  some  of  it  is  likely 
to  deposit  on  the  magazine  fire  guard  rollers,  particularly 
if  they  are  not  turning.  This  deposit  increases  rapidly, 
also  catches  particles  of  dust  and  dirt,  and  may  form  a  sharp 
point,  which  plows  through  the  emulsion,  leaving  a  long, 
deep  scratch.  Magazine  rollers  should  be  carefully  examined 
and  cleaned  every  day,  especially  if  you  are  on  "first-run"  film. 

Outside  the  damage  as  above  set  forth  there  is  little  or 
nothing  to  injure  a  film  either  in  its  passage  through  the 
machine  or  at  any  other  time  except  for  wear  of  sprocket 
holes  and  tension  spring  marks.  The  writer  asserts  that,  given 
a  modern  machine,  in  proper  adjustment,  he  can  run  a  film 
through,  under  ordinary  show  conditions  (being  given  ample 
time  for  rewinding  or  given  a  motor  for  fast  rewinding),  500 
times  and  have  scarcely  a  mark  on  it — not  a  single  one  that 
will  be  discernible  on  the  curtain.  To  do  this  he  would  not, 
however,  accept  more  than  850  to  900  feet  of  film  on  a  10- 
inch  reel.  Another  thing  I  must  mention  in  this  connec- 
tion, since  it  is  productive  of  much  damage  to  new  films: 
some  new  film  is  quite  stiflf  and  has  a  decided  tendency  to 


FOR    MANAGERS    AND    OPERATORS  95 

rewind  in  the  takeup  in  octagon  shape,  nor  can  this  be  pre- 
vented by  any  ordinary  tension.  It  follows  that  it  will  do 
the  same  thing  in  rewinding  unless  heavy  tension  be  applied 
to  it  or  it  is.  frequently  pulled  down.  This  condition  is  pres- 
ent only  in  new  films  on  which  the  emulsion  is,  of  course, 
comparatively  green,  soft  and  very  easily  injured.  Even  pull- 
ing down  will  not  get  it  wound  closely  enough  but  that  a 
thousand  feet  will  very  much  overrun  a  lo-inch  reel.  There 
is  room  for  display  of  at  least  ordinary  intelligence,  on  the 
part  of  exchange  men,  in  the  stock  placed  on  a  lo-inch  reel, 
if  they  care  anything  at  all  about  their  own  property.  In 
running  new  film  (first  run)  the  emulsion  is  often  green  and 
soft,  with  decided  tendency  to  deposit  on  the  tension  springs. 
This  matter  should  be  closely  watched  when  running  first 
r:in  film.  If  the  deposit  is  bad  it  will  sometimes  evince  its 
presence  by  a  jerking  of  the  springs,  but  not  always.  Care- 
fully examine  the  surface  of  the  tension  springs  after  each 
run  and  don't  forget  it.  The  deposit,  if  allowed  to  remain, 
makes  a  bad  tension  spring  mark  the  full  length  of  the  film. 
After  considerable  experimenting  the  best  preventive  the 
writer  has  been  able  to  discover  is  to  rub  the  springs  with 
an  ordinary  tallow  candle  before  each  run.  Uusually  this 
will  prevent  deposit,  but  not  always.  In  removing  deposit 
be  very  careful  not  to  roughen  the  spring  or  you  will  then 
have  trouble  and  plenty  of  it.  Every  film  should  have  a 
tail  piece  2  feet  long,  but  a  3  to  4-foot  leader  is  an  impera- 
tive necessity  under  present  conditions,  since  it  takes  from  2 
to  3  feet  to  thread  into  the  takeup.  If  the  title  is  of  ordinary 
length,  even  with  a  new  film,  by  the  time  you  have  threaded, 
started  your  machine,  centered  your  light  and  framed  up,  the 
audience  is  left  to  wonder  what  the  picture  is  about;  the 
title  being  "all  in"  the  takeup.  But  this  does  not  apparently 
interest  the  average  exchange  man,  who  seemingly  is  only 
concerned  in  "getting  the  money."  I  will  therefore  endeavor 
to  show  him  where  he  would  actually  save  money  by  putting 
on  a  leader  and  thus  attempt  to  touch  his  heart  through  his 
pocketbook.  Almost  any  old  film  will  do  for  leader,  while 
title  is  worth  good  money.  In  threading  into  the  takeup  the 
average  operator  folds  the  film  end  on  itself  an  inch  a  couple 
of  times  and  then  thrusts  it  under  the  reel  clamp.  Now  in 
rewinding  what  happens?    I'll  tell  you.    If  the  reel  clamp  be 


96  MOTION    PICTURE   HANDBOOK 

stiff  this  folded  end  may  pull  off  instead  of  pulling  out  and 
there  is  something  like  two  inches  of  film  (title)  gone.  Any- 
how when  the  film  pulls  ofif  it  usually  whips  around  from  once 
to  half  a  dozen  times,  according  to  the  carefulness  (or  care- 
lessness) of  the  o-^erator,  and  what  is  done  to  the  title  would 
be  a  shame  to  tell.  It  is  safe  to  say  each  operator  who  runs 
it  will  amputate  from  i  to  4  inches  during  the  time  it  is  in 
his  possession.  Now,  Mr.  Exchange  Owner,  wouldn't  it  be 
cheaper  for  you  to  have  that  much  junk  leader  lost  each  day 
than  have  your  title  gradually  eaten  away,  thus  depre- 
ciating the  value  of  the  film  until  a  new  one  is  attached? 
But,  say  you,  "operators  persistently  steal  leaders."  Yes, 
that's  so,  dear  sir.  Can  you  blame  them?  They  well  know 
that  if  they  are  fortunate  enough  to  get  a  film  with  a  leader 
on  to-day  it's  a  moral  certainty  the  one  they  get  to-morrow 
won't  have  one  or  will  have  one  too  short.  Send  out  all  films 
with  not  less  than  3  feet  of  leader,  preferably  4,  and  notify 
operators  that  all  films  will  be  so  equipped.  Just  as  soon  as 
operators  discover  you  mean  what  you  say  you  will  find  leader 
stealing  will  stop.     They  will  have  no  cause  to  take  them. 

Moreover,  you  can  put  a  stop  to  it  by  charging  it  up  at 
the  rate  of  2  or  3  cents  a  foot — or  even  more.  By  thus  equip- 
ping your  film  and  keeping  the  leaders  proper  length  your 
titles  will  last  just  as  long  as  ony  other  portion  of  the  film. 
And  now  I  come  to  something  that  will  interest  you,  Mr. 
Exchange  Man.  Do  j'ou  know  how  operators  get  leaders 
when  you  won't  supply  them?  I'll  tell  you  a  state  secret. 
The  operator  has  to  have  a  leader  for  his  film.  He  proceeds 
to  get  it — how?  Very  simple.  He  runs  it  once  without  leader 
and  then  he  amputates  one  anywhere  he  thinks  a  jump  won't 
show  in  the  body  of  the  film.  He  has  his  leader  and  you 
would  have  to  do  some  mighty  close  inspecting  and  com- 
parison to  catch  up  with  it.  Perhaps  you  don't  know  this 
is  done  much?  Well,  there  are  probably  several  things  you 
don't  know  yet  and  this  is  just  one  of  them.  It  serves  you 
right,  too.  Equip  your  films  as  they  should  be  and  the  prac- 
tice will  stop.  You  can't  stop  it  in  any  other  way.  Film 
exchange  men  can  well  aflford  to  take  this  matter  up  seriously, 
for  lack  of  leaders,  now  that  takeups  have  become  of  general 
use,  is  costing  them  far  more  dearly  than  they  know  or  real- 
ize.    Nine  operators  in  every  ten  resort  to  the  above  scheme 


FOR    MANAGERS    AND    OPERATORS 


91 


and  they  get  the  necessary  leaders  that  way,  too,  though  they 
wouldn't  know  a  single  thing  about  such  a  thing  if  you  asked 
them — dear  me,  no!  We  have  had  a  good  many  "'Associa- 
tions" in  which  film  renters  have  played  a  prominent  part, 
but  the  writer  would  suggest,  humbly  and  in  all  seriousness, 
that  an  organization  to  teach  them  how  to  care  for  their 
own  stock  would  be  a  blessing  both  to  them  and  to  those 
who  use  the  films. 

Making  mends  is  another  matter  of  great  importance  and 
it  is  a  somewhat  sad  fact  that  not  one  operator  or  film  ex- 
change inspector  in  fifty  makes  a  perfect  patch.  The  oper- 
ator is  to  be  excused  to  some  extent,  since  he  seldom  has 
time  to  do  the  matter  rightly.  But  what  about  the  exchanges? 
In  only  one  exchange  in  all  Chicago  has  the  writer  seen  a 
film  properly  mended.  That  is  a  broad  statement,  but  true. 
Let  it  be  understood  that  film  cement  when  properly  used 
welds  the  film  as  much  as  it  glues  it.  To  properly  make  a 
patch  it  must  have  the  heavy,  even  pressure  of  a  clamp  for 
4  or  5  seconds.  A  properly  made  mend  is  not  more  than  yi 
inch  wide  and  is  nearly  as  strong  as  the  original  stock.  To 
make   such  a  patch  as  this,  however,  is   usually  impractical 


I  D        FlCr.  33;£ 


in  an  operating  room;   but  there   is  absolutely  no  cxcnsc   for 
the  exchange  making  any  other  kind. 

Nor  is  there  any  excuse  for  operators  not  making  a  reason- 
ably narrow,  strong  patch.  Proceed  as  follows:  Cut  your 
film  as  per  Fig.  33^,  making  stub  end  A  not  to  exceed  3-16 
inch  long,  and  cutting  end  B  exactly  on  dividing  line  between 


08  MOTION   PICTURE  HANDBOOK 

two  pictures.  Cutting  the  film  any  other  way  will  cause 
a  misframe.  Now  lay  a  small  metal  straightedge  in  position 
shown  by  dotted  lines,  Fig.  33H-  With  a  sharp  knife  scrape 
the  emulsion  from  the  stub  right  up  to  edge  of  straightedge, 
scraping  right  down  into  the  celluloid  until  a  rough,  whitish- 
gray  surface  is  produced.  Be  sure  to  scrape  well  around  the 
sprocket  holes,  since  this  is  where  the  patch  usually  begins 
to  loosen.  Now  turn  end  B  over  with  emulsion  side  down 
and,  again  using  straightedge,  scrape  back  of  film  for  a  space 
about  equal  to  width  of  stub  end  A.  This  latter  proceeding 
is  very  important,  since  there  is  likely  to  be  oil  on  the  cel- 
luloid, but  even  if  there  is  not,  the  patch  will  not  adhere 
nearly  so  well  if  back  of  film  is  not  well  scraped.  It  takes 
a  very  sharp  knife  to  do  the  scraping  properly.  (A  bit  of 
emery  paper  fastened  to  a  block  of  wood  makes  a  good 
substitute.) 

Be  sure  emulsion  sides  of  both  ends  are  either  up  or  down, 
apply  your  cement  liberally  to  the  stub  end  and,  working 
fast,  since  cement  evaporates  rapidly,  join  the  two  ends  so 
that  the  end  B  just  covers  stub  A.  Match  the  sprocket  holes 
perfectly  and  press  the  patch  together  firmly,  applying  all 
the  pressure  you  can  for  a  few  seconds,  when  the  cement  will 
have  set  and  the  patch  is  finished.  Be  very  sure  to  get  your 
sprocket  holes  properly  matched,  as  they  are  your  guide,  and 
unless  they  fit  together  the  mend  will  be  crooked  or  two 
holes  will  be  too  small,  causing  a  jump  as  the  film  got^ 
through  the  machine.  It  may  also  cause  the  intermittent  to 
climb  a  couple  of  sprocket  holes,  thus  producing  a  misframe. 
A  film  mender  with  a  pressure  clamp  is  a  fine  thing  if  you 
have  the  time  to  use  them — without  the  clamp  they  arc 
merely  a  nuisance.  They  are  hardly  a  practical  appliance  in 
an  operating  room.  In  making  patches  watch  closely  the 
following  points:  Get  emulsion  on  same  side  on  both  ends. 
Scrape  well  and  apply  plenty  of  cement,  especially  around 
sprocket  holes.  Be  sure  the  sprocket  holes  match  perfectly 
There  has  been  some  argument  as  to  whether  a  patch  should 
be. made  as  per  "C,"  Fig.  33^4,  or  "D,"  Fig.  33J^.  Cement 
may  be  had  from  any  film  exchange,  but  you  should  now 
get  none  but  the  N.  I.  cement,  since  it  will  answer  for  both 
N.  I.  and  ordinary  stock,  whereas  ordinary  cement  will  not 
do  on  N.  I.  film  at  all. 


FOR    MANAGERS    AND    OPERATORS  99 

WET    FILM. 

Should  you  by  accident  get  the  film  wet,  no  matter  how 
wet,  it  will  receive  no  material  damage  if  you  immediately 
unroll  it  and  stretch  it  in  such  manner  that  the  emulsion 
touches  nothing  until  it  is  dry.  This  does  not  apply  to  col- 
ored or  tinted  film,  though  even  this  may  sometimes  be 
saved  by  prompt  action.  But  the  unrolling  must  be  done 
very  quickly. 

REMOVING    EMULSION— MOISTENING    DRY    FILM. 

When  it  is  desired  for  any  reason  to  remove  the  emulsion 
from  film  it  may  be  done  by  soaking  in  warm  water  to  which 
has  been  added  sal  soda  (common  washing  soda  will  do). 
Use  plenty  of  the  soda  and  let  the  film  soak  for  say  15  min- 
utes, and  you  can  then  wash  the  emulsion  off  easily.  It  may 
also  be  removed  by  soaking  in  ordinary  cold  water  and  then 
scraping.  Proceed  as  follows:  Soak  the  film  until  emulsion 
is  soft.  Lay  film,  emulsion  side  up,  on  a  flat  board  or  table 
and  draw  it  under  the  blade  of  a  knife.  If  the  knife  blade  is 
long  enough  and  the  edge  straight  enough  the  whole  sur- 
face of  the  film  will  be  cleaned  at  one  wipe.  Film  should, 
so  far  as  possible,  be  kept  in  a  cool,  moist  place,  though  the 
matter  of  moisture  may  be  overdone.  If  you  get  too  much 
of  it  the  emulsion  will  stick  to  the  back  of  the  film.  It  is  a 
mere  waste  of  space  telling  operators  not  to  keep  spare  film 
near  the  ceiling  of  a  hot  operating  room.  They  will  keep 
it  where  it  is  most  convenient.  However,  films  not  on  the 
machine  should  be  kept  in  a  solderless  metal  box  or  cabinet 
located  near  the  floor,  and  if  fastened  to  the  wall  it  should 
be  so  attached  that  it  may  be  instantly  lifted  away  and  car- 
ried outside  in  case  of  fire.  Where  a  film  tank  is  used  it  is 
well  to  have  the  bottom  covered  with  a  coarse  screen  held 
an  inch  from  the  bottom  by  wooden  or  metal  cleats.  In  the 
bottom  of  the  tank  keep  some  water  to  which  has  been  added 
just  a  little  glycerine — one  part  of  glycerine  to  33  of  water 
is  about  right.  This  will  be  very  beneficial  to  the  films.  Old, 
brittle  film  may  be  made  pliable  as  follows:  Get  any  metal 
can  large  enough  to  hold  a  film  when  unrolled  loosely.  The 
can  must  have  a  tight  cover.  Cover  the  bottom  with  a 
coarse  screen,  leavino^  an  inch  or  two  below  it.  Into  this  space 
place  a  mixture  of  water  and  glycerine  as  above.    Unroll  the 


100  MOTION   PICTURE  HANDBOOK 

film  into  the  can  and  leave  it  in  a  moderately  warm  room  for 
from  one  hour  to  half  a  day,  according  to  condition  of  film. 
Examine  frequently.  Don't  leave  long  enough  to  soften 
the  emulsion  too  much.  Another  way  is  to  give  the  film  a 
bath  in  the  aforenamed  solution.  To  do  this  build  a  drum 
by  nailing  lattice  lath  around  a  couple  of  barrel  heads.  Place 
the  solution  in  a  washtub  or  other  suitable  receptacle  and 
draw  film  through  it,  winding  immediately  on  the  drum  with 
emulsion  side  out.  The  drum  should  be  geared  so  as  to  run 
fast  enough  to  throw  oflf  all  surplus  liquid.  Be  very  careful 
in  handling  the  film  after  it  is  wet,  as  the  emulsion  is  then 
soft  and  the  least  scratch  will  play  havoc  with  it.  This 
operation  must  be  done  in  a  room  where  there  is  no  dust. 
Sprinkle  the  floor  well  before  commencing.  It  will  perhaps 
be  best  for  the  novice  to  place  the  liquid  in  a  long,  shallow 
pan,  merely  drawing  the  film  slowly  through  the  mixture  as 
it  is  wound  onto  the  drum.  The  drum  must  be  revolved  until 
the  film  is  dry.  Glycerine  absorbs  moisture  rapidly  and  that 
is  the  reason  it  is  beneficial  to  a  film.  Don't  use  more  than 
one  part  to  3S  of  water,  however. 

LEADERS— INSPECTING. 

When  you  have  an  old  film  with  a  short  title,  put  on  a  good, 
long  leader,  attaching  so  it  is  in  frame  with  the  title.  Frame 
up  on  the  leader  and  when  the  title  comes  it  will  have  to  be 
very  short  if  the  audience  cannot  catch  it,  provided  you  run 
slowly.  Right  here  let  mc  caution  you  to  always  start  your 
machine  slowly.  If  you  start  fast  and  have  to  frame  on  the 
title  it  is  gone  before  there  is  any  chance  to  read  it,  especially 
if  it  be  a  short  one.  Also  the  practice  of  speeding  up  on 
the  last  few  feet  of  the  film  is  bad  and  should  not  be 
tolerated  as  it  is  hard  on  both  the  film  and  the  ma- 
chine. When  the  operator  has  the  opportunity  he  should 
invariably  inspect  his  film  before  running  it  the  first 
time,  cementing  all  loose  patches  and  making  any  other 
needed  repairs.  An  ounce  of  prevention  in  this  respect 
is  worth  several  hundredweight  of  cure.  The  inspection  given 
films  in  some  exchanges  is  very  largely  a  matter  of  vivid 
imagination.  If  the  film  isn't  clear  in  two  somewhere  it  is. 
enthusiastically  O.  K.'d  by  the  inspector,  who  is  expected 
to  '"inspect"  (???)  a  thousand  feet  of  film  in  ten  minutes  or 


FOR    MANAGERS    AND    OPERATORS  101 

less.     I  know  I  am  roasting  the  exchanges  a  good  deal,  but 
unfortunately  it  is  all  "coming  to  them"— or  to  sorhe  of  them. 

Those  whom  the  shoe  doesn't  fit  need  not  wear  it.  In  look- 
ing over  film,  unwind  into  the  tank  or  takeup  and  rewind 
slowly,  holding  film  by  edges  with  pressure  enough  to  "cup" 
it.  You  will  thus  by  sense  of  touch  be  able  to  detect  all  broken 
sprocket  holes  and  loose  patches.  If  more  than  two  sprocket 
holes  are  missing  in  one  place,  cut  it  out.  In  case  you  should 
ever  be  caught  without  cement,  an  emergency  substitute  may 
be  had  in  ordinary  liquid  glue.  Proceed  as  you  would  with 
cement,  but  use  the  glue  instead.  Don't  put  much  on,  though, 
and  give  it  ample  time  to  dry.  This  should  only  be  done  in 
case  of  emergency,  however,  as  it  is  by  no  manner  of  means 
good  practice  and  makes  but  a  very,  very  poor  JoB  at  best. 

You  can  measure  the  exact  length  of  a  film  by  running 
through  a  machine,  counting  the  turns  of  the  crank.  The 
Power's,  Edison,  Motiograph,  and,  I  believe,  the  Lubin,  also, 
pass  exactly  one  foot  of  film  to  each  turn  of  the  crank.  The 
Viascope  passes  nine  inches.  And  now  let  me  call  your 
attention  to  the  fact  that,  at  a  normal  speed  of  60  feet  per 
minute,  960  separate  and  distinct  photographs  must  stop  dead 
still — dead  still,  without  a. quiver  or  particle  of  vibration,  each 
occupying  precisely,  to  the  thousandth  of  an  inch,  the  exact 
space  filled  by  its  predecessors — each  minute.  It  requires 
slight  discernment  to  see  that  to  accomplish  a  result  so  mar- 
velously  rapid  and  accurate  not  only  the  mechanism,  but  the 
film  itself,  must  be  in  good  condition. 

FILM    JUMPING. 

The  writer  has  had  hundreds  of  letters  asking  why  some 
new  films  apparently  sway  sidewise  with  rhythmical  motion 
and  others  continually  jump  on  the  screen.  The  first  named 
fault,  usually  attributed  to  lost  motion  in  the  camera,  is  due 
to  the  use  of  a  rotary  perforator.  The  last  named  fault  lies 
in  the  perforation  also.  It  would  occupy  much  valuable  space 
to  enter  into  detailed  explanation  as  to  the  exact  why  and 
wherefore  and  could  accomplish  no  corresponding  good.  Old, 
dry  films  jump  because  (a)  the  sprocket  holes  are  shrunken, 
(b)  sprocket  holes  are  worn.  The  first  named  fault  may  be 
remedied  by  moistening  the  film  as  before  set  forth.     Films 


102  MOTION    PICTURE   HANDBOOK 

will  jump  more  or  less  when  run  on  a  machine  with  worn 
intermittent  sprocket  teeth  or  where  the  star  movement  is  too 
loose;  also,  the}--  will  jump  badly  when  run  on  a  finger  feed 
machine  the  fingers  of  which  are  worn.  The  film  gradually 
cuts  a  little  groove  in  the  fingers  on  the  under  side.  It  is 
hardly  discernible  until  they  are  taken  out  and  closely  ex- 
amined, but  the  effect  is  there  just  the  same.  Remember  that 
with  a  fifteen  foot  picture  a  jump  of  i-iooo  of  an  inch  becomes 
180-1000  on  the  curtain,  while  1-64  inch  v/ould  become  almost 
three  inches.  In  other  words,  a  fifteen  foot  picture  magnifies 
the  film  photo  180  titncs  its  diameter,  and  it  follows  that  any 
defect  is  magnified  that  many  times  also.  From  this  you  may 
see  how  absolutely  accurate  must  be  the  perforation  of  a 
film  to  secure  an  absolutely  steady  picture.  The  marvel  is 
that  old  films  run  as  well  as  they  do,  the  more  especially 
when  run  on  a  worn  machine. 

HOW   FILM   IS    MADE. 

In  closing  this  subject,  I  believe  it  well  to  give  a  very  brief, 
crude  description  of  the  way  a  motion  picture  film  is  made. 
Celluloid  is  a  composition  of  camphor  and  pyrolyn,  the 
latter  being  nothing  more  or  less  than  ordinary  cotton  which 
has,  by  a  bath  of  nitric  and  sulphuric  acids  mixed  in  nearly 
equal  proportions,  been  converted  into  gun-cotton.  But  it 
must  not  be  inferred  from  this  that  celluloid  is  in  any  degree 
whatever  explosive,  for  it  is  not.  A  certain  mixture  of  py- 
roxylin and  camphor,  dissolved,  or  partially  so,  in  alcohol  or 
ether,  produces  the  crude  celluloid,  which  may  appear  as 
lumps  in  the  bottom  of  the  acid  tanks  or  in  blocks  in  a  press, 
according  ta  detail  of  manufacture.  The  crude  celluloid  i« 
worked  by  cold  and  then  by  hot  steel  rolls  and  is  then  sub- 
jected to  prolonged,  heavy  pressure,  after  which  it  is  dried  in 
kilns  for  several  days.  It  is  now  in  the  form  of  cakes,  which 
are  worked  into  strips  200  feet  long  by  22  inches  wide. 

A  machine  next  coats  this  strip  with  photographic  emulsion 
by  passing  it  beneath  a  hopper  filled  with  emulsion,  in  the 
bottom  of  which  is  a  narrow  slit.  Another  machine  now 
splits  the  22-inch  strip  into  ribbons  i^  inches  wide,  which 
are  then  ready  for  sale  to  the  film  photographers,  or  film 
makers,  as  distinguished  from  film  stock  makers.     The  film 


FOR    MANAGERS    AND    OPERATORS  105 

u  ^  .  '■  '•  \  \ 
stock  maker  only  perforates  such  stock  as  is  ordered  per- 
forated, since  film  makers  usually  do  their  own  perforating. 
The  perforating  is  done  by  a  punch  press,  of  which  there  are 
several  kinds.  Some  are  rotary,  some  punch  two,  one  hole 
on  each  side,  and  some  punch  four  at  a  time.  There  are  ex- 
actly four  perforations  to  each  54  inch  of  film.  The  film  is 
fed  to  the  press  by  an  intermittent  movement  or  by  a  pawl 
and  ratchet.  Negative  films  (the  ones  the  photographs  are 
taken  on)  have  a  much  "faster"  emulsion  than  have  the  posi- 
tives. Such  is  a  rough  sketch  of  the  process  of  manufacture 
of  motion  picture  films,  and  one  has  but  to  glance  at  the  con- 
stituent parts  of  celluloid  to  understand  why  it  is  so  inflam- 
mable. 

SPEED. 

The  matter  of  speed  is  of  much  importance,  but  no  rule 
can  be  laid  down  governing  it.  Speed  must  be  left  entirely  to 
the  discretion  of  the  operator,  except  that  with  inflammable 
film  forty  feet  per  minute  is  as  slow  as  is  safe,  with  ordinary 
light.  Theoretically,  the  machine  speed  should  be  the  same 
as  that  of  the  camera  which  took  the  picture  being  projected, 
but  in  practice  this  is  often  far  from  true.  The  camera  man 
grinds  out  a  set  speed,  supposed  to  be  sixty  feet  per  minute, 
though  often  he  varies  widely  from  the  mark.  The  actors 
act  the  scene  as  seems  best  to  them,  but  ofttimes  when  the 
scene  is  projected  it  is  discovered  they  have  misjudged  the 
speed  of  action  necessary  for  best  effect.  Right  here  is  where 
a  really  good  operator  who  closely  watches  such  details  be- 
comes of  great  value,  helping  out  the  scenes  amazingly  merely 
by  changing  speed  on  different  scenes.  Take,  as  an  example, 
Pathe's  "Faker's  Dream."  If  run  straight  through  at  camera 
speed  the  film  is  dull  and  of  comparatively  little  effect.  Where 
the  actors  are  moving  about  their  speed  is  too  great  and  while 
on  the  various  amusement  devices  of  the  park  the  speed  is 
altogether  loo  slow.  But  by  running  about  a  fifty  foot  speed 
in  the  first  instance  and  close  to  seventy-five  in  the  other, 
the  film  creates  much  laughter,  but  it  is  necessary  to  change 
speed  radically  many  times  on  this  film.  Another  example  is 
"A  Ride  for  a  Life,"  by  Edison,  I  believe.  If  run  at  normal 
speed  while  the  auto  ride  is  on,  the  "Ride  for  a  Life"  develops 


104  MOTION   PICTURE  HANDBOOK 

into  a  howling  farce,  but  if  speeded  up  just  as  fast  as  you  can 
run,  it  is  excellent,  but  as  the  ride  is  cut  three  or  four  times 
in  its  length  by  other  scenes-,  you  have  to  slow  down  for  each 
of  them  or  the  farce  would  be  reversed.  As  an  example  the 
other  way,  we  all  know  that  the  slower  the  Passion  Play  is 
run  the  more  impressive  it  is.  Forty  feet  per  minute  is  best 
for  it.  The  only  rule  for  speed,  except  in  starting  the  machine, 
which  should  always  be  done  slowly,  is,  "Watch  your  subject 
and  be  governed  entirely  by  its  action."  Twenty-five  minutes 
is  the  extreme  limit  of  time  for  l,ooo  feet  of  film.  Fifteen  to 
twenty  minutes  is  ordinary  time  for  most  subjects. 

THE   THROW. 

There  is  a  misunderstanding  among  most  operators  regard- 
ing the  throw,  i.  e.,  the  distance  the  picture  is  projected. 
Within  reasonable  limits  the  throw  has  very  slight  effect  on 
the  brilliancy  of  a  given  sized  picture,  provided  the  at- 
.mosphere  be  reasonably  clear.  It  must  be  remembered  that 
you  are  passing  a  certain  intensity  of  light  through  the 
aperture  plate.  This  light  is  to  be  distributed  over  a  given 
amount  of  space.  An  open  arc  lamp,  a  candle  or  a  lamp  dif- 
fuses its  rays  in  every  direction  and  over  a  complete  circle, 
but  the  light  from  your  lamp,  at  least  all  which  passes  through 
the  aperture  plate,  is  confined  to  a  space  the  size  of  youi 
picture.  Every  bit  of  light  which  passes  through  the  film 
reaches  the  curtain,  save  the  amount  diffused  by  impurities 
in  the  atmosphere,  and  that  for  a  distance  of  even  150  feet 
is  very  sltght.  Of  course,  there  is  some  loss,  and  if  the  throw 
were  extended  to  several  hundred  feet  it  might  be  consider- 
able, but  very  little  in  100  or  even  150  feet.  In  fact,  some 
operators  claim  that  a  better  picture  is  had  at  100  feet  than 
at  50  by  reason  of  the  fact  that  the  long  focus  lens  is  a 
better  article  than  is  the  short  focus.  When  you  increase  the 
size  of  the  picture,  however,  it  is  quite  another  story,  for  you 
are  then  diffusing  your  light  over  a  greater  area,  and  this 
counts  rapidly.  With  a  picture  8x10  you  cover  a  space  of 
80  square  feet,  while  a  12x14  picture  takes  up  168  square 
feet,  or  ^ore  than  twice  the  area.  You  are  therefore  lessen- 
ing your  illuminating  power  by  about  one-half  with  the  larger 
picture,  or  rather  you -are  lessening  the  brilliancy  in  that 
degree. 


FOR    MANAGERS    AND    OPERATORS 


105 


LENS,    THROW    AND    SIZE    OF    PICTURE. 

We  are  indebted  to  the  Selig  Polyscope  Company  for  the 
following  table  showing  the  height  and  width  of  a  picture 
at  given  distances  with  lenses  of  various  focus.  Elsewhere 
we  give  other  computations  and  any  slight  differences  in 
scale  may  be  explained  by  variation  in  size  of  aperture. 

FOC(/S  IJV  /NCNES. 


s 

QC 

•M 

Gi 

O? 

4^ 

05 

03 

&S 

f^^ 

^ 

1 

^ 

if 

^■\ 

w ^ 
^ 

v^ 

w^ 

;i^ 

5 

J 

5 

W 

C5 

:*5 

4i 

05 

4^ 

i 

^ 

«.i 

v^ 

K) 

K?^ 

K 
^ 

kd 

03 

4^ 

05 

05 

^ 

•N' 

0? 

C£> 

Si 

i 

^ 

^5 

5 

K3 

^o 

05 

to 

03 

^3 

^ 
^ 

Cp 

c« 

-^ 

(7: 

Co 

^0 

5 

CP 

05 

^0 

■^ 

.U 

i*^ 

03 

Oi 

01 

Ov 

CD 

■xW 

s 

^ 

t5 

s 

2 

w 

^5 

4^ 

OS 

Or 

]:. 

-i 

en 

Oi 

CD 

^ 

00 

i? 

o 

c3 

X. 

U 

05 

Oi 

]^ 

^ 
^ 

CD 

G> 

^ 
^ 

VA 

00 

4^" 

CO 

^ 

^5 
^3 

a 

03 

K 
^f< 

]^ 

a 

^ 
^ 

N 

^s^ 

© 

00 

>^ 

55 

00 

0? 

55 

s 

fi 

4^ 

0) 

^ 
^ 

4.^ 

a 

CD 

^ 

cB 

c3 

■^ 

4« 

f 

t? 

01 

■^ 

S 

01 

oo 

s 

s 

^ 

^ 

a' 

o: 

*-< 

05 

T 

s 

g 

01 

g 

I 

-^ 

QD 

w 

CO 

fc 

^ 

■^1 

9" 

05 

05 

T 

^ 

-^ 

X 

a 

N 

>A 

CP 

CD 

(Si 

^ 

>-». 

P* 

^ 

Oi 

03 
O 

^5 

03 

Jn2 

0» 
O 

03 

c 

c 

0 

5 

^ 
^ 

^ 

0& 

^ 

>->> 

o 
;:>< 

^ 
^ 

^^ 

Co 

r* 

1^ 

^ 

i'e 

;^ 

W 

0? 

1 

g 

9" 

0 

^ 

5 

^ 

05 

05 

^ 

03 

0) 

^ 

^ 
D 

o 

^ 
^ 

CC 

CO 

r. 

0? 

^ 

^ 

^ 

2- 

i 

1^ 

^ 

^ 

05 

$2 

05 
■N! 

fix 

4^ 

03 
^2 

c;i 

^. 

on 

4^ 

05 

Oi. 

01 

^5 

i 

? 

^ 

02 
O 

-4 

fe 

^ 

^ 
^ 

1 

ii<; 

1 

§ 

^ 
^ 

I 

0? 

i 

^ 

lA- 

g 

106  MOTION    PICTURE   HANDBOOK 


Machine  Heads. 


It  was  the  original  intention  of  the  writer  to  give  detailed 
instructions  for  the  adjustment  of  each  make  of  machine. 
In  looking  over  the  field,  however,  this  is  deemed  to  be  im- 
practical. Not  only  are  there  many  makes  of  machines,  but 
nearly  every  one  has  two  or  more  models,  and  to  cover  them 
all  would  take  up  an  immense  amount  of  space.  Instead, 
therefore,  I  have  concluded  to  give  general  instructions  which 
will  cover  the  essential  adjustments  of  all  but  two  machines, 
touching  somewhat,  however,  on  each  one  individually,  in  so 
far  as  the  model  most  in  use  is  concerned.  One  excep- 
tion is  the  Motiograph.  This  machine  is  of  such  radically 
diflferent  construction  from  anything  else  on  the  market  that 
I  feel  it  necessary  to  include  detailed  instruction  concerning 
it.  One  thing  in  particular  which  equally  applies  to  all  ma- 
chines is,  keep  them  clean.  This  is  not  much  of  a  task  if 
the  head  be  wiped  off  each  day,  and  there  is  nothing  looks 
more  slouchy  than  a  machine  head  covered  with  gum,  oil  and 
dirt.  "Cleanliness  is  next  to  godliness,"  and  it  applies  here 
as  elsewhere.  As  to  oil:  Any  good  grade  of  medium  oil  that 
will  not  gum  is  suitable  for  a  machine,  but  cheap  oils  should 
by  all  means  be  avoided,  since  they  are  diluted  with  kero- 
sene. There  is  no  motion  picture  machine  bearing  which  is 
not  adequately  lubricated  with  one  drop  of  oil.  More  than 
this  is  too  much  and  will  just  run,  or  be  thrown  ofif,  making 
a  dirty  mess  and  perhaps  injuring  the  film.  A  drop  of  oil 
doesn't  look  like  much,  true,  but  it  will  cover  more  surface 
than  you  may  imagine,  and  once  a  bearing  is  covered  with 
oil  an  additional  gallon  would  not  make  it  run  one  whit 
better.  Some  operators  wash  out  the  bearings  once  in  a 
while  with  gasoline.  This  does  no  harm  and  may  do  some 
good,  although  the  writer  thinks  the  benefit  derived  is  largely 
imaginary,  unless  a  gummy  oil  is  being  used.  To  do  this, 
just  run  the  machine  slowly  while  you  flood  the  bearings 
with  gasoline  from  an  ordinary  oil  can,  continuing  until  the 
bearings  are  thoroughly  washed  out.    A  piece  of  old  Turkish 


FOR    MANAGERS    AND    OPERATORS  107 

towel  is  ideal  to  clean  a  machine  head  with,  as  it  can  be  drawn 
into  the  crevices  and-  gathers  all  the  oil  and  dirt. 

Of  intermittent  mechanisms  there  are  two  types,  viz.:  the 
cam  and  star  and  the  cam  and  pawl,  the  latter  being  com- 
monly known  as  the  "finger  feed."  It  is  not  the  purpose  of 
this  work  to  discuss  the  relative  merits  of  the  two  methods 
of  moving  the  film,  but  merely  to  give  necessary  instructions 
for  their  adjustment.  The  adjustment  of  the  Power's,  Edison 
and  American  intermittent  movements  are  practically  the 
same,  so  that  one  instruction  will  do  for  all.  It  is  of  the 
utmost  importance  that  there  be  absolutely  no  lost  motion 
between  the  star  and  cam,  while  at  the  same  time  there  must 
be  absolutely  no  binding.  The  adjustment  to  eliminate  lost 
motion  between  the  star  and  cam  is  a  very  simple  operation, 
but  few  there  are  who  make  it  right.  The  cam  shaft  of  the 
machines  named  all  run  in  bronze  metal  bushings,  which 
may  be  removed  and  renewed,  and  they  should  be  just  as 
soon  as  they  become  worn.  The  operation  is  too  simple  to 
require  much  explanation.  To  renew  the  old  one,  loosen  the 
set-screw  which  holds  the  bushing  and  slip  it  (the  bushing) 
out  and  the  new  one  in.  With  the  Edison  machine  it  is  best 
to  first  remove  the  gears,  so  that  you  may  readily  get  at  it. 
The  one  on  the  left-hand  end  is  more  difficult,  especially  in 
the  Power's,  since  the  shaft  must  be  taken  out,  but  even  this 
is  readily  done.  Just  examine  the  mechanism  closely  before 
you  begin  and  you  will  be  able  to  see  how  it  is  done.  Right 
here  let  me  caution  you.  Don't  imagine  you  are  working  on 
a  freight-car  or  a  locomotive.  Don't  go  at  it  with  a  four- 
pound  hammer,  a  Stillson  wrench  and  a  cold  chisel.  If  some- 
thing sticks  a  little,  have  a  little  patience  and  remember  that 
your  getting  mad  at  it  won't  help  to  any  appreciable  extent. 
You  may  feel  like  going  after  it  with  an  axe,  but  while  that 
might  cool  your  temper  down  it  won't  improve  matters  a 
particle    and   will    probably   make    them    considerably   worse. 

You  are  working  on  a  delicate  piece  of  machinery  and  you 
must  proceed  gently,  else,  instead  of  repairing,  you  will  do 
precisely  the  opposite.  Motion  picture  machine  parts  are 
accurately  made,  and  if  something  doesn't  come  out  readily 
you  can  pretty  near  be  sure  it  is  for  the  reason  that  you  are 
not  going  about  it  right.  Of  course,  it  may  be  necessary  to 
use  a  punch  and  tap  a  boxing  or  shaft  lightly,  but  in  such 


108 


MOTION    PICTURE   HANDBOOK 


cases  one  should  use  a  soft  steel  or  brass  punch  or  a  piece 
of  hardwood.  Be  very  chary  about  using  a  tempered  punch 
except  for  very  light  tapping.  The  star  shaft  runs  in  bronze 
metal  bushings  also,  but  the  holes  in  these  bushings  are  not 
central.  They  are  what  are  called  "eccentric  bushings,"  and 
turning  them  slightly  has  the  effect  of  raising  or  lowering 
the  star  shaft  in  relation  to  the  cam  shaft,  thus  tightening  or 
loosening  the  star  in  relation  to  the  cam.  Now  in  making 
this  adjustment  it  is  absolutely  essential  that  the  star  shaft 
be  kept  exactly  parallel  with  the  cam  shaft,  and  right  here 
is  where  all  but  the  very  best  operators  fall  down.  If  one 
bushing  be  turned  more  than  the  other  a  condition,  or  its 
exact  reverse,  such  as  is  shown  in  Fig.  Zly  is  produced, 
though  in  the  picture  it  is  exaggerated. 


n&^7 


To  take  up  lost  motion  between  the  star  and  cam,  loosen 
the  set-screws  which  hold  the  bushings.  These  screws  will 
be  found  in  the  face  of  the  casting  opposite  the  bushings. 
Now,  with  a  screwdriver,  turn  the  bushings  until  there  is 
no  lost  motion  in  the  star  when  the  cam  pin  is  clear  of  the 
star  slot.     But  be  very  sure  to  turn  both  bushings  exactly 


®KD 


^ 


FlQB'i 


the  same  amount.  There  are  several  waj'S  of  knowing  when 
you  have  turned  the  bushings  the  same,  but  the  three  I  shall 
name  are  simple  enough  for  anyone  to  carry  out  successfully. 
One  is  to  lay  a  straight-edge  across  the  end  of  ei^ch  bushing 


FOR    MANAGERS    AND    OPERATORS  100 

and  with  the  point  of  a  knife  blade  make  a  scratch-mark  at 
one  edge  of  each  bushing,  extending  it  on  to  the  frame,  as 
per  Fig.  38.  When  the  bushing  is  turned  the  marks  will,  of 
course,  separate,  and  with  a  machinist's  steel  rule,  using  a 
condenser  lens  for  magnifying,  you  may  easily  measure  just 
how  much  you  have  turned  each  bushing,  or  you  can,  after 
making  the  scratch-mark,  set  an  ordinary  carpenter's  compass 
open  about  half  an  inch  and  setting  one  point  on  the  scratch- 
mark  at  edge  of  bushing,  make  a  mark  on  the  casting  wher- 
ever the  other  compass  point  comes.  Now  by  using  this 
latter  mark  you  can  tell  with  the  compass  when  you  have 
turned  each  bushing  the  same.  Another  and  better  method 
is  to  have  a  pair  of  small,  inside  calipers,  calipering  the  dis- 
tance between  the  two  shafts  as  near  their  ends,  inside  the 
bearings,  as  you  can  get.  It  will  require  some  little  ingenuity 
to  do  this,  as  the  shafts  are  not  the  same  size  throughout 
their  length;  by  calipering  the  shafts  before  moving  the 
bushings,  marking  the  measure  of  each  caliper  and  then 
measuring  for  the  same  increase  of  measure  at  each  end, 
you  will  get  it  right,  assuming  that  the  shafts  were  parallel 
to  start  with. 

The  best  way  of  all  I  can  recommend  is  to  make  a  tool  like 
Fig.  39.  It  is  a  half-inch  square  piece  of  iron  with  two 
screwdriver  points  held  in  place  by  set-screws.  With  this 
tool  you  will  move  both  bushings  precisely  the  same  if  you 
are  at  all  careful.  If  you  produce  a  condition  such  as  is 
shown  in  Fig.  zi  you  will  wear  both  the  cam  and  star  face 
on  a  bevel  as  well  as  cutting  the  side  of  the  cam,  star,  star 
slot  and  cam  pin.  You  may  say,  "Oh,  it  won't  be  enough  to 
amount  to  much,"  but  I  say  to  you,  there  is  where  you  are 
much  mistaken.  So  rapid  and  accurate  rnust  be  the  work 
of  the  star  and  cam  that  they  must  be  absolutely  mechan- 
ically correct,  and  this  is  impossible  under  the  condition 
shown  in  Fig.  ZT-  The  time  is  at  hand  when  the  best  pos- 
sible results  are  going  to  be  demanded  of  the  operator.  The 
"picture  as  steady  as  a  rock  house"  will  be  an  actuality  in 
the  near  future,  and  the  operator  is  going  to  be  expected  to 
produce  it.  This  he  cannot  do  unles::.  his  intermittent  move- 
ment, at  least,  is  in  perfect  adjustment  and  condition.  The 
haphazard,  "guess-at-it"  adjustment  of  machine  mechanism 
must  be  abandoned  and  accuracy  substituted  instead. 


no  MOTION    PICTURE   HANDBOOK 

The  American  machine  bushings  are  a  little  different  from 
the  Power's  and  Edison  in  that  they  are  longer  and  are 
turned  by  inserting  a  pin  in  holes  in  their  sides.  Also  they 
are  clamped  by  short  bars  instead  of  by  set-screws.  Their 
action  is  precisely  the  same,  however.  The  Motiograph  star 
movement  will  be  dealt  with  further  on. 

The  star,  the  pin  of  the  cam  and  the  intermittent  sprocket, 
especially  the  iirst  and  last  named,  should  be  watched  and 
promptly  renewed  when  there  are  signs  of  serious  wear.  In 
the  nature  of  things,  the  thicker  the  star  is,  other  things 
being  equal,  the  longer  it  will  wear,  but  as  soon  as  the 
points  wear  sharp  or  the  slots  are  loose  on  a  new  cam-pin 
the  star  should  be  renewed.  The  spurs  on  the  intermittent 
sprocket  wear  faster  than  is  imagined,  and  worn  sprockets 
are  responsible  for  much  mischief.  Examine  these  spurs 
occasionally,  looking  at  them  carefully,  and  if  one  side — the 
side  bearing  on  the  film — is  worn  concave  the  sprocket 
should  be  promptly  renewed.  With  the  finger  feed  machine 
the  film  gradually  cuts  a  slight  groove  on  the  under  side  of 
the  pawls,  or  fingers.  This  is  hard  to  detect  by  looking  at 
the  pawls  while  attached  to  the  machine,  and  it  causes  a 
slight  but  constant  vibration  on  the  curtain.  If  there  is  such 
a  vibration,  remove  the  pawls  and  examine  them,  replacing 
with  new  ones  if  a  groove  is  discovered.  It  doesn't  have  to 
be  a  deep  groove  to  make  mischief.  Remember  that  every 
i-iooo  of  an  inch  becomes  noticeable  when  magnified  on  the 
curtain.  The  aperture  plate  is  another  thing  to  be  closely 
watched.  You  must  remember  that  a  very  slight  variation 
of  the  film  from  the  projection  lens  seriously  affects  the 
focus.  With  some  machines  using  short,  pliable  tension 
springs  the  pressure  of  the  short  spring  on  the  film  wears  a 
short  depression  in  the  aperture  plate  tracks.  When  the  film 
passes  through  this  depression,  which  is  usually  deepest  in 
Its  center,  there  is  a  decided  tendency  to  "cup,"  and  in  any 
event  the  entire  picture  is  not  exactly  the  same  distance  from 
the  projection  lens.  This  is  bound,  to  some  extent,  to  affect 
the  focus.  Worse  than  this,  however,  sometimes  the  springs 
wear  one  side  of  the  track  more  than  the  other  or  wear 
depressions  at  either  end  of  the  springs  with  a  hump  in  the 
middle.  This  will  cup  the  film  every  time,  and,  if  it  is  bad. 
affect    the    focus   very   much.     Plates    worn    thus   should    b** 


FOR    MANAGERS    AND    OPERATORS 


111 


replaced  immediately.  In  threading,  the  operator  should 
make  it  an  invariable  practice  to  run  his  finger  around  the 
edge  of  aperture.  Dirt  and  dust  will  collect,  and  a  grain  of 
dust  the  size  of  the  head  of  a  pin  will  look  like  a  cobblestone 
on  the  curtain.  A  picture  fringed  with  ragged  edges  caused 
b}'  dirt  in  the  aperture  is  a  standing  advertisement  of  the 
carelessness  or  incompetency,  or  bolh.  of  the  operator  in 
charge. 

SETTING    THE    SHUTTER. 

Setting  the  shutter  is  a  simple  operation,  but  compara- 
tively few  men  in  charge  of  operating  rooms  know  how  to  do 
it  correctly.  Here  is  a  method  which  is  correct  and  will 
work  equally  well  on  any  machine:  Loosen  the  shutter  on 
Its  shaft  and  take  it  off.  On  the  wide  blade  lay  out  the 
center  line  A,  Fig.  40.  Now  replace  it  loosely  on  its  spindle. 
Next  cut  a  short  piece  of  film  (say  a  foot  long)  exactly  on 
the  dividing  line  between  two  pictures.  Thread  this  into  the 
machine  and  by  looking  through  the  projection  lens,  frame 
it  up  carefully.  Be  very  sure  to  get  it  exactly  in  frame. 
Now  carefully,  with  the  flywheel,  turn  the  machine  in  the 
direction  it  runs  until  the  end  of  the  film  is  exactly  half  way 
across  the  picture  opening.  Turn  the  shutter,  in  the  direc- 
tion it  runs,  on  its  spindle  until  mark  A,  Fig.  40,  is  exactly 
half     way     across     the     aperture     opening.        Tighten     your 


shutter  on  its  spindle  and  the  job  is  done.  It  is  best 
to  set  your  framer  in  central  position  while  doing  this 
job.  With  the  Motiograph  machine  set  the  crease  in 
the  center  of  the  inner  shutter  blade  opposite  end  of 
film     and    set    outer    shutter    in     exactly     the    same    posi- 


112  MOTION   PICTURE   HANDBOOK 

tion.  That  is  to  say:  set  inner  blade  as  directed  and 
tighten  it  on  shaft.  Then,  without  moving  machine  a  parti- 
cle, set  the  outer  blade  central  back  of  inner  blade.  A  mo- 
ment's thought  will  convince  you  that  a  shutter  set  thus 
must  be  right  if  the  shutter  itself  is  properly  proportioned. 
The  office  of  the  wide  blade  of  the  shutter  is  to  cover  the 
aperture  entirely  during  the  time  the  film  is  in  motion  and 
not  an  instant  longer.  With  some  machines  the  film  begins 
to  move  just  a  trifle  before  the  opening  is  entirely  covered. 
This  is  for  the  reason  that  unless  it  be  too  much  the  effect 
is  not  noticeable  on  the  curtain  and  every  bit  taken  from 
shutter  width  increases  the  amount  of  light  which  reaches 
the  screen. 

The  narrow  blade  of  the  shutter  is  of  no  particular  inter- 
est to  the  operator  except  that  he  wishes  to  study  the  pecu- 
liarities of  optics.  It  is  added  to  the  shutter  simply  for  the 
reason  that  the  flicker  caused  by  one  blade  alone  comes 
far  enough  apart  that  the  eye  catches  them  more  noticeably 
than  the  more  rapid  flicker  of  two  blades.  Perhaps  that 
particular  explanation  is  somewhat  crudely  put,  but  in  the 
main  it  is  correct.  Take  all  the  spokes  but  one  out  of  a 
v>agon  wheel  and  revolve  it  rapidly.  You  see  that  one  spoke 
plainly  all  the  time.  Put  in  all  the  spokes  and  revolve  the 
wheel  at  the  same  speed  and  you  see  no  spokes  at  all — just 
a  sort  of  blur.  Project  light  through  the  revolving  wheel 
with  one  spoke  and  you  will  see  the  spoke's  shadow  plainly. 
Project  light  through  the  revolving  wheel  with  all  its  spokes 
and  you  will  see  no  spoke  shadow  at  all,  but  the  amount 
of  light  going  through  will  be  reduced.  Right  here  let  me 
say  that  those  purchasing  machines  should  closely  examine 
into  the  matter  of  its  shutter  width.  If  the  intermittent 
movement  be  comparatively  slow  the  shutter  must  perforce 
be  wider  than  in  a  machine  with  faster  movement,  and  this 
naturally  reduces  the  light  you  will  get  to  the  curtain  from 
a  given  arc  intensity.  In  other  words,  you  must  have  a 
more  powerful  light  to  get  the  same  result  on  the  curtain 
if  your  machine  has  slow  intermittent  movement  with  con- 
sequent wider  shutter.  Look  into  this  carefully.  That  is 
the  secret  of  the  one  pin  movement  being  better  than  the 
two  pin.  Its  star  movement  is  necessarily  very  much  faster, 
which  allows  of  material  reduction  in  shutter  width. 


FOR    MANAGERS    AND    OPERATORS  113 

On  machines  where  the  side  of  shutter  hub  and  spindle 
can  be  plainly  seen  it  is  a  good  plan  to  mark  the  shutter 
while  it  is  set  right.  Do  this  by  making  a  small  prick-punch 
mark  on  the  spindle  close  to  the  hub.  On  the  hub,  exactly 
opposite  the  punch  mark  make  a  scratch  mark.  You  may 
now  set  the  shutter  correctly  any  time  it  slips  by  simply 
bringing  the  two  marks  together.  To  set  a  shutter  quickly 
and  with  approximate  accuracy  turn  the  machine  by  its  fly- 
wheel in  the  direction  it  runs  until  the  star  has  completed  its 
movement  and  the  cam  pin  is  just  half-way  out  of  star-slot. 
Now  revolve  shutter  on  its  spindle  in  the  direction  it  runs 
until  aperture  just  begins  to  open,  and  tighten  shutter  on  its 
spindle.  With  some  machines  it  is  necessary  to  have  aper- 
ture quite  a  little  open  when  pin  is  half-way  out  of  star-slot. 
By  "half-way  out"  I  mean  half  its  diameter  out  of  the  slot. 
This  will,  or  should,  be  very  nearly  right.  It  applies  equally  to 
the  finger  feed  machines,  but  cannot  be  used  with  double  shut- 
ter machines.  With  them  the  leaves  of  the  shutter  should  be 
set  so  as  to  just  barely  close  the  opening  (in  its  exact  center) 
should,  be  very  nearly  right.  It  applies  equally  to  the  finger 
feed  machines,  but  cannot  be  used  with  double  shutter  ma- 
chines. With  them  the  leaves  of  the  shutter  should  be  set 
so  as  to  just  barely  close  the  opening  (in  its  exact  center) 
as  the  star  begins  to  move.  Ordinarily,  however,  double 
shutters  require  very  fine  adjustment.  I  would  recommend 
to  purchasers  of  machines  that  they  insist  on  being  provided 
with  an  exact  pattern  cut  from  paper,  of  the  shutter  of  eech 
machine  under  consideration.  By  placing  these  patterns  one 
on  top  of  the  other  you  can  see  at  a  glance  which  one  cuts 
the  most  light.  In  this  test  both  the  small  and  large  blades 
should  be  taken  into  consideration.  On  double  shutter  ma- 
chines the  width  of  both  blades  must  be  counted;  that  is 
to  say,  you  must  add  together  the  width  of  both  wide  and 
both  narrow  blades.  Another  accurate  method  of  setting  a 
shutter  is  as  follows:  Set  fram;,  in  a  central  position.  Turn 
flywheel  in  direction  it  runs  until  cam-pin  has  entered  half 
its  diameter  into  star  slot;  make  scratch  mark  on  rim  of  fly- 
wheel and  exactly  opposite  it,  on  some  fixed  part  of  machine, 
make  a  light  prick-punch  mark.  Now  turn  flywheel  until 
cam-pin  has  emerged  one-half  its  diameter  from  star  and 
exactly  opposite  the  prick-punch  mark  make  another  scratch 


114  MOTION   PICTURE   HANDBOOK 

mark  on  rim  of  flywheel.  Now  measure  around  flywheel 
between  the  two  scratch  marks  and  exactly  half  way  between 
them  make  a  third  mark.  Now  set  this  last  mark  exactly 
opposite  the  prick-punch  mark  and  set  line  A,  Fig.  40,  ex- 
actly half  way  across  the  aperture  and  your  shutter  will 
be  right. 

Sprocket  idlers  should  never  run  clear  down  on  the 
film.  There  are  setscrews  for  the  purpose  of  holding 
the  idler  away  from  the  sprocket  and  they  should  be 
set  so  that  the  idler  is  oflf  the  sprocket  by  about  the  thick- 
ness of  a  film  or  a  trifle  more.  Idlers  running  clear  down 
have  a  tendency  to  make  the  film  climb  the  sprocket  teeth. 
The  tension  springs  which  hold  film  against  aperture  plate 
should  be  set  so  as  to  provide  just  enough  pressure  to 
prevent  vibration  in  the  film  and  no  more.  Some  operators 
who  are  too  lazy  or  ignorant  to  keep  their  intermittent 
movement  in  adjustment  seek  to  take  up  the  lost  motion  by 
added  pressure  of  tension  springs.  The  result  is  accom- 
plished all  right,  unless  the  case  be  too  bad,  but  at  expense 
of  heavy  wear  on  driving  gear,  star,  cam-pin,  aperture  plate 
and  film.  The  office  of  the  tension  springs  is  to  stop  the 
small  section  of  film  between  the  upper  loop  and  the  in- 
termittent sprocket  and  hold  each  picture  absolutely  sta- 
tionary before  the  aperture  during  the  time  of  its  exposure. 
More  tension  than  is  required  to  accomplish  this  is  very 
bad  practice.  Keep  your  intermittent  movement  in  accurate 
adjustment  and  a  very  slight  tension  will  do  the  required  work. 
Automatic  fire  shutters  all  depend  on  the  same  principle, 
viz.:  centrifugal  force.  They  are  too  simple  to  require  re- 
mark other  than  that  they  are  rather  delicate  in  their  action 
and  should  be  kept  scrupulously  clean  and  in  the  best  of 
order. 


FOR    MANAGERS    AND    OPERATORS  llS 


Machines. 


THE    EDENGRAPH. 

The  Edengraph  machine  is  new  to  the  projection  frater- 
nity, therefore  it  is  in  order  to  give  detailed  instruction. 
The  gears  are  incased  in  a  dustproof  casing,  the  back  side  of 
which  is  a  plate  of  metal  sliding  in  grooves  which  lifts  out, 
disclosing  the  entire  gearing  of  the  machine.  To  set  the 
shutter  remove  the  gear  cover  plate  and  you  will  see,  just  over 
the  fly-wheel,  a  thumbscrew  on  the  end  of  a  universal  joint 
shaft.  Loosen  this  thumbscrew  and  you  may  turn  the  shut- 
ter at  will.  Now  turn  the  fly-wheel  in  the  direction  it  nor- 
mally runs  until  the  intermittent  sprocket  is  just  ready  to 
move.  Hold  fly-wheel  stationary  and  revolve  shutter  until 
it  covers  all  but  about  one-quarter  of  an  inch  of  the  lower 
part  of  the  aperture  opening.  Now  hold  the  shutter  (not  the 
fly-wheel)  stationery  with  one  hand  while  you  tighten  the 
thumbscrew  on  end  of  universal  joint  shaft  with  the  other, 
and  the  job  is  done. 

You  will  notice  the  frame-up  carriage  is  counterbalanced 
by  a  spring  held  by  a  rod  which  terminates  in  a  large,  dark- 
colored,  smooth  screw  on  top  of  machine,  near  right  front 
corner.  Look  at  this  arrangement  carefully  and  you  will 
see  how  it  works.  But  the  mere  adjustment  of  this  counter- 
balance is  not  always  sufficient.  Should  the  frame-up  car- 
riage be  too  loose  and  work  up  or  down  as  the  machine 
runs,  you  may  tighten  it  by  first  loosening  the  three  large 
screws  in  upright  bar  which  forms  one  angle  of  front,  right 
corner  of  machine.  Next  tighten  (or  if  frame-up  works  too 
hard,  loosen)  the  four  small  screws  which  are  seen  up  and 
down  near  edge  of  machine  at  front,  right-hand  corner. 
Adjust  these  screws  so  that  carriage  works  just  right  and 
then  re-tighten  the  three  screws  you  loosened  first.  The 
sprocket  idlers  must  be  so  adjusted  (you  can  easily  see  how 
it  is  done)  that  they  will  set  away  from  the  sprockets  by 
about  twice  the  thickness  of  an  ordinary  film.     The  automatic 


116  MOTION    PICTURE   HANDBOOK 

(fire  shutter)  .^vernor  is  inside  the  fly-wheel.  To  get  at 
it  remove  the*"' screw  in  center  of  fly-wheel,  as  well  as  the 
washer  linden  it.  Tap  the  washer  lightly  and  it  will  fall  out. 
Next  set  the  intermittent  sprocket  just  so  it  is  beginning  to 
move.  Grasp  the  sprocket  tightly  and  liold  it  stationary 
while  you  twist  the  fly-wheel  in  tJie  direction  it  normally  runs, 
pulling  outward  on  it  at  the  same  time,  thus  working  it  oflf 
the  shaft. 

The  automatic  governor  may  be  easily  removed  by  first 
taking  fly-wheel  off  and  then  opening  the  gate,  after  which 
remove  the  screw,  the  head  of  which  is  right  beside  edge  of 
large  gear,  and  which  holds  Y-shaped  lever  carrying  cone- 
ring.  When  you  have  this  scre\*'  removed  just  pull  the  whole 
thing  straight  out,  being  careful  you  see  how  it  all  comes 
apart,  so  that  you  can  get  it  together  again.  To  remove  the 
intermittent  movement  from  machine  proceed  as  follows: 
Remove  fly-wheel  and  governor  as  before  described.  Next 
remove  the  lens  holder  on  operating  side  of  machine.  You- 
will  now  see  the  heads  of  three  large,  flat  screws  on  operating 
side  of  machine.  Remove  the  lower  one  and  pull  out  the 
shaft  and  gear  it  holds.  Take  off  the  lower  (^take-up) 
sprocket  and  pull  out  the  spindle.  Remove  the  collar  on 
crankshaft  and  pull  shaft  and  gear  out.  Now  look  inside  the 
machine  -and  just  to  one  side  of  intermittent  oil  casing  you 
will  see  aMarge,  flat-headed  screw,  with  another  immediately 
below'  the  casing.  Remove  them  and  you  can  pull  out  the 
whole  casing,  tapping  lightly  on  center  of  end  of  intermittent 
sprocket  if  necessary  to  start  it.  Be  very  careful  thatf  you 
don't  injure  the  intermittent  sprocket  teeth  on  bottom  of 
apertiwe  plate  tracks  as  you  pull  casing  out.  To  take  up  lost 
motion  between  star  and  cam  remove  cover  of  oil  casing,  and 
in  top  edge  of  casing,  just  over  shaft,  v^iU  be  seen  a  small 
set  screw.  This  screw  holds  the  star  shaft  bushing,  which 
extends  through  casing  and  clear  out  to  the  sprocket  and 
is  eccentric.  By  loosening  the  screw  you  may  turn  the  bush- 
ing and  tighten  or  loosen  (according  to  the  way  you  turn  it) 
the  star  in  relation  to  the  cam-wheel.  To  remove  star  just 
drive  out  small  (taper)  pin  in  hub  of  star  and  pull  shaft  out. 
To  remove  cam,  drive  out  pin  (taper)  in  its  hub  and  pull 
shaft  out. ..  To  remove  the  revolving  shutter  take  off  thumb- 
screw at  end  of  universal  joint  shaft  and  pull  gear  off.     In  the 


.^i^^ 


FOR    MANAGERS    AND    OPERATORS  117 

back  of  the  square  casting,  held  by  cast  elbow  arAi,  you  will 
see  two  screws.  ^ 

Remove  these  two  screws  and  the  whole  sliutter,  bevel 
gears,  shafts  and  all,  comes  away.  Once  in  six  months  re- 
move cover  of  intermittent  oil  casing  and  clean  oil-well  out 
good,  filling  with  fresh  sperm  oil.  Fill  the  well  up  to  half  the 
diameter  of  the  cam-wheel.  The  foregoing,  I  believe,  covers 
all  essential  operations  at  all  apt  to  be  necessary  with  the 
Edengraph.  Some  of  the  operations  described  may  seem 
complicated,  to  read  the  instructions,  but  really  they  arc  sim- 
ple enough,  the  main  thing  being  that  you  study  each  move 
carefully  so  as  to  be  sure  to  get  things  together  again  right. 
Engine  yalve-oil  will  be  excellent  for  the  gears  of  the  Eden- 
graph, thbugh  ordinary  oil  will  do  nicely;  wash  gears 'out  '* 
once  in  a  while  with  gasoline  or  benzine.  The  take-up  ten-/ 
sion^iinijjde  tight  or  loose  by  loosening  split  collar  on  lower^ 
magazine  shaft  and  turning  it  one  way  or  tlje  other.  This 
^tightens  or  loosens  the  belt^&tfcofding  to  whicf^b,  way  ip  is 
moved.  *'  ^f  -       _1 

EDISON    UNDERWRI^RS'    MODEL. 

Edison  Underwriters'  Model,  Type  "B."^-The  Edison  "B" 
Model  is  a  somewhat  new'  type  of  projector,  tli-oat^^fgllow- 
ing  in  general  along  th^ /amiliar.  iines  W  tlfe*  Edison  con- 
struction. This  machine  has  the  adv9nta,g^,  over  p'revious 
Edison  types,  of  a  rigid  iron  frame^'^whicH  makes  for  elim-  i,^ 
ination  of  vibration. 

The  upper  and  lower  steel  sprockets  '■are  flanged,  the  idea 
being  to  prevent  b^dly  worn  film  jumping  off.  The  idlers  are 
held  against  "the  sprocket  by  springa,**and  are  kept  the  proper 
distance  away  by  means  of  flanges  on  the  sides,  so  that 
adjustment  by  the  operator  is  not  lig cessary.  These  flanges 
revolve  independently  of  each  other.  The  intermittent  idler 
is  held  in  place,  though  it  bears  directly  on  the  film  and  is 
self-aligning.  These  idfers  can  be  easily  removed  for  repairs 
or  renewal,  merely  by  driving  out  the  spindle  upon  which 
they  revolve;  first,  however,  loosening  the  tiny  screws  in 
the  center  of  the  face  of  each  idler. 

The  framing  lever  can  be  made  to  work  hard  or  easy  by 
loosening  or  tightening  the  screws  in  either  bearing  holding 
the  rack  and  pinion  shaft. 


118  MOTION   PICTURE   HANDBOOK 

The  aperture,  or  picture  gauge,  is  held  upon  the  face  of  a 
casting,  which  in  turn  rests  upon  the  back  side  of  the  frame, 
and  held  in  place  by  two  screws.  If,  for  any  reason,  this 
plate  is  disarranged,  it  can  be  adjusted  by  loosening  the 
screws,  aligning  properly  and  tightening  again.  Care  should 
be  taken  to  have  these  screws  tight  at  all  times. 

The  shutter  of  this  machine  is  set  as  follows:  Set  the 
framing  lever  in  the  center  of  its  travel.  Now,  remove  the 
lens,  and  looking  in  through  the  lens  hole,  turn  the  balance 
wheel  of  the  machine  in  the  direction  it  runs  until  the  cam 
pin  has  entered  half  of  its  diameter  in  the  star  slot,  first, 
of  course,  having  loosened  the  shutter  on  its  spindle.  Hav- 
ing the  cam  pin  entered  half  of  its  diameter  in  the  star  slot, 
grasp  the  balance  wheel  firmly  to  hold  it  stationary,  and 
revolve  -the  shutter  in  the  direction  it  normally  runs  until 
the  solid  wing  of  the  shutter  covers  three-quarters  of  the 
aperture.  This  is,  or  should  be,  about  right.  Tighten  the 
shutter  on  the'  spindle  slightly,  put  in  a  film,  and  try  it.  If 
there  is  travel-ghost,  slip  the  shutter  slightly  one  way  or 
the  other  until  it  is  just  right  and  then  tighten  it  securely 
on   its  spindle. 

To  eliminate  lost  motion,  between  the  star  wheel  and  cam, 
])roceed  as  follows.  The  star  shaft  runs  in  eccentric  bush- 
ings, one  at  either  end.  These  bushings  are  held  in  place 
by  small  set  screws  in  the  face  of  the  casting.  Loosen 
these  set  screws  and  turn  the  bushing  at  either  end  slightly 
— just  enough  to  take  up  the  lost  motion.  This  operation 
is  more  full}-  described  on  another  page.  The  end  of  the 
right  hand  bushing  may  be  got  at  by  sticking  the  screw- 
driver through  one  of  the  holes  in  the  main  crank  driving 
gear  and  balance  wheel.  T!ie  intermittent  sprocket  and  shaft 
may  be  removed  by  slipping  out  the  left  hand  bushing,  re- 
moving the  aperture  plate  and  the  lower  film  guard  which 
comes  up  between  the  rims  of  the  sprockets.  The  star, 
shaft  and  sprocket  may  then  be  removed.  The  cam  shaft 
may  be  removed  as  follows:  Take  out  the  screw  at  the  end 
of  the  crank  shaft  and  pull  off  the  gear.  Now  remove  the 
large  intermediate  gear  next  below  the  top  sprocket  gear. 
This  exposes  two  screws,  one  in  the  upper,  and  one  in  the 
lower  end  of  the  casting  which  holds  end  of  balance  wheel, 
or   cam  shaft.     Remove  these   screws  and   carefully   pry  off 


FOR    MANAGERS    AND    OPERATORS  119 

this  frame  side  cap.  Next  loosen  the  set  screw  in  face  of 
casting  which  holds  bushing  at  opposite  end  of  cam  shaft, 
and  slip  the  bushing  out.  You  may  now,  having  first  re- 
moved the  aperture  plate,  pull  the  whole  shaft,  balance  wheel 
and  cam  away. 

The  take-up  is  so  arranged  that  it  can  be  placed  in  front  of 
mechanism  or  beneath  the  baseboard,  to  suit  conditions. 
The  take-up  is  of  the  frictional  type  and  may  be  adjusted 
by  compressing  the  tension  spring  on  the  take-up  reel  shaft 
to  increase  the  friction,  or  loosening  to  decrease  it.  When 
magazine  is  in  lower  position  (or  beneath  baseboard),  the 
driving  belt  is  arranged  with  idler  pulley  and  a  weight  to 
keep  a  constant  tension  on  the  belt,  obviating  the  necessity 
of  cutting  the  belt  for  readjustment. 

THE  LUBIN   CINEOGRAPH 

The  new  model  of  the  Lubin  Cineograph  presents  cer- 
tain peculiarities  worthy  of  notice.  It  is. of  the  familiar  star- 
and-cam  type  of  construction,  but  the  movement  is  unique 
in  that  the  ends  of  the  intermittent  shaft  are  counterbored  to 
receive  the  cone-shaped  tips  of  the  intermittent  eccentric 
bushings,  instead  of  the  shaft  entering  into  and  extend- 
ing through  the  bushings  as  is  usual.  Lost  motion  between 
the  star  and  cam  wheels  is  eliminated  in  the  same  manner 
as  is  described  on  page  io8.  Great  care  must  be  exercised 
that  the  bushings  set  up  snug  against  the  ends  of  the  inter- 
mittent shaft  on  either  side,  and  that  the  intermittent  sprocket 
spurs  be  kept  exactly  in  line  with  the  center  of  the  tracks 
of  the  aperture  plate.  The  intermittent  bushings  are  re- 
leased in  their  setting  by  loosening  the  screw  in  the 
face  of  the  casting  opposite  each  intermittent  bushing.  In 
the  ends  of  each  bushing  is  a  screwdriver  slot  by  which  it 
may  be  turned.  The  intermittent  sprocket  star  and  shaft 
may  be  removed  from  the  machine  by  taking  off  the  apron 
which  comes  up  between  the  flanges  of  the  sprocket,  loosen- 
ing the  left-hand  bushing,  slipping  it  back,  and  lifting  out  the 
whole  intermittent  shaft  and  star. 

The  framer  may  be  made  to  work  easy  or  hard  by  tight- 
ening or  loosening  the  two  screws  in  the  center  of  the  face 
of  the  machine  casting  almost  opposite  the  intermittent  idler 
roller.     The  balance  wheel   shaft  and  cam  may  be   removed 


120  MOTION   PICTURE  HANDBOOK 

from  the  machine  by  moving  the  lower  apron  and  the  two 
boxings  which  hold  it  in  place.  The  idler  brackets  of  this 
machine  are  supposed  to  be  held  the  proper  distance  from 
the  sprockets  by  the  springs,  and  the  only  adjustment  pos- 
sible is  by  bending  the  end  of  the  springs  slightly  where  it 
fits  in  the  flat  space  on  the  bracket  spindle. 

End  motion  in  the  shutter  shaft  should  not  be  tolerated. 
It  may  be  eliminated  by  moving  the  brass  collar  which 
sets  against  the  boxing  inside  the  machine  up  tight  against 
the  boxing,  at  the  same  time  holding  the  shutter  spindle  as 
far  forward  as  possible.  The  whole  shutter  gear  and  spindle 
may  be  removed  from  the  machine  by  taking  off  the  front 
plate  and  removing  the  two  screws  holding  the  boxing  and 
the  bracket  of  the  carriage  frame.  The  shutter  of  the  new 
Lubin  machine  is  of  the  three-wing  variety,  and  sets  out  in 
front  of  the  mechanism  in  front  of  the  lens.  To  set  this 
shutter,  loosen  it  on  its  shaft,  and  turn  the  machine  by  its  fly- 
wheel in  the  direction  it  normally  runs  until  the  intermittent 
has  moved  and  the  cam  pin  has  emerged  exactly  half  of  its 
diameter  from  the  star  slot.  Now  revolve  the  shutter  on  its 
spindle  in  the  direction  it  normally  runs  until  the  wide  blade 
covers  a  trifle  more  than  half  of  the  lens,  setting  the  shutter 
as  closely  to  the  lens  as  you  can  get  it,  tighten  one  of  the 
screws  slightly  on  the  shaft,  put  a  film  in  the  machine  and 
try  it.  If  there  is  no  travel-ghost,  you  have  it  right;  if 
travel-ghost  develops,  slip  the  shutter  a  trifle  on  its  spindle 
until  you  get  it  just  right,  tighten  up  both  screws  and  the 
job  is  done.  Use  a  good  grade  of  medium  heavy  oil  on  this 
machine. 

The  automatic  fire  shutter  is  too  simple  to  require  any 
detailed  instructions,  as,  I  believe,  are  all  other  points  of  this 
machine. 

THE    MOTIOGRAPH. 

The  Motiograph  so  far  as  its  principal  elements  are  con- 
cerned, differs  but  little  from  other  well-known  motion  pic- 
ture machines,  with  the  exception  of  the  fireproof  shutter, 
which  is  operated  by  a  ball  governor  that  is  similar  in  prin- 
ciple to  that  used  for  governing  a  steam  engine.  It  also  has 
a  geared  connection  from  the  main  crank  shaft  through  the 
upper  reel  arm  so  as  to  make  it  possible  to  rewind  the  films 


FOR    MANAGERS'    AND    OPERATORS  121 

from  the  main  crank,  an  operation  not  provided  for  in  other 
machines.  Another  feature  that  differs  from  most  other 
machines  is  that  the  gearing  is  encased  within  the  frame 
instead  of  being  exposed.  Its  mechanism  is  simple  and  by 
a  little  careful  attention  it  will  be  easily  understood.  It  is 
a  well-built  mechanism  and,  like  other  well-finished  pieces 
of  machinery,  it  needs  intelligent  care  and  attention. 

The  manufacturers  of  the  Motiograph  have  issued  a  very 
complete  instruction  book  and  I  shall  make  an  effort  to 
cover  only  a  few  additional  points  that  are  liable  to  require 
attention  in  actual  service,  and  more  especially  with  the  1909 
No.  I  Model.  In  the  1910  Model,  several  of  the  features  re- 
ferred to  herein  have  been  arranged  in  a  manner  that  the 
instructions  given  herewith  would  not  apply  to  them.  In 
fact,  instructions  for  the  19x0  Model,  in  addition  to  those 
found  in  the  manufacturers'  instruction  book,  are,  I  believe, 
unnecessarj'-. 

The  iron  pedestal  on  which  the  machine  rests  should  be 
fastened  very  firmly  to  the  floor,  otherwise  it  is  liable  to 
rock  slightly  when  the  films  are  rewound  rapidly. 

The  automatic  shutter  governor  may  be  removed  by. 
loosening  the  two  bushings  in  which  the  ends  of  its  shaft 
run  and  slipping  them  out.  They  are  held  in  place  by 
set  screws.  In  replacing  same  set  the  inner  bushing  just 
so  that  the  shutter  is  completely  closed  when  the  shaft 
is  against  the  bushing.  Tighten  bushing  in  place  and  set 
the  outer  bushing  in  against  the  hub  of  the  governor  and 
withdraw  just  the  barest  trifle,  barely  enough  so  that  there 
will  be  neither  lost  motion  endwise  or  binding.  If  set  so  it 
binds  the  result  would  be  excessive  wear  besides  making  the 
machine  run  hard. 

The  star  and  cam  are  inclosed  in  a  cast  metal  casing  which 
may  be  removed  in  its  entirety  as  follows:  Open  the  film- 
gate.  Remove  the  front  plate  which  holds  the  lens.  Inside  the 
machine,  to  the  left  as  you  look  in,  you  will  see  a  flat  bar 
extending  up  and  down,  which  connects  the  frame-up  lever 
with  the  intermittent  casing  before  mentioned  and  which 
we  are  to  remove.  In  the  side  of  this  bar  is  a  thumb  screw 
which  goes  through  the  bar  and  bears  on  the  casting  to 
hold  the  bar  over  in  place,  since  it,  the  bar,  is  only  attached 
to   the   intermittent   casing  by   slipping   on    a    pin.     Loosen 


122  MOTION   PICTURE   HANDBOOK 

this  thumb  screw  and  press  the  bar  to  the  left  to  detach 
from  the  pin.  You  will  see,  also  to  the  left,  a  round,  upright 
rod  terminating  in  a  thumb  screw  on  top  of  the  machine. 
This  rod  passes  through  two  split  lugs  on  the  intermittent 
casing,  and  it  is  by  tightening  or  loosening  the  screws  in 
these  lugs  that  the  frame-up  lever  is  made  to  work  easy 
or  hard.  Loosen  these  screws  and  by  the  thumb  screw 
on  top  of  machine  remove  the  rod  entirely,  which  will  leave 
the  intermittent  casing  loose  and  ready  to  pull  out,  except 
for  its  connection  with  the  tumbling  rod,  called  the  ball  arbor. 
This  tumbling  rod  connection  is  a  loose  connection  and  the 
whole  intermittent  casing  may  now  be  pulled  out  by  a  little 
manipulating,  first  setting  the  slot  in  tumbling  rod  so  that  it 
points  directly  toward  you.  To  replace,  set  slot  in  tumbling 
rod  hub  so  that  it  points  toward  you  and  enter  tumbling  rod 
hub  so  that  it  points  toward  you  and  enter  tumbling  rod 
in  its  place.  Now  enter  the  fork  in  casing  casting  on  the 
upright  rod  directly  behind  tumbling  rod  hub,  swingirig 
casing  into  place,  replacing  upright  rod  at  left,  attaching 
the  frameup  bar,  not  forgetting  to  tighten  thumb  screw  and 
leaving  all  as  it  was  when  you  began. 

To  install  a  new  star  or  cam  remove  intermittent  casing  as 
above  directed.  Next  remove  the  guard  plate  on  casing  (cata- 
logued as  "Stripper  Plate")  by  removing  the  three  screws 
which  hold  it  in  place.  Next  loosen  the  set  screw  in  hub  of 
tumbling  rod  connection  hub.  Inside  the  tumbling  rod  connec- 
tion hub  j-^ou  will  see  the  end  of  the  cam  shaft,  which  is  held 
by  the  set  screw  just  named,  and  it  may  now  be  driven  out  by 
tapping  with  a  soft  steel,  or  brass  punch,  or  a  piece  of  hard- 
wood. Don't  use  a  hard  steel  punch  under  any  conditions 
Having  removed  the  cam  and  shaft  the  star  is  released  by 
removing  the  two  screws  in  hub  of  sprocket  wheel.  Just 
loosen  them  and  pull  out  the  star.  The  bushings  in  which 
the  star  shaft  runs  are  removed  by  loosening  the  set  screws 
holding  them  which  are  directly  above  them  on  top  of  cas- 
ing casting. 

To  adjust  the  star  and  cam  to  eliminate  lost  mo- 
tion, loosen  the  set  screw  in  top  of  casing  directly  above 
cam  wheel.  In  front,  by  the  side  of  the  tumbling  rod  con- 
nection will  be  seen  the  flange  of  the  bronze  bushing  with 
a  hole  in  it  and  a  set  screw  bearing  on  each  of  its  beveled 


FOR    MANAGERS    AND    OPERATORS  123 

sides.  Loosen  the  bottom  screw  and  tighten  the  top  one 
until  lost  motion  is  eliminated,  but  don't  get  it  tight  enough 
to  bind.  Tighten  all  set  screws  tight  when  through.  There 
is  no  need  to  pay  any  attention  to  the  alignment  of  shafts, 
since  manipulating  the  set  screws  takes  care  of  everything. 
One  point  should  be  looked  carefully  to,  and  that  is  in  re- 
placing the  cam  shaft  (if  j'ou  have  had  it  out)  to  get  the 
set  screw  hole  directly  over  the  hole  in  the  shaft.  This 
is  important,  since  the  shaft  is  slightly  tapered  and  a  part 
of  the  office  of  the  set  screw  is  to  draw  it  home. 

To  remove  balance  wheel,  take  ofif  the  bridge  and  remove 
the  set  screws  in  hub  of  wheel.  I  say  "remove"  them  for  the 
reason  that  they  go  deeply  into  the  shaft.  The  flywheel  may 
then  be  pulled  off.  The  flywheel  shaft  and  inner  bushing 
may  be  removed  as  follows:  Remove  the  film  gate  and 
under  where  its  back  edge  was,  directly  in  line,  up  and 
down,  with  the  flywheel  shaft  will  be  seen  a  set  screw.  Re- 
move this  and  the  shaft  and  bushing  can  be  pulled  out, 
first,  however,  removing  first  gear  wheel  above  shaft,  back 
of  where  flywheel  was. 

Some  of  the  operations  described,  such  as  removing  the 
main  shaft,  may  never  become  necessary,  but  then  again 
it  might  be  one  of  the  first  things  an  operator  would  have 
to  do,  and  unless  he  knew  exactly  how  to  go  about  it  he 
might  experience  some  trouble. 

To  remove  the  main  shaft,  take  off  the  gear  cover  and 
you  will  see  a  sort  of  gridiron,  called  the  "bridge."  Re- 
move this,  carefully  replacing  the  screws  in  their  holes  so 
they  will  not  get  lost.  Incidentally  you  will  notice  in 
the  bridge  two  bronze  boxings  in  which  the  shafts  of 
the  flywheel  and  automatic  governor  run.  These  boxings 
may  be  readily  renewed  by  loosening  the  set  screws 
boxings  may  be  readily  renewed  by  loosening  the  set  screws 
which  hold  them,  slipping  them  out  and  the  new  ones  in. 
Having  removed  the  bridge,  slip  off  the  large  gear  wheel 
on  end  of  crank-shaft.  Now  look  at  crank-shaft  hub  on 
other  side  of  the  machine  and  half  way  down  on  either  side 
see  a  small  hole  in  the  casting.  Remove  the  crank  and 
looking  into  the  hole  where  its  shank  was  you  will  see 
a  pin  extending  through  the  shaft  and  projecting  on  either 
side.     This   pin  engages  in   the   slot   in   end   of  crank-shank 


124  MOTION   PICTURE  HANDBOOK 

and  drives  the  machine.  You  must  now  set  this  pin  ex- 
actly opposite  the  small  holes  in  the  hub  and  with  a  small 
punch  carefully  drive  it  out.  It  is  not  a  taper  pin,  but  per- 
fectly straight  and  drives  either  way.  When  you  get  the 
pin  placed  just  right  have  someone  grasp  the  opposite  end 
of  the  shaft  and  hold  it  in  place.  Insert  the  shank  of  the 
crank  a  quarter  of  an  inch  or  so,  so  as  to  divide  the  shock 
of  the  blows  between  the  shaft  and  the  cast  hub.  Tap  the 
punch  sharply  (but  not  too  hard)  with  a  light  hammer. 
A  sharp,  light  blow  is  the  thing  for  such  a  job.  The  pin 
removed,  you  may  pull  the  shaft  out  at  the  gear  end.  To 
replace,  just  reverse  the  process.  You  will  have  to  reset 
the  shutter,  however,  since  removing  the  bridge  throws  it 
out. 

The  operator  taking  charge  of  a  Motiograph  for  the  first 
time  should  examine  the  machine  very  closely  and  be  very 
certain  he  finds  all  the  oil  holes.  As  has  been  stated,  the 
machine  is  well  built  and  if  you  overlook  bearings  when  oil- 
ing the  bearings  may  bind. 

The  shutter  of  this  machine  is  set  the  same  as  before  de- 
scribed, except  that  the  crease  in  the  wide  blade  is  used  as 
line  A,  Fig.  40,  and  the  second  shutter  is  set  central  with  the 
first,  being  sure  that  the  machine  does  not  move  at  all  until 
the  second  blade  has  been  tightened  in  place.  I  believe  the 
foregoing  takes  care  of  all  the  special  features  the  operator  is 
likely  to  contend  with  in  operating  the  Motiograph.  And 
now  I  think  this  is  all  I  shall  say  concerning  machine  heads. 
It  is  a  hard  subject  to  handle,  under  the  circumstances,  at 
best. 

THE    PATHE    PROFESSIONAL    PROJECTOR. 

The  Pathe  Professional  Projector  is  perhaps  the  simplest 
moving  picture  mechanism  on  the  American  market,  and  by 
reason  of  this  simplicity  the  necessary  directions  to  the 
operator  will  occupy  considerably  less  space  than  those  of 
other  machines. 

The  machine  is  threaded  by  b'-inging  the  film  out  of  the 
upper  magazine,  over  the  top  of  and  down  between  the  top 
sprocket  and  its  idler.  From  the  upper  loop  the  film  goes 
down  through  the  gate,  the  lower  loop  being  formed  in 
a    protected    recess    between    the    intermittent    sprocket    and 


FOR  Managers  and  operators         i^s 

the  lower  take-up  or  feed  sprocket.  Care  must  be  had 
not  to  have  loops  too  long,  or  film  will  rub  against  the  iron 
of  the  machine  and  become  scratched.  Use  a  little  judgment 
and  common-sense  in  forming  the  loops  with  this  machine. 
The  tension  is  taken  care  of  by  two  long  tension  shoes  set 
in  the  gate  and  held  in  place  by  two  flat  springs  on  the  front 
of  the  gate.  Should  the  aperture  plate  film  tracks  become 
worn,  they  may  be  removed  by  loosening  the  three  small 
screws  seen  in  their  face.  Should  top  gate  idler  spring 
become  too  slack  and  not  hold  the  idler  in  its  place,  remove 
front  fire  guard  and  the  spring  which  holds  the  idler  bracket 
and  carefully  bend  it  (the  spring)  slightly.  The  shoe  which 
holds  the  film  against  the  intermittent  sprocket  should  be 
renewed  whenever  it  shows  any  considerable  sign  of  wear. 
It  is  removed  by  merely  loosening  two  springs  and  slipping 
it  out  of  place. 

To  remove  the  intermittent  sprocket  for  renewal,  first 
take  off  the  large  crank  gear  and  its  shaft.  Next  remove 
the  pin  from  the  hub  of  the  lower  chain  sprocket  wheel  and 
drive  out  shaft,  thus  removing  the  center  gear  on  the  operat- 
ing side.  We  next  remove  the  remaining  large  gear  which 
meshes,  into  the  small  flywheel  pinion,  by  taking  out  the 
screw  in  the  center  of  its  hub. 

Now,  looking  in  the  front  (lens  side)  of  the  machine,  we 
sec  two  large  screws  which  hold  the  framework  of  the 
shutter  gear  and  spindle;  remove  these  two  screws.  Imme- 
diately above  these  two  will  be  seen,  on  either  side,  two 
more  large-head  screws  which  hold  the  lower  end  of  inter- 
mittent casing  frame,  with  two  more  above  holding  the 
upper  end.  Remove  all  of  these  screws  and  the  whole  frame- 
work, intermittent  and  flywheel  will  lift  out.  Now  having 
the  intermittent  casement  thus  removed  from  the  machine, 
the  substituting  of  a  new  intermittent  sprocket  will  be  a 
very  simple  operation.  The  putting  of  the  intermittent  back 
into  the  machine  is  merely  the  reversal  of  the  process  of 
taking  it  out,  being  sure,  however,  that  there  is  no  dirt  on 
the  bearings  of  the  intermittent  framework  when  you  put  it 
back,  and  that  all  screws  are  set  up  good  and  tight. 

The  chain  which  drives  the  upper  feed  sprocket  should 
be  well  oiled  with  a  mixture  of  vaseline  and  graphite  or  other 


126  MOTION   PICTURE   HANDBOOK 

similar  compound.  The  chain  should  not  be  very  tight, 
neither  should  it  be  loose. 

On  the  gate  of  the  machine  is  the  automatic  fire  shutter, 
and  right  beside  the  flywheel  the  lever  which  operates  it. 
Immediately  under  the  gate  latch  is  the  screw  which  holds 
this  lever  in  place.  Should  the  shutter  not  work  freely  it 
will  probably  be  by  reason  of  the  fact  that  this  screw  is  a 
trifle  too  tight,  the  remedy  being  to  loosen  it.  This  lever 
is  worked  by  an  eccentric  on  the  inner  hub  of  the  flywheel. 
Looking  at  the  inner  side  of  the  flywheel  you  will  see  a 
wide  slot  or  groove  in  its  surface.  It  is  in  this  groo.ve  that 
the  automatic  fire  shutter  governor  works,  and  it  should  be 
kept  sparingly  lubricated  with  vaseline. 

The  star  wheel  runs  in  an  oil  well  which  should  be  kept 
filled  with  a  heavy  lubricating  oil. 

The  Pathe  Company  recommends  that  the  star  wheel  be 
not  adjusted  or  in  any  way  interfered  with  by  the  operator. 
They  claim  that  the  star  wheel  and  cam,  if  kept  properly 
lubricated,  will  outwear  the  balance  of  the  mechanism. 

The  holes  for  oiling  are  as  follows:  Two  on  the  shutter 
shaft  (one  in  the  front  and  one  in  the  back);  two  on  the 
intermittent  sprocket,  on  either  side;  two  on  the  star-wheel 
shaft;  one  next  to  the  flywheel  (which  lubricates  the  auto- 
matic shutter  mechanism);  one  on  the  outside  of  the  fly- 
wheel; two  on  upper  sprocket  shaft;  two  on  the  lower 
sprocket  and  one  in  the  hub  of  the  large  gear  on  operating 
side  of  the  machine. 

On  the  inside  of  the  fire  shutter  are  the  two  steel  rollers 
which  hold  the  film  in  place  on  the  lower  or  take-up  feed 
sprocket.  It  is  not  only  necessary  but  essential  that  these 
rollers  shall  revolve  freely  at  all  times. 

The  take-up  tension  on  the  lower  magazine  is  controlled 
by  a  fibre  washer  working  between  two  steel  surfaces  com- 
pressed together  by  a  spring,  the  amount  of  tension  being 
governed  by  the  milled  thumbscrew  on  the  end  of  shaft. 
We  would  advise  that  you  take  this  apart  and  examine  it  so 
that  you  will  be  familiar  with  its  working,  being  careful,  of 
course,  to  put  it  together  properly.  The  chain  plate  which 
drives  the  take-up  should  not  be  too  tight,  and  the  tension 
should  only  be  such  as  will  barely  take  up  the  film  clear 
through  to  the  end  of  the  run. 


FOR    MANAGERS    AND    OPERATORS 


127 


The  setting  of  the  revolving  shutter  to  eliminate  travel- 
ghost  is  accomplished  by  slipping  it  in  or  out  on  the  spindle. 
The  screw^  in  the  head  setting,  of  course,  in  the  spindle  slot. 

The  intermittent  movement  may  be  examined  at  any  time 
by  removing  the  screws  in  the  side  of  the  casing,  but,  as  I 
before  stated,  the  company  recommends  that  the  operator 
let  the  intermittent  severely  alone. 


THE    POWER'S    MACHINE. 

The  Powers  machine  is  a  finely  built  piece  bf  mech- 
anism _and  like  all  other  finely  made  machines  requires  in- 
telligent attention  and  care.  It  is,  however,  perhaps  one 
of  the  easiest  machines  there  is  to  adjust,  since  its  mechan- 
ism is  all  "in  sight."  The  Power's  No.  6  is  such  an  en- 
tirely different  form  of  construction  from  any  other  machine 
that  detailed  instruction  on  the  mechanism  is  imperative. 
Trusting  that  the  various  manufacturers  will  understand  my 
position  and  that  I  have  no  desire  other  than  to  treat  every- 
one fairly  and  impartially,  doing  even  'and  exact  justice  to  all, 
and  that  the  fact  that  I  say  more  about  one  machine  than 
another  indicates  nothing  except  that  the  writer  feels  one  to 
require  more  detailed  instruction  than  another,  I  will  proceed. 
The  New  Power's  No.  6  Model  Cameragraph  is  such  an 
absolutely  unique  departure  in  projection  apparatus  that  it 
also  must  be  dealt  with  in  detail.  This  machine  was  de- 
signed primarily  to  compete 
in  the  European  markets 
where  projection  machinery 
is  heavily  constructed.  It  is, 
therefore,  a  more  massive, 
heavily  built  machine  than 
any  other  American  built 
projection  mechanism.  In 
this  machine  the  star  and 
cam,  in  their  old,  familiar 
form,  are  dispensed  with,  the 
intermittent  movement  being 
accomplished  by  means  of  a 
heavy,  hardened  steel  star,  somewhat  in  the  form  of  a  pointed 
Maltese  cross  (Fig.  42),  and  a  circular,  flat  steel  cam-ring 
(Fig.  42)  5-i6ths  of  an  inch  thick,  with  an  outside  diameter 


Fig. 4' 


128  MOTION   PICTURE  HANDBOOK 

of  2^  inches  and  an  inside  diameter  of  i^  inches,  these 
measures  being  approximate.  This  form  of  intermittent  is 
absolutely  non-adjustable.  Do  not  attempt  to  adjust  this 
movement,  for  there  is  no  adjustment  you  can  make.  The 
casing  covering  the  intermittent  is  oil-tight  and  the  small  oil 
cup  should  receive  from  15  to  20  drops  of  oil  per  day  accord- 
ing to  length  of  day's  run.  Use  a  medium  machine  oil  if  it  is 
obtainable.  Three  In  One  oil  is  too  light  unless  mixed  with 
heavier  oil. 

T.ost  motion  occurring  in  the  intermittent  movement  of 
this  machine  does  not  affect  the  film  since  the  star  (cross) 
and  cam  revolve  in  the  same  direction,  instead  of  in  opposite 
directions,  as  is  the  case  with  the  old  style  star  and  cam. 
The  whole  intermittent  movement  may  be  removed  from  the 
machine  as  follows:  Loosen  the  set  screw  in  take-up  feed 
sprocket  and  slip  sprocket  spindle,  gear  and  belt-wheel  out 
to  left.  Loosen  brass  collar  on  inner  end  of  shaft  which 
carries  the  large  gear  which  drives  the  take-up  gear-wheel 
and  slip  gear  and  shaft  out  to  the  left.  This  will  allow  you 
to  remove  the  cover  to  the  intermittent  oil  casing,  which 
is  done  next.  Having  removed  cover,  take  out  the  large 
screw  in  center  of  fly-wheel  and  take  fly-wheel  off.  With  a 
block  of  hardwood  and  hammer  tap  end  of  shaft  lightly,  if 
necessary,  to  start  fly-wheel  off.  You  may  now  pull  the  cam 
and  shaft  out  to  the  left.  If  you  wish  to  also  remove  the 
cross  and  its  shaft,  just  take  off  aperture  plate  and  remove 
pins  which  secure  intermittent  sprocket  to  shaft.  You  can 
then  pull  cross  and  shaft  out.  With  the  latest  machines  it 
is  not  necessary  to  loosen  the  sprocket  on  its  shaft  to  re- 
move the  cross  and  shaft.  Just  loosen  the  screw  holding  left 
hand  bushing  in  place,  and  the  whole  thing,  cross,  shaft, 
bushing  and  sprocket  will  slip  out.  To  replace  just  reverse 
the  operation  described.  Should  the  intermittent  sprocket 
shaft  at  any  time  have  end  play,  loosen  the  set  screw  on  the 
front  of  the  right-hand  boxing  and  shove  the  brushing  out 
to  the  right  up  snug  against  the  washer  on  the  end  of  the 
shaft  and  tighten  up  the  set  screw. 

With  this  machine  it  is  essential  that  all  sprocket  idlers  be 
kept  away  from  the  sprockets  by  about  twice  the  thickness  of 
an  ordinary  film.  This  is  essential  with  any  machine,  but 
especially  so  with  the  Power's  No.  6.     Set  screws  and  lock- 


FOR    MANAGERS    AND    OPERATORS  129 

nuts  are  provided  for  the  purpose.  The  frame-up  carriage 
is  made  to  work  easy  or  hard  by  tightening  or  loosening  the 
wing-nut  on  side  of  frame-up  lever  bearing.  It  is  absolutely 
necessary  that  the  shutter  be  placed  as  close  to  the  lens  as 
possible.  Setting  it  any  distance  from  the  lens  will  have  a 
tendency  to  cause  a  travel-ghost.  To  set  the  shutter,  loosen 
the  two  screws  in  outside  shutter-hub  (the  hub  is  in  two 
pieces)  just  enough  so  that  you  can  slip  the  shutter  around 
by  using  some  slight  pressure.  Turn  the  machine  by  its  fly- 
wheel until  the  intermittent  sprocket  has  completed  its 
movement  and  just  barely  come  to  rest.  Now  hold  the  fly- 
wheel perfectly  stationary  while  you  slip  the  shutter  in  the 
direction  it  normally  runs  until  the  wide  blade  (the  one  with 
stamp  on  it)  covers  just  a  trifle  more  than  half  the  lens. 
Now  put  in  a  film  and  set  the  framer  just  so  that  the  bottom 
dividing  line  of  the  pictures  shows.  If  it  looks  black,  without 
any  flashes  of  light  across  it,  move  framer  until  top  dividing 
line  is  in  view  (running  the  film  meanwhile,  of  course),  and 
if  that  also  shows  clear  black  without  light  flashes  across  it 
the  shutter  is  right.  If  there  are  flashes  of  light  on  either 
dividing  line  slip  the  shutter  a  little  until  both  dividing  lines, 
above  and  below,  show  the  same.  Then  tighten  the  screws 
in  hub  and  you  are  done.  Be  very  sure  that  the  shutter 
shaft  is  always  clear  up  as  far  as  it  will  go.  Should  the 
screws  loosen  and  let  it  drop  a  trifle  it  would  have  the  effect 
of  throwing  the  shutter  out  of  time.  This  shaft  is  held  by  two 
screws,  one  over  and  one  under  the  shaft.  Set  them  both  up 
tight.  Keep  the  collars  which  hold  the  shutter  shaft  end- 
wise set  up  pretty  close  to  the  boxing,  as  the  shaft  should 
have  as  little  end  play  as  possible  without  binding.  By 
means  of  the  loose  ring,  held  in  place  by  three  large  thumb- 
screws the  projection  lens  may  be  turned  until  its  handle 
comes  into  convenient  position  for  manipulation.  To  thread 
the  No.  6  bring  the  film  down  from  magazine,  under  roller, 
up  over  sprocket  and  under  idler,  thence  down  through  gate, 
intermittent,  and  take  up  sprockets  and  into  lower  magazine 
in  the  usual  manner,  leaving  a  rather  long  lower  loop  between 
intermittent  and  take-up  sprockets.  The  upper  loop  bulges 
straight  out  in  front.  Other  points  concerning  this  mech- 
anism seem  too  simple  to  require  special  mention. 


i30  MOTION   PICTURE   HANDBOOK 

THE   STANDARD    MOVING   PICTURE   MACHINE. 

The  Standard  Moving  Picture  Machine  presents  several 
features  peculiarly  its  own.  It,  therefore,  also  must  be 
treated  in  detail.  Should  lost  motion  develop  between  the 
star  and  cam  it  may  be  easily  eliminated  by  loosening  the 
four  screws  holding  the  steel  bar  which  compresses  the 
bronze  bushings  carrying  the  intermittent  shaft  at  either  end. 
In  the  left  hand  end  of  each  one  of  these  bushings  will  be 
seen  a  small  hole;  insert  the  end  of  a  small  nail  in  these 
holes  and  turn  the  bushing  slightly  upward  until  all  the  lost 
motion,  or  jjractically  all  of  it,  has  been  eliminated  and  the 
intermittent  sprocket  feels  tight.  Be  careful  and  turn  each 
one  of  these  bushings  the  same  amount,  else  you  will  get 
the  intermittent  out  of  alignment  with  the  cam  shaft  pro- 
ducing a  condition  described  and  illustrated  on  page  io8. 
This  condition  must  be  carefully  avoided  since,  not  only 
will  it  injure  the  star  and  cam,  wearing  their  surface  on  a 
bevel,  but  it  will  also  cause  the  film  to  bear  only  on  one 
side  of  the  intermittent  sprocket,  thus  producing  injury  to 
the  film  and  causing  a  bad  performance. 

In  adjusting  your  intermittent  sprocket  be  very  careful 
that  the  spurs  of  your  sprocket  are  in  line  with  the  film 
tracks  of  the  aperture  when  you  get  through.  This  is  very 
essential  as  you  will  see  by  careful  examination.  The  film 
runs  down  between  two  solid  guides  on  either  side  and  if 
the  spurs  of  the  sprocket  set  a  little  over  to  one  side  bad 
injury  to  the  film  will  inevitably  result.  Be  very  careful  on 
this  particular  point. 

To  remove  the  intermittent  sprocket  shaft  and  star  for 
repairs  or  renewal,  proceed  as  follows:  Take  the  machine 
head  ofif  its  base,  first,  of  course,  removing  the  magazines 
and  lenses.  Lay  the  head  down  on  a  bench  with  the  film 
gate  up.  The  gate  will  be  in  the  way,  we  will  therefore 
remove  it.  As  will  be  seen,  it  is  held  in  place  by  a  shaft 
at  the  bottom.  This  shaft  in  turn  is  held  in  place  by  a 
set  screw  in  the  bottom,  of  the  casting.  Loosen  this  screw, 
which  is  not  countersunk  in  the  shaft,  and  drive  the  shaft 
out  to  the  right.  In  driving  out  a  shaft  always  use  a  brass 
punch  or  piece  of  hard  wood,  never  use  a  hard  steel  punch. 
Next,  turn  the  machine  over  with  the  lens  side  up  and 
remove  the  front  plate.  Again  reverse  the  position  of  the 
machine  with  the  gate  side  up  and  remove  the  lower  sprocket 
and  shaft  by  driving  out  the  taper  pins  in  the  sprocket  and 


FOR    MANAGERS    AND    OPERATORS  131 

in  the  hub  of  the  small  gear  wheel.  The  shaft  will  then 
slip  out  to  the  left,  releasing  the  gear  and  sprocket,  together 
with  the  brass  chute  through  which  the  film  passes  to  the 
lower  magazine.  Next  remove  the  film  slide.  The  film  slide 
is  the  plate  covering  the  gate  side  of  the  machine  and  ex- 
tending down  between  the  flanges  of  the  intermittent  sprocket 
into  and  through  the  lower  film  loop  recess.  This  plate  is 
removed  by  taking  out  one  screw  at  its  lower  end  iriime- 
diately  behind  where  the  lower  sprocket  was;  one  flat  head 
screw  on  either  side  just  above  the  steel  bars  holding  the 
intermittent  bearings,  and  the  two  gate  latch  screws.  Next 
unscrew  the  two  steel  caps  which  hold  the  bronze  boxes  of 
the  intermittent  shaft  and  the  star  wheel  and  its  shaft  may 
be  lifted  out. 

When  replacing  the  intermittent  sprocket,  star  and  shaft 
be  sure  that  both  bronze  bushings  or  bearings  are  in  line, 
that  is  to  say,  be  sure  that  both  these  bushings  set  precisely 
the  same  so  that  the  shaft  is  held  exactly  parallel  with  the 
cam  shaft.  This,  as  has  been  before  explained,  and  is  fur- 
ther explained  and  illustrated  on  page  io8,  is  of  the  utmost 
importance.  Other  than  this  the  replacing  of  the  star  shaft 
is  merely  a  reversal  of  the  process  of  its  removal,  except 
that  when  screwing  on  the  cap  nearest  the  star  wheel  be 
sure  to  tighten  the  upper  screw  as  tight  as  possible  first; 
then  the  other  three  screws  may  be  tightened  a  little  at  a 
time.  Also  be  careful,  as  has  been  before  noted,  that  the 
intermittent  sprocket  is  in  exact  line  with  the  aperture  plate 
film  track. 

To  install  a  new  revolving  shutter  you  must  take  j'our 
machine  apart  just  as  has  been  already  described  for  the 
removal  of  the  star  shaft.  You  must  also  remove  the  middle 
shaft,  that  is  to  say.  the  large  shaft  immediately  behind  the 
intermittent  shaft.  This  is  done  by  removing  the  taper  pins 
in  the  hubs  of  the  three  gears  it  carries  and  driving  the  shaft 
out.  The  first  thing  is,  set  the  framing  device  exactly  half 
way  of  its  travel,  or  so  that  the  handle  is  parallel  with  the 
base  of  the  machine.  Next  see  that  your  aperture  plate  is 
screwed  on  in  its  place.  Then  the  center  of  the  cam  pin 
which  drives  the  star  wheel  must  be  set  in  the  center  of  the 
intermittent  sprocket  bearing.  Then  set  your  shutter  so  that 
the  center  of  the  shutter  is  in  line  with  the  center  of  your 
aperture  plate.  When  a  new  shutter  is  sent  out  it  is  set 
and  pinned  on  the  shaft  so  that  it  will  be  in  correct  position 
when  installed  in  the  machine,  but  you  must  experiment  by 


132  MOTION   PICTURE  HANDBOOK 

moving  it  forward  or  back,  changing  the  relation  of  the 
teeth  of  the  large  and  small  gears  which  drive  the  shutter, 
until  it  is  in  position  as  above  set  forth.  The  tension  is 
supplied  by  a  double  shoe  having  a  track  on  either  side, 
held  in  place  in  the  aperture  opening  of  the  gate  by  two 
flat  springs.  Should  the  tension  become  weak  you  may 
reach  in  at  the  top  of  the  aperture  and  slip  this  shoe  out, 
that  is  to  say,  just  pull  the  shoe  out  over  the  springs.  Bend 
the  springs  inward  and  replace  the  shoe,  or,  should  the  ten- 
sion be  too  tight,  it  may  be  weakened  by  bending  the  two 
springs  backward. 

Bearing  on  either  side  of  the  intermittent  sprocket  is  a 
split  steel  shoe  which  should  be  set  about  twice  the  thick- 
ness of  a  film  away  from  the  sprocket  by  means  of  the  two 
set  screws  provided  for  the  purpose,  located  immediately 
under  the  shoe.  Having  set  this  just  right,  set  up  the  lock 
nut  on  the  set  screws  very  tight  with  a  pair  of  pliers.  To 
remove  this  steel  shoe  or  intermittent  tension  guide  remove 
the  screws  holding  the  flat  tension  springs  on  the  face  of 
the  gate.  Also  the  central  flat  spring  near  the  two  small 
set  screws  at  the  bottom  of  the  shoe.  Having  done  this 
the  shoe  will  readily  slip  out. 

The  take-up  on  the  lower  magazine  is  adjusted  by  a  milled 
thumb  screw  on  the  end  of  its  spindle,  which  acts  on  a 
spiral  spring.  This  thumb  screw  is  locked  in  place  by  a 
flat  head  screw  in  its  face;  loosen  this  screw  and  the  thumb 
screw  may  readily  be  turned.  Tightening  the  spiral  spring 
with  the  thumb  screw  of  course  increases  the  tension,  while 
loosening  it  lessens  the  same.  The  chain  belts  should  not 
be  kept  tight,  neither  should  they  be  very  loose,  but  they 
should  be  lubricated,  preferably  with  a  compound  of  vaseline 
and  graphite,  though  any  good  lubricating  oil  will  do.  In 
the  hub  carrying  the  upper  sprocket  wheel  of  the  magazine 
will  be  seen  a  milled  thumb  screw  on  the  end  of  a  shaft 
working  in  an  upright  slot.  This  arrangement  is  for  the 
purpose  of  tightening  the  magazine  chain  belt.  To  tighten 
the  other  chain  belt,  that  is  to  say,  the  one  connecting  the 
magazine  with  the  machine,  loosen  the  screw  at  the  bottom 
of  the  upright  casting  carrying  the  two  magazine  chain 
sprockets  and  swing  the  whole  arm  ahead  or  back  according 
to  whether  you  wish  to  loosen  or  tighten  the  chain. 

The  machine  should  be  oiled  with  a  good  grade  of  oil,  not 
too  heavy,  but  of  good  body.     The  oil  hole  for  the  shutter 


FOR    MANAGERS    AND    OPERATORS  133 

gears  will  be  found  right  beside  the  lower  left  hand  corner 
of  the  aperture  opening,  with  the  word  "OIL"  over  it. 

To  thread  the  machine,  bring  the  film  down  out  of  the 
upper  magazine  through  the  fire  trap,  under  the  top  sprocket, 
and  close  its  idler,  the  handle  of  which  is  on  the  left  side  of 
the  machine.  Now  bring  the  end  of  your  film  down  and 
slip  it  through  the  brass  chute  and  into  the  lower  magazine, 
attaching  it  to  the  reel.  Now  bring  the  film  down  over  the 
aperture  and  engage  the  perforations  with  the  teeth  of  the 
intermittent  sprocket,  leaving  sufficient  slack  for  the  upper 
loop.  The  top  loop  should  not  be  long  enough  so  that  it 
will  strike  the  top  of  the  machine,  else  the  film  will  be 
liable  to  injury  through  scratching.  Form  the  lower  loop 
in  the  recess  of  the  machine  as  large  as  possible,  engage 
the  perforations  with  the  lower  sprocket  and  close  the  gate, 
all  the  time,  of  course,  holding  the  film  up  tight  over  the 
aperture  while  you  form  the  lower  loop  with  your  left  hand. 
Now  revolve  the  lower  reel  until  all  slack  is  taken  up  and 
the  operation  is  complete. 

The  motor  of  this  machine  is  a  self  oiler.  Do  not  imagine 
from  this,  however,  that  it  will  run  for  six  months  without 
oil.  At  least  twice  a  week  take  off  the  oil  cups,  empty  them, 
and  fill  with  fresh  oil,  and  occasionally  put  in  a  new  feeding 
wick. 


In  the  foregoing  descriptions  of  the  various  machines, 
it  would  require  a  vast  amount  of  extra  space  to  illustrate 
all  the  parts  of  the  different  mechanisms  in  full.  The  manu- 
facturers of  any  of  these  machines  will  be  pleased  to  amplify 
tlie  descriptions  given  herein  by  sending,  upon  request,  their 
own  illustrated  catalogues  and  charts  showing  all  the  parts, 
both  separate  and  assembled.  For  addresses  of  the  several 
makers,  see  advertising  pages  at  the  end  of  this  book. 


134  MOTION   PICTURE  HANDBOOK 


Miscellaneous. 


THE    STEREOPTICON. 

Song  slides  should  be  thoroughly  cleaned  before  they  are 
used.  The  mark  of  a  dirty  finger  is  not  at  all  decorative. 
The  audience  is  not  at  all  interested  in  the  "whorls"  of 
your  fingers.  In  using  a  single  lamp  it  is  essential  that  you 
handle  the  carrier  gently  when  taking  out  and  putting  in 
slides.  Shomehow  a  brick  house  don't  look  exactly  natural 
dancing  up  and  down,  or  at  least  I  never  thought  it  did. 
The  least  movement  of  the  carrier  is  magnified  many  times 
on  the  curtain.  The  stereo  picture  should  be  brilliant  and 
should  be  clear  all  over.  Many  operators  persistently  allow 
Iheir  stereo  pictures  to  have  yellow  corners.  With  a  very 
long  focus  lens,  or  one  of  too  small  diameter,  this  is  not 
always  to  be  avoided.  But  aside  from  these  circumstances 
there  is  no  excuse  for  such  a  condition.  An  excellent  colored 
flood  to  be  used  with  the  stereo  may  be  made  as  follows: 
Take  an  old  reel  and  remove  the  hub.  Next  drill  three 
small  holes  equidistant  from  each  other  around  the  circum- 
ference of  the  two  reel  sides,  making  the  holes  match  so 
that  the  two  sides  may  be  bolted  together.  Next  cover  all 
the  holes  but  one  in  one  of  the  sides  with  colored  gelatin 
paper.  Lay  the  other  side  on  and  clamp  the  two  together 
with  small  stove-bolts.  Now  affix  the  hub  to  one  side  and 
attach  the  whole  to  a  suitable  standard  so  that  it  will  re- 
volve freely  before,  and  close  to,  the  stereo  projection  lens. 
One  hole  must  be  left  open  so  that  when  it  is  before  the 
lens  the  picture  can  be  projected  through  or  white  light 
may  be  thrown.  Another  wheel  like  the  one  just  described 
may  be  added,  thus  giving  a  considerable  range  of  colors. 
Every  operator  should  provide  himself  with  plenty  of  spot 
slides  made  from  ordinary  tin  or  stovepipe  metal.  The 
easiest  way  to  cut  them  out  is  to  cut  the  spot  pattern  from 
paper  and  paste  it  on  the  metal.  You  can  then  cut  out  the 
pattern  with  a  file  accurately.     Glass  slides  are  not  good  for 


FOR    MANAGERS    AND    OPERATORS  135 

spots,    since    remaining   so   long   in   the   heat    quickly   breaks 
l^hem.  ^ 

The  operator  who  has  a  dissolver  may  work  out  some 
very  pretty  spotlight  effects  by  having  a  supply  of  various 
shapes  and  dissolving  one  into  the  other.  He  may  also 
select  certain  blocked  out  flower  song  slides  and  by  remov- 
ing the  emulsion  for  a  spot  produce  nice  effects,  particularly 
on  a  singer.  The  man  who  has  both  a  dissolver  and  spot- 
light may  make  some  splendid  effects  by  use  of  the  colored 
flood  before  described  in  conjunction  with  the  spot;  also  he 
may,  in  conjunction  with  the  spot,  produce  some  new  and 
beautiful  effects  on  certain  vaudeville  turns  by  using  the 
spot  small  and  with  the  dissolver  at  the  same  time  throwing 
on  slides  of  ground,  moss  and  other  glasses.  By  slow  dis- 
solving with  some  carefully  selected  glasses,  using  the  small 
spot  at  the  same  time,  some  very  beautiful  effects  are 
produced. 

SLIDE    CARRIERS. 

There  are  several  forms  of  slide  carriers  on  the  market,  the 
one  most  in  use  being  the  old-style  wooden  carrier  with  two 
sides,  or  slide  compartments.  This  form  of  carrier  is  now 
made  in  metal,  but  it  is  objectionable  from  the  fact  that  it 
gets  very  hot  and  is  then  difficult  to  handle.  Little  need  be 
said  concerning  this  carrier  except  that  a  small  handle  should 
be  screwed  on  the  end  next  the  operator  so  that  it  can  be 
pulled  towards  one,  instead  of  having  to  reach  over  and 
shove  it  from  the  further  end.  No  matter  what  kind  of 
carrier  you  are  using,  there  should  be  a  permanent  metal 
mat  attached  to  the  stationary  part,  the  mat  being  made  of 
size  to  just  fit  the  stage.     You  can  then  throw  a  flood  light 


Fig.  34. 

without    plastering    the    whole    front    wall    with    light,    and 
when,  as  sometimes  happens  with  certain  skirt-dance  slides, 


136 


MOTION   PICTURE   HANDBOOK 


there  is  no  mat  on  a  slide,  it  fits  the  stage  or  curtain,  anyhow. 
For  running  song  slides  with  a  single  lamp  the  "Ingento" 
dissolving  carrier  (Fig.  34),  made  by  Messrs.  Burke  &  James, 
Chicago,  is  the  best  article  the  writer  has  seen  to  date.  It 
does  not  dissolve,  for  that  is  an  impossibility  with  a  single 
lamp,  but  the  effict,  when  the  carrier  is  properly  handled, 
is  the  best  the  writer  has  seen.  It  is  not  the  purpose  of 
these  articles  to  advertise  anyone's  goods,  but  in  some  cases 
the  purpose  of  the  series  cannot  be  served  without  naming 
specific  articles.  A  very  good  effect  is  had,  also,  by  taking 
a  piece  of  light  green  Venetian  glass,  cut  in  convenient  form, 
and  passing  it  slowly  in  front  of  the  projection  lens,  mean- 
while moving  the  carrier.  Properly  done,  the  efifect  is  really 
very  nice. 


Fig.  35- 


Further  back  I  named  the  Bell  wire  terminal  as  ex- 
cellent for  cable  ends.  Since  then  samples  have  been  sent 
me  of  a  terminal  (Fig.  35)  made  by  the  Robert  Webb  Elec- 
tric Co.,  Pittsburg,  Pa.,  which  is  perhaps  the  most  substan- 
tial of  anything  on  the  market.  They  are  made  for  different 
sized  wires  and  appear  to  be  an  excellent  article. 

Where  the  machine  has  not  an  automatic  shutter  there 
should  be  a  foot  shutter.  In  fact,  there  should  be  one  any- 
how, since  the  automatic  may  go  back  on  you,  and  if  there 
is  a  foot  shutter  ready  to  connect  up  instantly,  you  will 
experience  slight  inconvenience  and  delay. 

Fig.  36  shows  plainly  how  to  make  a  quick-acting,  service- 
able foot  shutter.  The  plan,  so  often  followed,  of  attaching 
a  tiny  little  foot  pedal  to  the  floor,  is  very  bad,  since  it 
compels  the  operator  to  sit  in  a  cramped  position.  The 
writer   uses  a   long  bar  made   from   one-inch   wood,   set   on 


FOR    MANAGERS    AND    OPERATORS 


137 


edge  about  eight  inches  from  the  floor.  This  allows  of 
placing  the  foot  in  several  positions,  which  is  a  decided 
relief,  especially  on  an  all-day's  grind.  This  pedal  should  be 
placed  about  directly  under  the  edge  of  the  machine  table 
and  its  height  from  the  floor  should  be  according  to  the 
height  the  machine  sets.  With  the  machine  3  feet  6  inches 
from  table  to  floor,  the  top  of  the  pedal  should  be  8  inches 
from  the  floor  when  the  shutter  is  down.  If  a  film  tank  is 
used  in  place  of  a  take-up,  it  will  be  necessary  to  attach  a 
flat  strip  to  top  of  pedal  or  else  set  the  pedal  itself  flatwise. 
The  back  end  is  attached  by  a  screw  or  bolt  to  something 
substantial  and  the  front  end  should  slide  up  and  down  in 
a  block  like  A   (Fig.  36),  attached  to  the   front  wall.     The 


nasi 


bottom  of  the  slot  in  the  block  should  be  so  that  the  pedal 
will  just  strike  it  when  the  shutter  is  wide  open,  thus  reliev- 
ing the  strain  on  the  shutter  and  chain.  The  shutter  should 
be  attached  to  the  pedal  by  a  brass  chain  such  as  is  used  on 
the  flush  tanks  of  toilet  rooms.  A  shutter  made  as  directed 
will  work,  and  work  right,  but  it  will  have  to  be  modified 
when  there  is  a  film  tank  in  place  of  a  take-up.  It  will  snap 
shut  the  instant  the  foot  is  removed.  Right  here  is  an  ex- 
cellent illustration  of  the  slovenly  methods  employed  in  very 


138  MOTION    PICTURE   HANDBOOK 

many  operating  rooms.  The  average  foot  shutter  you  will  find 
attached  to  the  shutter  by  a  scrap  of  wire — often  two  or 
three  pieces  of  wire  patched  together.  The  pedal  will  be  a 
little  piece  of  board  about  4  by  8  inches,  attached  to  the 
floor  by  a  strap  hinge,  which,  in  nine  cases  out  of  ten,  is 
partly  or  wholly  loose.  Do  things  right,  or  get  out  and  give 
someone  the  job  who  will!  One  of  the  Jirst  things  my  father 
taught  me  was  "if  a  thing  is  worth  doing  at  all,  it  is  worth 
doing  well." 

The  longer  I  live,  the  more  firmly  I  am  convinced  that 
the  old  gentleman  was  absolutely  right.  The  "Oh,  that's 
good  enough!"  workman  is  a  miserable  failure  at  any- 
thing he  undertakes.  The  "Oh-that's-good-enough-I'll-do- 
just-as-little-as-I-can-and-keep-on-the-payroll"  man  is  not  an 
operator,  or  much  of  anything  else,  for  that  matter,  no  mat- 
ter how  much  he  may  know.  In  fact,  it  is  not  what  you 
know  that  counts,  but  what  application  you  make  of  your 
knowledge.  To  be  a  real  operator  you  must  not  only  know, 
but  you  must  also  do.  Wages  are  too  low,  I  am  well  aware, 
but  when  the  writer  gets  to  the  point  where  he  doesn't  feel 
ambitious  enough  to  do  his  work  right,  owing  to  low  wages 
or  anything  else,  he  will  quit,  and  he  will  do  it  very  suddenly, 
too.  There  is  absolutely  no  excuse  under  the  heavens  for 
doing  things  any  other  way  than  right. 

THE    ELECTRIC    METER. 

The  meter  is  a  very  simple  affair,  consisting  of  a  small 
motor  which  actuates  the  pointers  to  the  dail  by  means  of 
a  train  of  gears.  This  motor  is  placed  in  the  series  with 
the  lamps  or  motors  using  the  current  passing  through  it. 
The  motor  is  so  constructed  that  if  it  were  operating  under 
a  pressure  of  one  volt,  with  one  ampere  of  current  flowing, 
it  would  require,  under  those  conditions,  precisely  one  hour 
to  record  one  Watt,  which  would,  therefore,  be  one  Watt 
hour.  It,  therefore,  follows,  that  if  it  were  working  under 
a  pressure  of  no  volts  with  one  ampere  of  current  flowing, 
the  Watts  being  the  product  of  the  volts  times  the  amperes, 
the  instrument  would  record  no  Watts  in  one  hour;  or  if 
the  pressure  be  one  volt  with  no  amperes  flowing,  the  rec- 
ord for  one  hour  would  be  no  Watts.  If,  on  the  other  hand, 
30  amperes  were  flowing  under  a  pressure  of  no  volts,  then 


FOR    MANAGERS    AND    OPERATORS 


135 


in  cne  hour's  time  the  meter  would  register  30  times  no,  or 
3,300  Watts.  That,  in  brief,  is  the  way  the  meter  works 
and    records   Watt,    or    killowatt,   hours. 

The   reading  of   meters   is   equally  as   simple   as   their   op- 


Mechanism  of  Recording  Watt  Meter, 
eration,  and  any  customer  can  read  his  own  meter  if  he  so 
desires,  by  following  a  few  simple  directions  which  we 
give  for  the  benefit  of  interested  persons.  Electricity  is 
measured  by  the  kilowatt  hour  or  by  the  watt  hour,  one 
kilowatt  being  equivalent  to   1,000  watts. 


140  MOTION   PICTURE  HANDBOOK 

When  attempting  to  read  a  meter,  first  note  carefully  the 
unit  in  which  the  dials  read.  On  all  meters  used  by  the  Edi- 
son Company,  the  figures  above  or  below  the  dial  indicate 
the  value  of  one  complete  revolution  of  the  pointer,  there- 
fore one  division  indicates  one-tenth  of  the  amount  marked 
above  or  below. 

Note  the  direction  of  rotation  of  the  dial  pointers.  Count- 
ing from  the  right  on  a  watt  meter,  the  pointers  of  the  first, 
third  and  fifth  dials  rotate  in  the  direction  of  the  hands  of 
a  watch,  whereas  the  pointers  of  the  second  and  fourth  dials 
move  in  the  opposite  direction.  Similarly,  on  a  kilowatt 
hour  meter  the  pointers  of  the  first  and  third  dials  move 
in  the  direction  of  the  hands  of  a  watch,  and  the  pointers 
of  the  second  and  fourth  dials  move  in  an  opposite  direction. 
The  dials  must  always  be  read  from  right  to  left,  and  the 
figures  should  be  set  down  as  read.  Always  read  the  fig- 
ures on  each  dial  which  the  pointer  has  last  passed  or  has 
just  covered. 

Each  dial  reading  depends  on  the  reading  of  the  one  next 
to  it  on  the  right.  Unless  the  one  before  it  has  completed  a 
revolution  or  passed  the  o,  the  pointer  which  is  being  read 
has  not  completed  the  division  on  which  it  may  appear  to 
rest,  and  still  indicates  the  last  figure  passed  over. 

Always  ascertain  if  the  register  is  direct  reading,  that  is, 
has  no  multiplying  constants.  Some  registers  are  not  di- 
rect reading  but  require  that  the  dial  reading  be  multiplied 
by  a  constant  in  order  to  obtain  the  true  reading.  This  is 
for  the  purpose  of  keeping  meters  of  various  capacities  uni- 
form in  size.  If  the  constant  were  not  used,  meters  of  larger 
capacity  would  be  much  larger  and  heavier  than  those  of 
small  capacity.  If  the  register  face  bears  the  words  "multi- 
ply by  Yz"  or  "multiply  by  2,"  etc.,  the  actual  reading  should 
be  multiplied  by  J^  in  the  first  case,  or  doubled  in  the  second, 
and  similarly  for  other  constants. 

Next  multiply  the  difference  between  the  present  reading 
and  that  of  the  last  month  by  the  rate  per  kilowatt  hour  you 
are  paying,  and  you  have  the  amount  of  your  bill  in  dollars 
and  cents. 

The  accompanying  fac  similies  of  meter  dials  give  ex- 
amples of  meter  readings  which  may  actually  occur  in  prac- 
tice.    For  example,  in  No.  2,  the  dial  at   the  extreme  right 


FOR    MANAGERS    AND    OPERATORS 


141 


reads  900.  The  second  apparently  indicates  o;  but  since  the 
first  has  not  completed  its  revolution,  but  indicates  only  9, 
the  second  cannot  have  completed  its  division,  hence  the 
second  dial  indicates  9  also.  The  same  is  true  of  the  hand 
of  the  third  dial;  the  second  being  9,  has  not  quite  completed 
its  revolution,  so  that  the  third  has  not  completed  its  division, 
therefore  we  again  have  9.    The  same  holds  true  of  the  hand 


1.000.000  100.000 
f2  isk  aVe 


.6  s  4y  \.4  5  6^ 

KILOWATT  HOURS 


No.  3. 


looaooo  100.000 


10,000 


WATT  HOURS 


Facsimiles  of  Meter  Dials. 

of  the  fourth  dial.  The  last  hand  (the  extreme  left)  appears 
to  rest  on  i;  but  since  the  fourth  is  only  9,  the  last  has  not 
completed  its  division,  and  therefore  indicates  o. 

Putting  the  figures  down  from  right  to  left,  the  total  read- 
ing is  999,900.  By  similar  reasoning  the  value  of  other  indi- 
cations may  be  obtained. 


142  MOTION    PICTURE  HANDBOOK 


General  House  Equipment. 


THE   CURTAIN. 


The  writer  has  viewed  many  different  kinds  of  curtain 
and  curtains  covered  with  several  kinds  of  patent  coatings, 
but  to  date  has  seen  nothing  he  thought  was  better,  all 
things  considered,  than  plain,  white  plaster.  Such  a  curtain 
may  be  readily  cleaned  by  sandpapering  lightly  with  No.  o 
or  y2  sandpaper.  Sheet  metal  may  be  used  by  nailing  the 
joints  down  level  and  tight  and  covering  them  with  a  thin 
putty  made  from  Spanish  whiting  and  white  lead  in  about 
equal  proportions,  thinned  with  boiled  linseed  oil  to  proper 
consistency.  This  putty  should  be  smeared  on  with  the 
fingers  and  carefully  wiped  until  the  nilheads  and  joint  is 
covered  and  leveled  up  as  much  as  possible.  Coat  the 
whole  curtain  with  white  lead  mixed  with  about  one-third 
boiled  linseed  oil  and  two-thirds  turpentine,  adding  a  little 
ultramarine  blue  (ground  in  oil)  to  the  paint  to  whiten  it. 
White  calcimine  may  also  be  used  with  good  effect,  but  it 
is  likely  to  peel  on  metal.  A  little  blue  should  be  added 
to  it  as  well  as  to  paint.  If  the  latter  is  used  on  metal  be 
sure  there  is  no  grease  or  oil  on  the  metal.  If  there  is, 
remove  it  with  soap  and  water.  Use  two  or  three  coats 
of  thin   calcimine   or   paint    rather   than   one   heavy   one. 

Ordinary  bleached  bed  sheeting  of  good  quality  makes  the 
best  cloth  curtain  and  it  may  be  readily  laundried.  It  may  be 
had,  if  I  rightly  remember,  eight  feet  wide. 

If  cloth  is  used  stretch  it  perfectly  tight  so  that  there 
will  be  no  wrinkles.  The  curtain  should  set  as  nearly  as 
possible  square  with  the  machine — or,  rather,  the  machine 
should  set  square  with  the  curtain.  It  will  be  found  that 
much  brilliancy  will  be  added  to  the  picture  by  painting  all 
the  curtain  except  the  space  actually  occupied  by  the  picture 
a  dead  black  made  by  mixing  dry  lampblack  with  boiled 
linseed  oil  and  turpentine,  in  proportions  of  one-third  and 
two-thirds.     The  objection  to  this  is  that  the  stereo  picture 


FOR    MANAGERS    AND    OPERATORS  143 

is  not  the  same  size  or  shape  as  the  moving  picture,  so  that 
where  both  are  used  it  is  impossible  thus  to  outline.  A  neat, 
heavy  moulding  around  the  curtain  adds  very  much  to  the 
effect,  but  better  yet  is  a  "flare"  from  eighteen  inches  to 
two  feet  in  depth  such  as  one  sees  in  the  proscenium  arch 
of  a  theater.  The  curtain  should  be  of  size  to  accommodate 
a  picture  in  which  the  figures  will  be  at  least  life  size.  Nine 
by  twelve  will  do  nicely  for  a  small  house,  but  for  a  house 
of  ample  dimensions  the  picture  should  be  at  least  fifteen 
feet  in  width.  It  must  be  remembered,  however,  that  every 
foot  added  to  the  picture  size  adds  enormously  to  the  nec- 
essary light  intensity  to  produce  equal  brilliancy.  A  certain 
amount  of  light  is  projected  to  the  curtain  and  is  diffused 
over  a  given  area,  depending  on  the  size  of  the  picture.  The 
9x12  picture  covers  108  square  feet,  while  the  15x18  occu- 
pies 270  feet  of  curtain  space — considerably  more  than  twice 
as  much.  The  writer  has  often  been  amused  to  hear  oper- 
ators discussing  the  matter  of  current  and  asserting  that 
they  never  use  more  than  twenty-five  amperes,  or  thirty-five 
amperes,  or  whatever  the  individual's  preference  happened 
to  be.  Let  me  say  right  now  that  such  talk  is  foolish.  The 
light  intensity,  within  certain  limits,  is  governed  (not  alto- 
gether, but  largely)  by  the  amperage  and  the  light  intensity 
necessary  to  produce  a  given  result  will  depend  almost 
altogether  on  the  size  of  the  picture  projected.  In  planning 
your  house  this  matter  should  be  given  due  consideration. 
Better  have  a  good  small  picture  than  a  large  one  bad.  The 
writer  is  using  forty-five  amperes  of  direct  current  at  the 
present  time,  but  he  throws  a  fifteen-foot  picture  in  a  house 
where  there  is  lots  of  light,  part  of  it  being  daylight  which 
strikes  the  curtain  badly  in  the  forenoon.  Under  different 
conditions  he  could  get  better  results  with  one-third  less 
current. 

EFFECT    OF   DAYLIGHT    AND    HOUSE    LIGHTS    ON 
THE  PICTURE. 

Every  particle  of  light,  especially  daylight,  which  strikes 
the  curtain  directly  dims  the  brilliancy  of  the  picture,  but 
if  the  light  rays  be  shaded  from  the  curtain  so  that  they 
do  not  strike  it  directly  it  is  astonishing  how  light  the  room 
may  be  without  causing  material   damage.     This  matter  of 


144  MOTION    PICTURE  HANDBOOK 

lighting  the  auditorium  while  the  picture  is  on  involves  sev- 
eral problems.  The  direct  w^hitc  rays  must  not  strike  the 
curtain,  neither  must  they  strike  the  eyes  of  the  audience 
from  the  front.  The  best  plan  the  writer  has  seen,  taking 
everything  into  consideration,  where  the  ceiling  is  of  mod- 
erate height  is  to  use  ceiling  lights  for  this  purpose,  shading 
the  rays  downward  by  means  of  a  metal  cone  shade.  Light 
green  globes  make  a  very  pretty  effect  and  do  not  seem  to 
seriously  aflfect  the  picture  unless  placed  too  close  to  it. 
They  give  oflf  considerable  illumination.  Care  should  be 
taken  that  the  piano  lamp  rays  do  not  strike  the  curtain, 
either  directly  or  by  rays  reflected  from  the  music.  It  is, 
of  course,  desirable  to  have  the  auditorium  as  light  as  pos- 
sible without  damaging  the  picture.  Any  method  which  will 
not  allow  the  direct  light  rays  to  strike  the  curtain  or  the 
eyes  of  the  audience  will  serve.  By  "striking  the  eyes  of 
the  audience,"  I  of  course  mean  in  such  manner  as  to 
blind  them  with  the  glare  as  they  look  forward  toward  the 
picture.  Guard  these  two  points  carefully  and  you  will  be 
the  gainer. 

ILLUMINATING  THE  AUDITORIUM. 

The  placing  of  lights,  aside  from  those  to  be  burned 
during  the  time  the  picture  is  on,  is  a  matter  which  must 
be  governed  entirely  by  the  size,  shape  and  height  of  the 
room  and  the  color  of  the  walls  and  decorations.  As  a 
guide  in  this  matter  it  may  be  said  that  dark  walls  will 
reflect  only  about  20  per  cent,  of  the  light,  whereas  a 
clean,  white  surface  reflects  fully  80  per  cent.,  with  vary- 
ing percentages  for  shades  between.  Added  height  of  ceil- 
ing also  operates  to  reduce  a  given  light  intensity.  The 
following  table  give  the  approximate  general  effect  produced 
by  different  numbers  of  sixteen  candle-power  lamps  placed 
in  a  room  of  medium  height  with  walls  of  medium  shade: 

No.  lamps  per  100  sq.ft.  of  floor  surface.        Approximate  eflFect. 

i.o  Dull 

1.5  Medium 

2.0  Good 

3.0  Bright 

4.0  Brilliant 


FOR    MANAGERS    AND    OPERATORS  143 

In  general  it  does  not  pay  to  be  stingy  with  light  in  a 
theater.  Between  shows  the  auditorium  should  be  well 
lighted,  otherwise  it  is,  if  not  depressing,  at  least  not  cal- 
culated to  produce  the  best  impression  on  the  audience. 
Moreover,  lack  of  plenty  of  light  looks  cheap  and  is  an 
error  from  any  and  every  point  of  view.  In  general  it  may 
be  said  that  the  bulk  of  the  light  should  be  on  the  ceiling. 
Placing  a  lot  of  lights  around  the  curtain  edge,  unless  they 
be  ground  glass  globes,  is  a  mistake.  Their  glare  is  thrown 
directly  in  the  eyes  of  the  audience,  which,  to  say  the  least, 
is  not  pleasant.  Taking  the  ordinary  storeroom  theater  as 
an  example,  seating  capacity  300,  four  ceiling  clusters  of 
eight  16  c.  p.  lamps  each,  with  a  good  reflector  above  each 
cluster,  will  produce  an  excellent  effect,  these  to  be  supple- 
mented by  six  or  eight  8  c.  p.  globes  on  either  wall,  designed 
to  burn  during  the  performance.  These  latter  to  be  either 
colored  light  green  or  else  their  rays  shaded  downward  by 
a  proper  reflector  which  will  neither  allow  the  direct  light 
rays  to  reach  the  curtain  or  the  eyes  of  the  audience.  On 
the  floor,  under  the  end  chair  of  each  fifth  row  of  seats, 
may  be  placed  a  small  globe  enclosed  in  a  small  metal 
box  one  side  of  which  is  covered  by  wire  screen.  The  wire 
screen  is  placed  next  the  aisle  and  the  aisle  floor  is  thus 
lighted.  The  wires  to  these  lights  are  carried  under  the 
floor,  coming  through  a  small  hole  to  each  lamp,  the  circuit 
being  handled  from  the  main  switchboard  and  lighted  only 
when  the  house  is  dark.  A  light  enclosed  in  a  metal  box 
with  glass  front  in  which  the  word  "EXIT"  is  blocked  out, 
with  letters  in  red,  should  be  over  each  exit,  this  circuit, 
as  has  already  been  explained,  being  handled  only  by  a 
switch  located  in  the  box  office.  One,  two  or  all  of  the  ceil- 
ing clusters  should  be  arranged  to  be  handled  by  a  switch 
located  in  the  operating  room,  as  well  as  from  the  main 
switchboard.  By  this  plan  when  the  show  is  ready  to  start 
the  other  lights  are  pulled  when  the  operator  is  given  his  cue. 
The  operator  then  starts  his  machine  and  pulls  the  ceiling 
lights,  thus  the  picture  is  on  and  the  house  dark  at  one 
and  the  same  instant,  producing  a  very  nice  effect.  When 
the  picture  is  done  the  operator  snaps  on  the  lights  as  the 
machine  stops.  Also  if  anything  goes  wrong  the  operator 
can  instantly  light,  or  at  least  partially  light,  the  house. 


146  MOTION   PICTURE  HANDBOOK 

it  is  best  to  have  your  lights  so  arranged  that  a  part 
of  them  may  be  burned  at  a  time  without  matefially  affecting 
light  distribution  as  a  whole,  merely  making  the  illumination 
less  brilliant.  This  saves  current  when  the  janitor  is  clean- 
ing up,  also  there  may  be  other  times  when  you  will  not 
need  the  full  number  of  lights.  The  distfibution  of  light 
and  the  location  of  the  lamps  will  depend  on  the  size  and 
shj^pe  of  the  room  and  the  decoration.  Aside  from  what 
has  already  been  said  there  is  little  to  say  of  value.  Each 
one  must  size  up  his  house  and  plan  his  light  scheme  along 
lines  which  seem  best  for  that  particular  case.  But  dofl't 
imagine  because  Mr.  Jones  has  his  theater  lighting  dis- 
tributed in  a  certain  way  you  have  to  make  an  exact  copy. 
The  light  scheme  which  looks  well  and  produces  a  splendid 
effect  in  Mr.  Jones'  house  may  look  very  bad  in  yours. 
Where  there  is  a  stage  used  for  players  it  should  by  all 
means  be  brilliantly  lighted.  The  writer  does  not  know  that 
there  is  any  established  rule  setting  forth  a  certain  number 
of  candle  power  per  square  foot  of  stage.  He  believes 
there  is  not.  The  following  will,  he  thinks,  serve  fairly  well 
on  any  stage,  however:  Foots — One  i6  c.  p.  lamp  to  every 
6  or  7  inches  the  full  width  of  the  proscenium  opening. 
Borders — One  i6  c.  p.  lamp  to  each  7  inches,  full  width  of 
stage,  with  one  row  of  borders  to  every  4  feet  of  stage  depth, 
counting  from  the  front  curtain  line.  The  front  row  of 
borders  should  be  hung  as  close  to  the  front  curtain  as  is 
practical.  The  number  of  border  lights  per  row  may  be 
somewhat  reduced  where  the  height  from  floor  to  borders 
is  shallow,  say  under  10  feet.  The  above  stage  lighting  may 
seem  excessive  to  some  managers  of  small  theaters,  but  take 
my  word  that  it  pays  in  the  long  run  to  have  plenty  of  light 
on  the  stage.  Your  stage  circuits  should  be  so  arranged 
that  each  alternate  light  of  both  foots  and  borders  can  be 
extinguished  in  scenes  where  not  much  light  is  desired. 
An  effective,  cheap  border  trough  is  made  by  placing  the 
lamp  so-kets  on  the  fiat  side  of  a  2x4  and  then  nailing,  a 
strip  of  heavy  tin  or  sheet  metal  on  its  edge  so  that  it  will 
project  about  7  inches,  the  strip  of  metal  to  run  the  full 
length  of  the  border,  of  course.  This  trough  should  be  hung 
at  such  angle  that  the  lights  cannot  be  seen  from  the 
front   row  of  seats.     Paint   the   inside   of  the   trough   white. 


FOR    MANAGERS    AND    OPERATORS  147 

This  trough  is  cheaper  and  almost  as  good  as  those  used 
in  large  theaters.     Anyone  can  make  them. 

As  to  scenery,  there  is  little  use  in  offering  advice,  but 
whatever  set  or  sets  you  may  decide  upon  they  should  be 
made  and  painted  by  people  who  make  such  work  a  business. 
It  will  be  far  cheaper  in  the  long  run,  since  such  scenery 
not  only  will  look  far  better  but  will  last  much  longer. 
Advertisements  on  the  front  curtain,  or  anywhere  in  the 
house,  for  that  matter,  are  in  bad  taste.  They  cheapen  the 
whole  house,  just  as  advertising  slides  thrown  on  the  cur- 
tain do.  Better  keep  aivay  from  that  game.  It  does  not 
pay. 

The  stage  floor  should  be  solidly  constructed  in  order  to 
avoid  excessive  vibration  from  dancing.  It  should  have  a  top 
finish  of  carefully  selected  narrow  hard  maple  flooring.  The 
stage  floor  should  be  kept  scrupulously  clean,  but  very  little 
water  should  be  used.  Wipe  it  up  with  a  wet  cloth,  wiping 
dry  immediately  with  dry  cloths.  The  footlight  gutter  should 
by  all  means  be  deep  enough  so  that  the  tops  of  the  globes 
cannot  be  seen  by  the  audience  from  any  part  of  the  house. 
If  this  is  impractical  then  flare  the  front  edge  inward  a 
trifle  over  the  globes.  Proper  dressing  rooms  should  in 
all  cases  be  provided  in  houses  in  which  there  will  be 
actors.  Any  room  where  proper  and  ample  dressing  rooms 
cannot  be  had  is  unfit  for  any  but  a  straight  picture  show, 
if  it  is  for  that.  Theater  managers  will  do  well  to  re- 
member that  even  the  "twenty  per"  actor  (?)  is  human  and 
entitled  to  some  consideration — at  least  to  dressing  room  con- 
ditions which  make  for  common  decency.  Theater  managers 
provide  such  conditions,  but  the  rapid  growth  of  the  cheap 
theater  has  unfortunately  produced  a  too  numerous  breed  of 
would-be  managers,  just  as  it  has  produced  thousands  of 
would-be  operators.  These  men  know  little  or  nothing  about 
the  amusement  business,  though  as  a  rule  by  the  time  they 
have  been  managing  a  small  five-cent  house  from  two  to 
six  months  they  feel  ready  and  willing  to  offer  expert  advice 
to  Klaw  &  Erlanger.  They  simply  succeed  in  earning  the 
contempt  of  wise  theatrical  men.  Many  such  men  seem 
to  think  a  3x4  toilet  room  for  a  man  or  woman  actor  is 
a  sinful  waste  of  space.  Put  yourself  in  the  actor's  place, 
friend,  and  think  how  you  would  like  to  suffer  the  dressing 
room  conditions  provided  in  too  many  nickel  theaters. 


148  MOTION    PICTURE   HANDBOOK 

VENTILATION. 

The  matter  of  ventilation  is  one  of  much  importance,  both 
Summer  and  Winter.  There  are  too  many  owners  and  man- 
agers who  seem  to  imagine  that  stirring  up  the  air  with  wall 
or  ceiling  fans  is  "ventilation."  It  is  nothing  of  the  sort. 
Ceiling  and  wall  fans  perform  an  important  office  in  cooling 
the  theater,  since  rapidly  moving  air,  for  reasons  not  neces- 
sary to  go  into,  produces  a  sensation  of  coolness  to  the 
human  body.  Ventilation,  however,  does  .  not  necessarily 
have  much  to  do  with  coolness.  The  office  of  ventilation  is 
to  purify  the  air  in  a  room  by  removing  it,  substituting  out 
of  doors  air  instead.  Here  we  have  two  separate  and  dis- 
tinct propositions  as  applied  to  Summer  and  one  as  ap- 
plied to  Winter,  viz.:  In  Summer  a  movement  of  the  air 
by  wall  or  ceiling  fans,  or  both,  to  produce  coolness,  and 
a  pumping  out  of  the  air  by  an  exhaust  fan  or  vent  flues 
to  purify.  In  Winter  we  have  only  the  changing  of  the  air,  but 
that  is  even  more  important  in  Winter  than  in  Summer,  since 
the  house  is  then  tightly  closed.  As  to  ceiling  or  wall  fans  for 
cooling,  their  size  and  number  will  depend,  of  course,  en- 
tirely on  the  size  of  the  house,  but  comparatively  large  fans 
are  always  best  for  several  reasons.  It  does  not  pay  to  buy 
cheap  fans!  They  are  an  abomination  and  source  of  noise, 
continual  trouble  and  expense.  By  all  means  get  good  fans. 
It  will  pay  you  well  to  do  so.  But  having  procured  them 
do  not  imagine  you  can  put  them  up,  make  the  connection 
and  let  them  run  for  six  months  without  attention.  Most 
fans  are  self-oiling,  but  that  does  not  mean  they  will  run  for 
six  months  with  one  filling  of  the  cups  without  serious  dam- 
age to  the  journals.  Nor  does  it  pay  to  try  to  make  them 
do  it!  Oil  is  cheap — considerably  cheaper  than  worn  and 
cut  journals  and  ruined  armatures.  Where  wall  fans  are 
only  run  three  or  four  hours  a  day  they  may  be  allowed,  un- 
less something  goes  wrong  with  them,  to  run  for  two  weeks 
without  attention,  but  it  is  an  excellent  rule  to  set  certain 
days,  in  such  cases  the  first  and  fifteenth  of  the  month,  for 
overhauling  the  fans,  and  make  it  an  invariable  rule  to  at- 
tend to  this  duty  on  these  days.  The  "overhauling"  should 
consist  of  emptying  the  oilcups  and  refilling  with  fresh  oil, 
examining  the  whole  fan  and  cleaning  it  thoroughly,  closely 


FOR    MANAGERS    AND    OPERATORS  ,149 

examining  the  commutator  and  brushes,  replacing  brushes 
that  are  getting  too  short  and  seeing  that  the  brushes  make 
good  contact  with  the  commutator  bars.  If  there  is  spark- 
ing" at  the  brushes  the  trouble  should  be  remedied  or  it  may 
in  time  cause  serious  damage.  It  may  be  caused  by  an 
almost  invisible  bit  of  copper  pulled  across  the  insulation  be- 
tween two  commutator  bars.  This  may  be  removed  with 
No.  00  sandpaper  or  by  very  careful  scraping  with  a  'knife 
blade.  The  oil  in  the  cups  may  look  all  right,  but  it  gets 
dirty  and  needs  renewing.  All  this  involves  some  work,  but 
there  is  no  excellence  without  labor — and  it  pays,  in  the  long 
run,  in  dollars  and  cents,  in  temper  saving  and  in  satisfac- 
tion both  to  yourself  and  your  patrons.  You  may  say. 
"O,  my  fans  run  all  right  without  all  that  monkey  business!" 
Granted,  but  your  fans  will  be  in  the  junk  pile  when  those 
of  the  man  who  follows  my  directions  will  be  practically 
as  good  as  new  and  you  will  have  spent  dollars  in  repairs 
where  he  has  spent  dimes.  Your  service  will  have  been 
more  or  less  unsatisfactory,  at  least  at  times,  while  his  will 
have  been  practically  perfect  at  all  times.  Wall  fans  should 
be  placed  at  convenient  height  and  set  to  blow  backward  diag- 
onally towards  the  audience's  faces,  but  the  height  of  center  of 
draught  should  be  such  that  excessive  air  current  will  not 
be  felt  in  the  seats.  A  little  experimenting  will  determine 
the  proper  angle  to  set  the  fans,  but  it  pays  to  observe  these 
details  closely. 

For  ventilation  there  are  two  methods,  viz.:  The  exhaust 
fan  and  the  vent  flue.  With  the  latter  I  do  not  purpose  to 
deal,  since  that  is  a  problem  for  the  sanitary  engineer. 
Where  practical  it  is  best  to  locate  the  exhaust  fan  at  the 
rear  (stage  end)  of  the  house,  since  then  the  air  will  be 
drawn  the  full  length  of  the  room  when  the  front  doors  are 
opened.  The  fans  should  be  of  ample  size,  since  it  is  much 
cheaper  to  operate  a  large,  slow-speed  fan  than  a  small,  high- 
speed one;  moreover,  the  low-speed  fan  is  more  nearly 
noiseless — an  important  consideration  in  a  theater,  especially 
if  there  be  acting.  The  larger,  lower  speed  fan  is  much  the 
best  in  every  way.  It  is  stated  that  in  a  crowded  theater  the 
air  should  be  changed  once  in  five  or  six  minutes,  but  the 
writer  is  unable  to  discover  what  this  assertion  is  based  on. 

Other    authorities    say    there    should    be    1,500    cubic    feet 


150  MOTION    PICTURE   HANDBOOK 

of  air  per  person  per  hour.  Again  I  have  been  unable  to 
discover  what  this  is  based  on.  The  average  person,  so  say 
the  medical  fraternity,  breathes  about  25  inches  of  air  per 
breath  and  breathes  an  average  of  18  times  per  minute. 
This  would  indicate  an  hourly  consumption  of  about  15 
cubic  feet  of  air  per  person.  But  the  human  body  gives  off 
gases  aside  from  this  which  help  render  the  air  impure. 
Still  the  writer  believes,  and  is  willing  to  assert,  that  an  en- 
tire change  of  the  air  once  every  ten  minutes  is  amply  suf- 
ficient when  the  house  is  full  to  capacity.  In  fact  he  very 
much  questions  if  even  this  time  is  not  much  shorter  than 
there  is  any  real  need  of.  He  is  a  believer  in  thorough 
ventilation  and  plenty  of  fresh  air,  but  there  is  no  earthly 
sense  in  throwing  away  money  pumping  more  air  than  is 
necessary.  In  Summer  the  air  becomes  impure  much  faster 
by  reason  of  the  perspiration  thrown  off  which  carries  with 
it  impurities.  The  writer  lays  no  claim  to  being  anything 
even  approaching  an  expert  in  ventilation,  but  plain  reason 
seems  to  tell  him  that  1,500  cubic  feet  of  air  per  person 
per  hour  is  excessive  as  is  the  changing  of  air  every  five  or 
six  minutes.  You  will  have  to  "show  me"  the  necessity  for 
any  such  air  movement  as  that.  Having  decided  how  often 
you  want  the  air  changed  any  fan  manufacturer  will  be 
able  to  provide  a  suitable  sized  fan  to  do  the  required  work. 
The  fan  speed  should  be  regulated  by  a  controller,  how- 
ever, since  it  will  not  be  necessary  to  run  it  to  speed  when 
the  house  is  but  partially  filled;  also  it  may  be  necessary 
to  slow  it  down  when  singing  or  vaudeville  is  on.  And  now 
a  further  word  concerning  fans.  Some  makers  set  their 
fan  blades  at  a  wide  angle  and  run  them  slow  speed,  while 
others  prefer  the  high  speed  and  slight  blade  angle.  Com- 
mon sense  will  tell  you  that  the  fan  with  heavy  blade  angle 
will  move  more  air  than  will  one  with  slight  blade  angle, 
speed  being  equal.  It  therefore  follows  that  you  can  run 
the  wide  angle  bladed  fan  at  lower  speed  and  secure  the 
same  results.  Such  a  fan  is  considerably  less  noisy  in  op- 
eration, besides  requiring  less  power  per  cubic  foot  of  air 
moved.  The  most  effective  speeds  for  properly  designed 
exhaust  fans  will  be  found  to  be  about  as  follows:  24-inch 
fan,  700;  30-inch,  550,  and  36-inch,  450  revolutions  per  minute 
The  speed  controller  should  be  located  either  at  the  main 


FOR    MANAGERS    AND    OPERATORS  ISl 

switchboard,  at  the  stage  switchboard  or  in  the  operating 
room,  as  seems  best  in  the  individual  case.  In  purchasing 
an  exhaust  fan,  as  in  other  things,  don't  look  at  the  price 
so  much  as  at  the  quality.  That  is  to  say,  don't  buy  a  poor 
fan  because  it  is  cheap.  It  will  be  very  costly  by  and  by  if 
you    run   it   long. 

SEATING. 

So  far  as  price  goes  a  theater  may  be  seated  with  opera 
chairs  costing  from  as  low  as  $1.25  each  to  as  high  as  one 
wishes  to  go,  a  very  comfortable,  substantial  seat  being 
available  at  about  $1.40  each.  Upholstered  seats  are  not 
desirable  in  moving  picture  theaters  from  any  point  of  view. 
They  would  be  a  distinct  disadvantage  any  way  one  might 
look  at  it.  The  audience  remains  seated  such  a  comparatively 
short  time  that  the  non-upholstered  seat,  provided  it  be  prop- 
erly made,  is  perfectly  comfortable  and  in  Summer  it  is  much 
cooler  also.  Second-hand  chairs  are  often  available  at  very 
low  figure,  but  you  should  either  see  them  or  have  a  guaran- 
tee in  writing  as  to  their  size,  condition,  etc.,  with  privilege 
of  examination  before  paying  if  shipped  from  a  distance. 
Theater  seats  should  always  have  a  wire  hat  holder  beneath 
the  seat  and  on  the  back  of  each  seat  should  be  affixed  a 
very  small  ring  or  staple  through  which  the  ladies  may 
thrust  a  hatpin  to  hold  their  headgear  instead  of  being  obliged 
to  hold  them  in  their  laps.  Two  small  staples,  one  one-half 
inch  above  the  other,  are  best.  You  will  probably  have  to 
throw  a  slide  on  the  screen  calling  attention  to  the  arrange- 
ment until  the  ladies  become  accustomed  to  it.  You  will 
find  it  will  be  highly  appreciated  by  ladies  who  remove  their 
hats.  Advertisements  in  The  Moving  Picture  World  will 
put  you  in  touch  with  manufacturers  of  theater  seats  who 
will  send  prices,  descriptions  and  illustrations  of  the  various 
styles  of  seats. 

One  very  essential  and  important  feature  in  seating  is  to 
utilize  all  available  space,  but  at  the  same  time  not  get  the 
rows  so  close  together  that  the  user  will  experience  discom- 
fort. The  requirements  of  Chicago  will  serve  as  a  safe 
guide  in  this  respect.  It  is  as  follows:  32  inches  from 
chair  back  to  chair  back.  Chicago  law  is  good  to  follow  in 
the  matter  of  aisles  also.     It  calls  for  aisles  3  feet  wide  if 


152  MOTION    PICTURE   HANDBOOK 

more  than  one  and  4  feet  if  but  one.  Taking  the  above  as 
a  basis  to  measure  seating  capacity  of  a  room,  proceed  as 
follows:  Measure  from  the  stage  to  the  point  you  wish  to 
locate  your  front  row  of  seats.  From  this  point  measure  to 
the  point  where  the  rear  of  your  last  row  of  seats  will  be. 
Multiply  this  measurement  by  12,  to  reduce  to  inches,  and 
divide  by  32.  The  last  result  will  be  the  number  of  rows. 
Next  measure  the  width  of  the  room  and  subtract  width 
of  the  aisle,  or  combined  width  of  all  aisles  if  more  than  one. 
Multiply  remainder  by  12,  to  reduce  to  inches,  and  divide 
the  result  by  width  of  chair  you  intend  using,  which  may 
be  18,  20  or  22  inches.  Next  multiply  the  number  of  rows 
by  the  number  of  seats  per  row  and  the  result  is  the  seating 
capacity  of  your  room.  •  Of  course  if  length  of  all  rows  is 
not  the  same  you  will  have  to  subtract  the  deficiency  of 
short  rows  or  else  measure  all  rows  separately,  adding  all 
together  and  dividing  by  chair  width.  Theaters  having  curved 
rows  usually  have  an  architect's  floor  plan  to  figure  from. 

All  theaters  should  have  a  properly  sloped  floor.  The  day 
of  the  flat  floor  is  past.  Such  a  house  is  hopelessly  out  of 
date  and  behind  the  times.  What  this  slope  will  be  will 
necessarily  depend  somewhat  on  how  much  you  are  able  to 
get  if  the  installation  be  in  a  building  already  erected.  All 
the  slope  you  can  get  up  to  the  point  where  the  rows  of 
chairs  must  be  on  steps  is  an  advantage.  The  best  floor 
slope  result  the  writer  has  seen  is  a  newly  constructed 
Chicago  moving  picture  theater.  The  floor  is  of  cement  and 
the  slope  is  about  5  feet  in  50.  There  are  two  ways  of  get- 
ting a  slope  in  an  old  flat  floor  room,  viz.:  Build  an  incline 
on  top  of  the  old  floor  or  drop  the  front  end  of  the  old 
floor  down  into  the  basement.  The  latter  is  much  the  best 
where  it  can  be  done.  The  first  named  plan  has  the  disad- 
vantage of  requiring  a  slope  from  the  entrance  up  to  the 
new  floor  level.  Never  use  steps  for  this,  since  in  case  of 
panic  people  would  certainly  pile  up  on  them  and  many  be 
injured  or  killed.  They  are  not  likely,  however,  to  fall  on 
an  incline,  even  though  it  be  quite  steep,  especially  if  it  be 
carpeted   with   heavy   coarse   matting,  securely  nailed   down. 

As  regards  seating  plans,  I  think  it  would  be  somewhat  a 
waste  of  space  to  elaborate  upon  them.  The  main  thing  is 
to  have  no  long  rows  of  seats  unbroken  by  an  aisle,  and  so 


FOR    MANAGERS    AND    OPERATORS  153 

arrange  your  exit,  which  in  all  cases  should  be  entirely  sep- 
arate from  the  entrance,  so  that  there  will  be  the  least  pos- 
sible congestion  when  the  crowds  are  passing  out.  It  is  by 
far  the  best,  where  it  can  be  so  arranged,  to  have  the  exit 
at  the  opposite  end  of  the  house  from  the  entrance.  This  is 
in  some  cases  possible  where  there  is  an  ample  passage  be- 
tween the  theater  building  and  the  next  adjoining,  provided 
it  be  not  a  public  alley.  This  plan  relieves  all  congestion 
caused  by  interference  between  people  coming  in  and  those 
passing  out.  In  ordinary  storeroom  theaters  the  central  aisle 
plan  is  almost  invariably  the  best.  Where  it  is  practicable 
to  have  a  center  aisle  and  one  at  either  side,  it  is  a  most 
excellent  plan  to  use  the  center  aisle  exclusively  for  persons 
passing  out,  the  incoming  ones  being  steered  into  the  side 
aisles,  none  being  allowed  to  enter  the  center  aisle.  As  the 
people  usually  do  not  come  in  in  big  crowds,  the  side  aisles, 
where  this  plan  is  adopted,  may  be  comparatively  narrow. 
Where  there  are  long  rows  of  seats  unbroken  by  an  aisle,  it 
is  dangerous  in  case  of  panic;  also  it  is  annoying  to  patrons, 
in  that  late  comers  have  to  crowd  past  many  seats  to  reach 
center  seats  in  the  row.  In  picture  theaters,  the  further  the 
front  row  of  seats  is  from  the  curtain,  the  better,  since  when 
one  is  very  close  to  the  curtain,  all  sense  of  perspective  is 
lost:  moreover,  the  picture  is  little  more  than  a  blur. 

It  is  better  to  locate  the  piano  in  a  pit  in  the  center  under 
the  curtain  or  stage  front,  since  the  piano  player  then  has 
a  constant  view  of  the  picture  without  effort.  This  is  essen- 
tial, if  he  or  she  is  to  produce  the  best  results  in  following 
the  film  action  with  music.  Carpet  all  aisles  with  heavy  mat- 
ting or  linoleum.  The  sound  of  people  walking  on  the  bare 
floor  is  very  annoying  to  an  audience.  The  curtain  should  be 
at  such  height,  if  possible,  that  the  head  of  a  man  standing 
at  the  front  row  of  seats  will  not  interfere  in  the  picture. 
As  regards  picture  size,  there  is  no  rule.  It  depends  on  the 
house  entirely.  But  it  may  be  said  that  the  picture  should, 
if  possible,  be  at  least  ten  feet  wide.  A  picture  twelve  feet 
wide  is  called  life  size  from  the  fact  that  in  this  size  there 
are  a  greater  percentage  of  life-size  figures  than  in  any  other. 

From  twelve  to  fourteen  feet  width  usually  makes  the  best 
appearing  picture.  Unless  it  is  absolutely  necessary,  do  not 
throw  the  top  of  the  picture  clear  up  to  the  ceiling.     It  does 


1S4  MOTION    PICTURE  HANDBOOK 

not  look  so  well  as  when  there  is  a  margin  of  from  six  inches 
to  two  feet.  After  all  other  cleaning  is  done  for  the  day, 
every  seat  should  be  carefully  dusted.  There  is  nothing  more 
annoying  to  a  lady  in  a  light-colored  dress  than  to  find  her 
costume  soiled  by  a  dusty  theater  seat.  It  amounts  to  an 
outrage. 

MUSIC. 

Music  is  a  matter  of  greater  importance  than  many  mov- 
ing picture  theater  managers  seem  to  imagine.  Get  a  good 
piano  player,  who  can  read  any  music  at  sight  and  make  him 
or  her  attend  strictly  to  business.  Pay  a  salary  which  will 
justify  you  in  demanding  the  best  work  and  then  see  to  it 
that  your  player  makes  good.  A  piano  player  who  cannot 
read  music  at  sight  has  no  rightful  place  in  a  moving  pic- 
ture theater,  especially  if  illustrated  songs  are  run.  But  the 
song  is  a  comparatively  small  matter.  Always  and  inva- 
riably the  piano  player  can  help  out  a  film  wonderfully  if 
he  or  she  wants  to  and  knows  how.  Often  and  often  have 
I  entered  a  theater  while  the  film  was  running  and  seen 
the  piano  player  industriously  engaged  in  talking  to  a  friend, 
dividing  her  attention  impartially  between  the  friend  and  a 
wad  of  gum.  He  or  she  would  have  got  busy  or  been  fired 
in  just  one  minute  had  I  been  managing  that  house.  The 
piano  player  should  have  a  wide  range  of  "know  it  by  heart" 
music;  should  watch  the  picture  closely  and  play  suitable 
music,  with  due  attention  to  producing  as  many  of  the 
noises  as  are  practical  with  that  instrument.  There  is  no  rea- 
son, where  a  drummer  cannot  be  employed,  why  an  auto 
horn,  a  chime  bell  and  a  whistle  cannot  be  manipulated  by 
the  piano  player.  They  can  easily  be  attached  to  the  instru- 
ment within  easy  reach,  and  such  things  help.  A  piano  player 
can  do  much  if  he  or  she  wants  to  and  mighty  little  if  he 
or  she  doesn't  want  to  and  doesn't  have  to.  Of  course  you 
will  have  to  spend  more  for  good  service,  but  it  pays  to  do  it. 

Where  the  house  has  seating  capacity  to  justify  there 
should  always  be  a  drummer.  But  get  a  good  one.  A  good 
drummer  can  perform  wonders  in  adding  to  the  effectiveness 
of  a  film,  but  a  poor  one  is  worse  than  none.  The  up-to- 
date  moving  picture  theater  drummer  has  contrivances  for 
imitating  almost  any  sound  and  he  knows  how  to  use  them. 


FOR    MANAGERS    AND    OPERATORS  155 

too.  It  may  be  safely  said  that  any  300  capacity  house  which 
has  available  capacity  business  should  have  a  drummer  and 
piano  player.  More  need  not  be  added  except  in  large 
houses.  I  feel  that  I  cannot  impress  too  strongly  on  man- 
agers the  advisability  of  getting  all  you  can  out  of  the 
available  music. 

BELL   WIRING. 

Where  there  is  simply  the  installation  of  one  bell  to 
consider  it  is  a  very  simple  matter.  Test  your  bell  or 
buzzer  (a  "buzzer"  is  just  a  bell  without  the  bell  part)  by 
holding  the  binding  posts  of  a  battery  against  the  binding 
posts  of  the  bell.  If  it  does  not  ring  either  the  battery  or 
bell  is  not  right.  If  it  is  a  new  battery  it  is  pretty  sure  to  be 
the  bell  which  is  at  fault.  After  testing  fasten  your  bell  and 
push  button  in  place  where  you  want  them  to  be.  Run  a 
wire  from  one  battery  binding  post  to  one  side  of  the  push 
button.  Run  a  wire  from  the  remaining  side  of  the  battery 
to  one  side  of  the  bell  and  run  a  wire  from  the  remaining 
side  of  the  bell  to  the  remaining  side  of  the  push  button  and 
the  job  is  done.  Where  two  batteries  are  used  connect  the 
zinc  of  one  with  the  carbon  of  the  other  with  a  short  piece  of 
wire,  using  the  remaining  posts  for  your  connections  as 
above  set  forth.  Where  more  than  two  batteries  are  to  be 
used  for  any  purpose  connect  the  first  two  as  above  and 
connect  the  next  and  remaining  ones  the  same  way.  This  is 
series  connection  and  will  raise  the  voltage. 

Run-down  dry  batteries  may  be  renewed  as  follows:  Re- 
move them  from  the  cardboard  casing  and  punch  them  full 
of  holes  an  inch  from  the  top,  being  careful  not  to  punch  into 
the  carbon  and  break  it;  also  not  to  disturb  sealing  wax 
around  top.  Immerse  batteries  in  solution  made  of  I  pound 
sal  ammoniac  to  i  gallon  of  water.  Leave  in  solution  half 
an  hour,  then  remove  and  stand  upside  down  for  an  hour, 
being  careful  the  solution  does  not,  as  it  leaks  out,  connect 
the  zinc  and  carbon,  for  it  will  then  act  as  a  "short"  and  run 
the  batteries  down  again.  Wipe  dry  and  replace  in  cardboard 
case  and  they  are  ready  for  use. 

Few  there  seem  to  be  who  understand  the  three  wire  sys- 
tem of  wiring  bells.     This  system  is  the  most  economical  of 


156 


MOTION   PICTURE   HANDBOOK 


any  in  amount  of  wire  used  and  it  contemplates  the  ringing 
of  any  number  of  bells  from  one  battery,  each  bell  being 
rung  by  its  own  push  button  and  no  other.  Nor  will  any 
push  button  ring  any  other  bell  than  its  own.  The  system 
IS  quite  simple  and  easily  understood.  Common  No.  i8 
cotton  covered  bell  wire  is  large  enough  and  good  enough 
unless  the  distance  from  button  or  battery  to  bell  be  excessive, 
which  is  not  likely  in  a  theater.     If  the  wires  are  to  be  run 


•l-^         .,  ••  /.J- 3  s  Pvsh-bKn»y\i. 


,.       3        :  "     " 

through  very  wet  or  very  damp  places  they  should  be  rubber 
covered  wires  through  that  space  or  else  be  insulated  on  small 
porcelain  insulators  the  same  as  are  electric  light  wires.  To 
install  such  a  system  get  your  bells  and  batteries  and  test  them 
all  to  be  sure  they  are  in  good  working  order.  Put  up  the  bells 
(or  buzzers)  and  push  buttons  wherever  you  wish  them  to  b«* 
If  two  batteries  are  used  connect  the  carbon  of  one  to  the 
zinc  of  the  other  by  a  short  piece  of  wire.     Now  get  three 


FOR    MANAGERS    AND    OPERATORS  157 

colors  of  bell  wire.    The  reason  for  three  colors  is  to  avoid 
mistakes  and  confusion  and  to  be  able  to  find  any  particular 
wire  anywhere  afterwards,  without  tracing  it  clear  from  the 
battery  or  bell.     The  use  of  three  colors  of  wire  simplifies 
matters  exceedingly.     Suppose  you  get  red,  blue  and  white. 
You    take    one    color,    say    the    blue,    and    run    it    from    one 
(either)  binding  post  of  the  battery,  to  one  (either)  binding 
post  of  each  bell.     You  may  run  separate  wires  from  the 
battery  binding  post  to  each  bell  or  run  one  wire  reaching 
all  bells  or  you  may  branch  off  to  a  bell  at  any  point.    Next 
take  another  color  (red,  for  instance)  and  run  from  the  other 
battery  binding  post  to  one  (either)  side  of  each  push  button. 
You  now  have  one  side  of  the  battery  connected  to  one  side 
of  each  bell  and  the  other  side  Oi!  the  battery  connected  to 
one  side  of  each  push  button.    You  next,  with  the  remaining 
color  (white)  wire,  connect  the  remaining  side  of  each  push 
button  with  the  remaining  side  of  the  bell  it  is  to  ring,  and 
the  job  is  done.    The  blue  wire  (blue  in  this  case)  is  called 
the  common  bell  wire,  the  red  wire  is  called  the  push  button 
wire  and  the  whites  are  called  the  individual  wires.     It  is 
these  latter  wires  which  determine  which  bell  a  button  will 
ring  and  you  may  cause  a  button  to  ring  a  different  bell  by 
simply  changing  the  individual  wire  to  that  bell.     Fig.  41 
shows  a  plan  of  this  system.     In  running  your  wires  they 
may  be,  except  as  before  noted,  simply  stapled  to  the  wood- 
work with  small  staples,  but  you  should  never  run  two  wires 
under  one  staple,  since  if  you  drive  the  staple  a  trifle  tight 
you  may  form  a  short  circuit  through  the  iron  of  the  staple. 
Then,    too,   if   a    wire    is    in    a    place    where    it    will    swing 
a  little  the  insulation  is  likely  to  wear  through,  thus  form- 
ing a  short  circuit  even  though  not  clamped  tightly  by  the 
staple.    A  short  circuit  may  cause  your  bell  to  ring  all  the 
time  or  not  ring  at  all,  according  to  its  location.    If  on  the 
two  wires  leading  to  the  push  button  the  bell  will  ring  con- 
tinuously  until   the   battery   is   worn   out.     If   on   the   wire 
running  from  bell  to  battery  and  the  wire  running  from  but- 
ton to  bell  the  bell  won't  ring  at  all.     Several  wires  may 
be  run  together  in  a  bunch  by  using  wood  cleats.    An  addi- 
tional bell  or  buzzer  may  be  installed  at  any  time  as  follows: 
Test  the  bell  and   install   it  and  its   push  button  wherever 
you  want  them  to  be.    Now  with  a  piece  of  first  color  wire 


158  MOTION   PICTURE  HANDBOOK 

connect  one  binding  post  of  the  bell  with  the  first  color  wire 
already  in  use  wherever  you  can  find  it.  With  a  piece  of 
second  color  wire  connect  one  side  of  the  push  button  with 
a  second  color  wire  wherever  you  can  find  one.  Understand 
you  can  just  tap  on  to  these  wires  at  any  point  you  can 
locate  one  of  proper  color.  Now  connect  the  remaining 
side  of  the  button  with  the  remaining  side  of  the  bell  with 
third  color  wire  and  the  job  is  done.  The  rules  governing 
this  system  of  wiring  are  as  follows:  One  side  of  the 
battery  must  be  connected  with  one  side  of  each  bell  by 
first  colored  wire.  The  other  side  of  the  battery  must  be 
connected  to  one  side  of  each  push  button  with  second  color 
wire  and  the  remaining  side  of  each  button  must  be  connected 
with  the  remaining  side  of  the  bell  it  is  to  ring  with  third 
color  wire. 


FOR    MANAGERS    AND    OPERATORS  159 


Location  and  Management. 


SELECTING    A    THEATER    LOCATION. 

To  one  embarking  in  the  moving  picture  theater  business 
the  first  and  most  important  consideration  is  location.  This, 
as  applied  to  the  city  and  to  the  small  town,  presents  two  en- 
tirely separate  and  distinct  propositions,  involving  quite  differ- 
ent problems.  The  moving  picture  field  has  been  so  well  cov- 
ered that  it  is  now  well-nigh  impossible  to  find  a  desirable 
location  where  there  is  no  immediate  competition.  So  true 
is  this  that  the  prospective  owner  may  make  up  his  mind  at 
the  outset  that  it  is  necessary  to  "butt  into"  a  field  already 
more  or  less  covered, unless  he  buys  out  some  established  house, 
and  even  then  he  cannot  be  assured  of  no  competition,  since 
another  house  may  be  put  in  at  any  time.  But  the  man 
who  fears  competition,  provided  there  be  business  available 
for  two  or  more  houses,  or  for  one  and  partly  enough  for 
another,  is  not  the  right  man  to  enter  the  nickel  theater  field. 

The  first  thing  to  do  in  selecting  a  location  is  to  thor- 
oughly inform  yourself  concerning  local  laws  governing  thea- 
ters, particularly  the  class  of  house  you  propose  insteilHng. 
You  will  then  be  in  position  to  look  at  store  rooms,  or  plans 
for  the  house  you  will  erect,  intelligently,  and  determine 
whether  or  not  any  given  room  can  be  made  to  comply  with 
the  law  as  applying  to  the  class  of  theater  you  propose  to 
install,  or  whether  any  given  plan  is  available.  The  main 
points  to  look  after  in  this  connection  are  exits,  stage  re- 
quirements, aisles,  and  fireproofing,  the  latter  being  of  im- 
portance in  some  of  the  larger  cities.  To  cite  cost  of  failure, 
considering  the  last  named  item  to  be  in  Chicago:  suppose 
you  selected  a  store  that  suited  you  and  leased  it,  but  later 
discovered  it  to  have  non-fireproof  walls  (only  stone  or  brick 
is  accepted  as  fireproof),  and  there  were  one  or  more  stories 
above  the  theater  room.  You  would,  under  the  Chicago  law, 
have  to  cover  the  entire  surface  of  both  walls  and  the  ceiling 
with   sheet  asbestos,  covered  with  sheet  metal,  before  you 


160  MOTION    PICTURE  HANDBOOK 

would  be  allowed  to  open.  Look  after  such  things  closely 
or  you  may  be  the  loser. 

Now  having  thoroughly  investigated  and  posted  yourself 
as  to  the  law,  the  next  step  is  to  seek  an  available  location. 
In  considering  the  matter  of  location,  the  first  thing  is,  of 
course,  a  suitable  room  or  a  site  for  building.  If  a  store 
room,  the  first  consideration  is  height  of  ceiling.  If  under 
thirteen  feet,  the  room  should  be  rejected.  Even  thirteen 
feet  is  too  low,  but  it  may  be  made  to  do  after  a  fashion, 
particularly  if  the  front  end  of  the  floor  can  be  dropped 
down  into  a  basement,  making  a  slope.  Next  comes  the 
matter  of  seating  capacity,  which  may  easily  be  figured  as 
before  set  forth.  If  the  room  is  available  in  these  two  re- 
spects (the  writer  would  consider  no  room  with  a  capacity 
of  less  than  two  hundred)  and  it  is  found  that  it  can  be 
made  to  comply  in  all  respects  with  local  laws,  the  next 
thing  is  the  investigation  of  available  business.  If  the  neigh- 
borhood be  a  very  wealthy  one,  a  nickel  house  will  likely  draw 
no  considerable  patronage  except  children,  servants  and 
transient.  The  ideal  location  is  a  densely  populated  working- 
men's  residence  section,  with  frontage  on  a  much-traveled 
business  street.  There  are  many  problems  to  consider  when 
seeking  a  city  location.  The  matter  of  race  (nationality) 
must  be  looked  after  carefully,  since  some  sections  may  be 
peopled  almost  exclusively  by  any  one  of  half  a  dpzen  foreign- 
speaking  nationalities.  This,  under  some  conditions,  might 
prove  disastrous.  Take  the  lower  class  Italians.  If  any 
considerable  number  of  them  patronized  your  house  you 
would  have  to  look  to  them  entirely  for  your  revenue,  since 
a  house  patronized  by  any  number  of  them  will  have  to 
depend  on  them  alone  for  support.  Any  considerable  num- 
ber of  negroes  will  queer  a  house  with  all  other  races;  and 
there  are  other  races  to  which  you  must  cater  exclusively 
or  not  at  all,  so  that  the  matter  deserves  close  investigation 
when  seeking  a  city  nickel  theater  site. 

Straight-laced  church  neighborhoods  have,  as  a  rule,  been 
found  to  give  scant  patronage,  no  matter  how  clean  and 
high-class  the  program  be  kept.  It  does  not  necessarily  fol- 
low that  success  may  not  be  had  in  such  communities,  but 
the  chances  are  that  the  patronage  will  at  least  be  smaller 
than  it  would  be  in  another  equally  populous  neighborhood. 


FOR    MANAGERS    AND    OPERATORS  161 

Here,  too,  is  another  thing  to  remember:  In  a  city  where 
there  are  many  forms  of  amusement,  people  will  not  go  far 
to  visit  a  nickel  theater.  Your  house  must  therefore  be  lo- 
cated close  to  its  "base  of  supplies."  Where  transient  trade 
is  expected  to  form  any  considerable  portion  of  the  receipts, 
a  careful  computation  should  be  made  of  the  number  passing 
per  hour  and  the  number  of  hours  they  will  be  passing  while 
your  house  is  open;  also,  whether  or  not  the  location  is  such 
that  the  passers-by  will  be  inclined  to  stop  to  view  a  show. 
To  illustrate  the  last  point:  Some  time  since  a  man  opened 
a  five-cent  theater  in  the  first  block  north  of  the  Clark  Street 
Bridge,  Chicago.  I  told  him  at  the  time  the  house  would 
be  a  failure,  basing  my  prophecy  on  the  following:  When 
Clark  street  leaves  the  bridge  (viaduct)  on  the  north,  it 
slopes  down  for  one  block  to  Kinzie  street,  the  street  being 
lined  with  a  few  cheap  stores  and  dealers  in  steam-heating 
supplies.  There  are  practically  no  nearby  residences  (flats), 
and  the  hotels,  of  which  several  are  close  by,  and  rooming 
houses  are  practically  entirely  occupied  by  the  cheaper  class 
theatrical  people.  The  trade  must  therefore  be  all  transient. 
People  who  start  up  that  incline  do  so  with  intent  to  cross 
the  river  to  the  loop  district,  and,  having  a  definite  object  in 
view,  they  will  not  stop  by  the  way  to  see  a  nickel  show. 
Coming  north,  the  same,  reversed,  is  true.  The  house  was 
a  flat  failure.  I  cite  this  instance  to  show  you  that  such 
things  must  be  considered  in  seeking  city  locations,  unless 
one  wishes  to  deliberately  invite  failure. 

Competition  in  a  city;  it  is  hard  to  say  just  when  a  given 
location,  if  it  be  densely  populated,  is  fully  covered.  In  one 
place  on  North  Clark  street,  Chicago,  there  are  six  houses, 
all  doing  a  land  office  business,  within  three  blocks.  People 
often  start  in  at  one  end  and  go  to  all  of  them.  It  forms 
quite  a  nickel  theater  center  and,  as  a  matter  of  fact,  the 
congestion  of  theaters  at  this  point  actually  draws  people,  to 
some  extent,  from  quite  a  distance.  They  will  come  and 
spend  an  entire  evening  in  these  houses.  I  do  not  feel 
that  any  advice  of  value  can  be  given  in  this  respect. 
If  there  are  people  enough  and  you  put  in  as  good  or  a 
better  house  than  the  other  ones  and  give  as  good  or  a 
better  show,  there  is  no  reason  why  you  will  not  get  your 
share  of  the  business,  and  if  your  show  is  the  best  you  will 
get  the  most  of  it,  too. 


162  MOTION   PICTURE  HANDBOOK 

SELECTING  A   SMALL  TOWN   LOCATION. 

The  selection  of  a  small  town  location  is  quite  a  different 
proposition  from  the  foregoing  and  presents  a  different  set 
of  problems.  Of  course,  what  has  been  said  concerning  the 
selection  of  a  store  room  for  remodeling  into  a  theater 
applies  equally  in  a  city  or  small  town.  It  is  the  matter  of 
possible  patronage  which  presents  the  difference.  No  rule 
can  possibly  be  laid  down  as  to  the  size  of  town  capable  of 
supplying  the  necessary  patronage  to  make  the  venture  a 
paying  one.  Theaters  have  been  installed  in  villages  of  less 
than  one  thousand  and  have  been  successful  in  a  small  way. 
In  such  cases,  however,  it  is  usually  a  strictly  family  affair, 
no  help  at  all  being  hired.  The  only  expense  of  amount  is 
film  service,  rent  and  light.  These  articles  are  not  designed 
to  deal  with  conditions  of  this  sort,  however.  In  figuring 
the  matter  of  expense  for  a  small  town  theater  the  items 
^nay  be  estimated  about  as  follows:  Operator,  $15.00  per 
week;  ticket  seller  and  ticket  taker,  $5.00  to  $6.00  each; 
piano-player — singer,  $15.00;  service,  with  express  charges, 
$30.00  to  $40.00;  light,  $6.00;  rent,  $10.00;  or  a  total  of  about 
$100.00  per  week.  This  will  be  about  minimum  if  you  pro- 
pose to  give  a  really  acceptable  show.  Of  course,  I  well 
know  that  many  small  town  theaters  get  an  operator  for  as 
little  as  $10.00,  a  piano-player— singer  for  $12.00,  and  service 
for  $15.00  (even  less,  in  some  cases),  but  take  my  word, 
they  don't  and  can't  put  on  a  show  worth  seeing.  Ninety 
dollars  per  week  may  be  taken  as  a  minimum  for  putting  on 
a  creditable  show  in  a  small  town  where  rents  are  com- 
paratively low.  This  means  1,800  paid  admissions  to  meet 
the  expense  account  alone.  It  is  therefore  up  to  you,  Mr. 
Prospective  Investor,  to  carefully  and  intelligently  "size  up" 
conditions  and  decide  that  you  can  see  the  ninety  coming 
back  to  you  each  week,  bringing  with  it  something  over 
and  above  for  your  own  pocket. 

To  accomplish  this  "sizing  up,"  several  things  must  be 
carefully  considered.  First  and  foremost,  what  are  the  pres- 
ent amusements  of  the  people?  Have  they  been  accustomed 
to  purchasing  their  amusement,  or  will  you  have  to  educate 
them  to  do  it?  Is  the  community  a  straight-laced  one, 
where  there  will  b'e  a  howl  from  the  pulpit  and  from  the 
little  2  by  4  weekly  paper   every  time   the  exchange   sends 


FOR    MANAGERS    AND    OPERATORS  163 

you  an  even  mildly  sensational  film?  You  must  remember 
that  in  small  communities  the  preachers  and  editors  are  men 
of  small  caliber,  usually,  but  possessed  with  an  exaggerated 
idea  of  their  importance  as  guardians  of  the  public  morals. 
They  may  even  welcome  the  chance,  even  though  a  slim  one, 
of  getting  into  the  local  limelight  by  jumping  on  you.  This 
will  not  ruin  you,  but  "every  little  bit  helps,"  and  it  is  well 
to  look  closely  at  even  such  matters.  Consider  carefully 
what  the  source  of  public  income  is.  If  a  large  percentage 
of  the  workmen  are  factory  employees  with  semi-monthly  or 
monthly  paydays,  you  are  likely  to  do  a  rushing  business 
around  payday  and  nothing  between  times.  Investigate  as 
to  whether  or  no  the  people,  as  a  rule,  retire  early.  If  so, 
it  will  operate  to  congest  the  business  into  a  short  space  of 
time,  thus  requiring  a  larger  seating  capacity  than  if  it  spread 
out  an  hour  or  two  longer.  Is  the  town  compact  or  widely 
scattered?  In  bad  weather  people  will  not  go  far  to  a  nickel 
show,  therefore  this  is  a  point  of  considerable  importance 
under  some  circumstances.  Of  course,  in  sizing  up  a  loca- 
tion you  must  use  your  own  good  sense  and  judgment. 
Neither  I  nor  anyone  else  can  give  directions  which  will 
take  the  place  of  your  own  intelligence.  All  I  can  do  is 
point  out  a  few  of  the  more  important  items  bearing  on  the 
subject,  or  which  may  under  some  conditions  bear  on  it. 
But  each  individual  case  will  be  different  from  every  other 
one,  and  a  man  must  use  his  brains  in  such  matters.  Study 
all  conditions  closely.  Decide  what  is  the  very  least  clear 
profit  you  would  be  satisfied  with  and  then  estimate  as  closely 
as  possible  whether  or  not  your  prospective  patronage  will 
be  sufficient  to  produce  it  after  meeting  the  expense  bill. 
Don't  let  your  wishes  warp  your  intelligence. 

EMPLOYEES. 

A  cheap  or  poor  operator  is  dear  at  any  money.  Get  a 
good  operator  and  see  to  it  that  he  produces  the  results. 
Remember,  however,  that  the  peaple  of  old  could  not  make 
trick  without  straw.  Neither  can  an  operator  produce  re- 
sults unless  h-e  has  the  equipment  to  produce  them  with.  No 
matter  how  small  the  house,  there  should  be  at  least  one 
ushef,  and  he  should  be  well  and  neatly  dressed  at  all  times. 
The  ticket  taker  should  also  be  neatly  dressed,  in  a  uniform, 


164  MOTION    PICTURE  HANDBOOK 

if  possible.  The  writer  has  in  hundreds  of  instances  seen  a 
ticket  taker  in  his  shirt-sleeves,  unkempt,  and  even  with  a 
cigar  or  cigarette  in  his  mouth.  Such  a  spectacle  would 
convey  the  impression  to  my  mind  that  the  show  was  likely 
to  be  as  slouchy  as  the  man  in  the  door.  Others,  I  think, 
would  have  the  same  idea  and  pass  the  house  by.  The  ticket 
seller  should  preferably  be  a  young  lady  of  good  appear- 
ance, minus  the  usual  wad  of  gum.  She  must  know  how  to 
make  change  accurately  and  quickly,  of  course. 

ADVERTISING. 

It  pays  to  advertise.  But  the  best  methods  of  advertising 
a  moving  picture  show  is  a  subject  on  which  there  is  wide 
diversity  of  opinion.  The  neat  colored  posters  which  may 
now  be  had  with  nearly  all  films  at  low  cost  are  excellent 
for  the  arcade.  Neat  showcards  announcing  the  program 
are  also  excellent  arcade  advertisements.  In  small  towns  it 
is  more  than  likely  that  the  papers  can  be  induced  to  give 
space  to  some  film  synopsis  matter,  especially  if  an  advertise- 
ment be  carried  by  the  house.  A  common  arrangement  is  to 
contract  for  a  given  space  by  the  month  or  week,  the  pub- 
lisher agreeing  to  give  an  equal  amount  of  space  to  notes  of 
the  show  in  his  reading  matter.  Giving  of  souvenirs  is  not, 
as  a  rule,  good  practice.  It  savors  too  much  of  hiring  people 
to  come  to  your  show,  paying  them  with  some  compara- 
tively worthless  trinket  that  is  more  than  likely  thrown  away. 
Spend  the  souvenir  money  in  improving  your  program,  is 
my  advice.  If  you  have  a  competitor  and  you  start  giving 
"souvenirs,"  he  will  follow  suit  immediately,  and  neither  of 
you  are  the  gainer,  but  both  lose  just  that  much. 

One  good,  and  perhaps  the  best,  advertising  scheme  is  to 
have  a  genuine  feature  film  occasionally  and  advertise  it  to 
the  limit.  The  people  your  advertising  draws  to  see  that 
film  will  have  their  attention  effectively  drawn  to  the  house, 
and  if  they  see  a  good  show  they  will  return  to  see  other 
films.  Another  excellent  scheme  is  to  secure  some  good 
patriotic  film  and  have  a  children's  day  on  Saturday.  Secure 
the  school  principal  to  lecture  on  the  subject,  if  possible, 
and  admit  the  youngsters  at  two  or  three  cents  on  that  oc- 
casion. Have  a  good  comedy  film,  being  careful  that  it  is 
strictly    "clean."      The    children    will    tell    their    parents    all 


\ 


FOR    MANAGERS    AND    OPERATORS  165 

about  it  and  the  talk  will  advertise  your  house,  of  course. 
To  do  this  properly,  however,  the  school  teachers  should 
be  interested.  In  fact,  there  are  many  forms  of  advertising 
possible  to  the  man  who  uses  his  brains  and  thinks.  You 
must  be  a  schemer  to  make  the  best  success  in  the  show 
business.  The  man  who  goes  into  the  moving  picture  busi- 
ness thinking  it  is  play,  that  the  money  will  just  roll  in  with- 
out effort  on  his  part,  had  better  try  something  else.  The 
show  business,  moving  picture  or  otherwise,  requires  hard 
work,  and  lots  of  it.  Of  course,  in  its  infancy,  while  moving 
pictures  were  a  curiosity,  almost  anyone  could  make  big 
money  with  almost  any  old  show  at  all,  and  without  much 
effort.  But,  take  my  word,  those  days  are  past  and  gone 
— and  they  aren't  coming  back,  either.  There  is  still  money 
in  the  business,  and  good  money,  too,  for  the  man  of  ability, 
energy  and  eternal  push. 

FILM    SERVICE. 

In  the  matter  of  service  you  must  remember  that  a  flowery 
advertisement,  full  of  promises,  does  not  necessarily  imply 
the  best  service.  It  rather  indicates  that  the  advertiser  has 
in  his  employ  an  excellent  ad. -writer.  'There  is  just  one 
really  business-like,  intelligent  way  of  buying  film  service. 
By  subscribing  to  the  Moving  Picture  World  and  keeping 
its  copies  all  on  file  you  will  be  enabled  to  not  only  see  at 
a  glance  just  what  each  new  film  is — a  synopsis  of  its  action 
— but  also  see  its  exact  date  of  release.  Now  decide  just 
what  limit  you  wish  to  place  on  the  age  of  films  sent  you 
and  then  write  to  several  exchanges,  asking  for  quotations 
on  that  service.  To  illustrate:  Suppose  you  decide  you 
want  no  films  older  than  fifteen  days.  You  write,  asking  for 
quotations  on  the  number  of  reels  you  want  per  week, 
changed  so  often,  no  subject  to  be  more  than  fifteen  days 
old.  You  are  now  in  position  to  check  up  and  get  exactly 
what  you  pay  for.  If  you  think  some  subject  is  older  thaft 
your  contract  calls  for,  all  you  have  to  do  is  glance  at  its 
date  of  release  in  the  files  of  the  paper.  If  you  use  two  reels 
you  can  contract  for  one  reel  with  ten  or  fifteen-day  limit, 
and  one  twenty,  thirty,  forty  or  sixty-day  limit.  The  point, 
is,  you  place  yourself  in  position  to  absolutely  demand  and 
get  what  you  pay  for.     You  should  demand  a  clause  in  the 


166  MOTION    PICTURE  HANDBOOK 

agreement  that  any  subject  over  age  shall  be  paid  for  at 
half  price  or  be  not  paid  for  at  all.  This  is  the  sensible, 
business-like  way  of  purchasing  film  service.  It  absolutely 
eliminates  all  disputes.  The  terms  "first  run,"  "second  run" 
and  "third  run,"  as  now  used,  depend  largely  on  the  elas- 
ticity of  the  exchange  manager's  conscience.  "Commercial 
run"  means  nothing  at  all — or,  rather,  it  means  anything  the 
exchange  thinks  it  can  work  oflf  on  you.  Of  course,  ex- 
changes will  ridicule  this,  but  it  is  cold,  hard  facts,  never- 
theless, as  they  well  know.  Keep  all  film  release  dates  care- 
fully on  file,  buy  your  service  with  age  limit,  and  you  can't 
be  buncoed.  In  the  matter  of  carbons,  nearly  one-half  may 
be  saved  by  purchasing  in  1,000  lots. 

CHANGES. 

It  is  the  fashion  to  change  films  every  day,  but  to  the 
writer's  mind  this  is  not  always  good  practice.  Of  course, 
whether  it  is  or  not  will  depend  to  a  considerable  extent  on 
circumstances.  As  a  rule,  however,  taking  cost  into  con- 
sideration, I  do  not  believe  it  pays,  especially  if  film  must 
be  shipped  a  considerable  distance.  It  is  seldom  that  any 
considerable  portion  of  the  community  will  see  the  picture 
in  one  day.  If  it  be  a  good  picture  and  it  is  retained  two  or 
three  days  it  will  advertise  itself  and  thus  bring  added  patron- 
age. I  am  firmly  convinced  that,  as  a  general  proposition, 
it  does  not  pay  to  change  films  more  than  three  times  a 
week.  Some  managers  are  so  extreme  in  the  matter  of 
changes  that  they  demand  a  daily  change  of  as  much  as 
three  reels.  In  the  writer's  humble  opinion  this  is  sheer 
nonsense.  It  works  a  hardship  on  the  exchange  and  whether 
it  gains  the  house  any  additional  business  is  very  question- 
able— very  questionable,  indeed.  "But,"  replies  the  change- 
mad  manager,  "I  have  steady  patrons  who  come  every  day 
and  must  have  different  pictures  or  I  lose  them."  Granted! 
But  have  you  enough  of  them  to  make  up  for  the  added  cost 
of  such  service?  I  very  much  doubt  it.  I  am  firmly  con- 
vinced that  the  manager  who  gives  three  changes  a  week 
will  have  more  clear  profit  on  the  week's  business  than  the 
one  who  pays  for  daily  change.  Also  many  managers  demand 
a  daily  change  of  song  slides.  They  also  demand  all  new 
stuff.     Of  course,  they  don't  get  it,  since  there  is  not  enough 


FOR    MANAGERS    AND    OPERATORS  167 

produced  to  meet  such  a  demand.  In  the  writer's  judgment 
the  people  better  enjoy  a  song  they  know,  provided  it  be  not 
something  that  has  been  "sung  to  death"  quite  recently. 
Many  of  the  new  songs  are  very  poor — some  of  them  very 
poor  indeed.  The  audience  naturally  does  not  care  for  them 
and  would,  I  am  sure,  enjoy  an  older,  better  song  far  more. 
A  good  song,  with  good  slides,  may  be  run  two  or  three 
days  with  better  results  than  daily  change  and  take  what 
you  get. 

TICKETS. 

Tickets  may  be  had  very  cheap  of  any  supply  house  or 
film  exchange.  The  little  cardboard  is  in  the  hands  of  the 
patron  but  a  moment  and  the  cheap  ticket  is  as  good  as  the 
more  costly  ones.  All  tickets  should  be  numbered  and  you 
should  have  a  supply  of  several  colors,  changing  color  every 
day.  Children,  particularly  boys,  will  slip  past  the  door- 
keeper occasionally  and  come  back  next  evening  with  the 
ticket  they  thus  saved.  Only  tickets  of  the  day's  color  should 
be  honored.  Many  houses  have  the  name  of  the  theater 
printed  on  the  ticket.  Unless  you  order  in  large  enough 
quantities  to  have  this  done  without  extra  expense,  little  is 
gained  by  it.  All  tickets  should  be  numbered  consecutively 
so  that  by  taking  the  number  of  the  first,  and  the  last  ticket 
sold  the  day's  receipts  are  quickly  computed.  Tickets  with 
stay-over  coupons  may  be  had.  They  are  a  double  ticket  and 
the  patron  coming  in  late  retains  the  coupon,  which  entitles 
him  to  remain  for  the  next  show.  The  ushers  take  up  these 
coupons  during  intermission.  They  come  in  rolls  the  same 
as  ordinary  tickets,  but  the  roll  is  double  the  thickness. 
These  tickets,  provided  your  exchange  does  not  handle  them, 
may  be  had  of  the  Selig  Polyscope  Company,  Chicago.  They 
are  numbered  consecutively.  The  ticket  taker  takes  up  the 
whole  ticket,  coupon  and  all,  until  the  show  starts,  after 
which  patron  retains  the  coupon.  Occasionally  count  the 
day's  tickets  and  see  if  they  tally  with  sales.  Dishonest 
ticket  takers  may  hold  out  tickets  and  sell  them.  Never 
allow  your  ticket  taker  the  privilege  of  passing  people  in 
at  his  discretion.  If  you  want  anyone  to  have  free  admit- 
tance, give  him  a  written  pass.  If  allowed  this  privilege, 
ticket  takers  will  very  frequently  abuse  it-     Always  provide 


168  MOTION   PICTURE  HANDBOOK 

a  ticket  box,  of  which  no  one  but  the  manager  should  have 
the  key.  Oblige  ticket  taker  to  deposit  all  tickets  therein  as 
soon  as  received.  The  manager  himself  should  personally 
burn  all  tickets  in  the  box  after  the  show  each  day.  Never 
delegate  this  job  to  anyone  else.  Maybe  they  will  burn  them 
all  and  maybe  their  friends  will  be  generously  supplied  with 
tickets.     You  can't  always  sometimes  tell. 

VAUDEVILLE. 

Never  tolerate  any  "monkey  business"  by  actors  while  on 
the  stage.  Make  them  attend  strictly  to  business.  Allow  no 
smiling  at  or  talking  to  someone  in  the  wings  under  any  cir- 
cumstances. Never  allow  an  actor  to  "roast"  the  audience. 
Also  do  not  allow  an  audience,  or  the  hoodlum  element 
therein,  to  roast  an  actor  or  guy  him  or  her.  Provide  actors 
with  reasonable  dressing-room  conveniences  and  treat  them 
right.  On  the  other  hand,  impress  on  their  minds  the  fact 
that  they  are  there  to  work  and  that  nothing  less  than  the 
best  they  have  will  go.  Vaudeville  acts  may  be  had  from 
$25.00  per  week  for  a  single  or  $50.00  for  a  double,  to  as 
high  as  you  want  to  go.  Every  large  city  has  booking 
agencies  from  which  you  may  be  supplied.  Consult  the  col- 
umns of  the  various  theatrical  papers  for  their  advertise- 
ments, or  write  your  exchange.  Acts  vary  in  length  from, 
usually,  ten  to  twenty  minutes.  As  a  rule,  the  house  is 
obliged  to  stand  traveling  expenses  one  way.  By  traveling 
expenses  I  mean  railway  fare  only.  AH  actors  should  be 
required  to  be  at  the  theater  one-half  hour  before  their  turn 
is  due  to  go  on.  If  you  have  vaudeville  you  absolutely  must 
have  a  piano  player  who  can  read  at  sight,  not  only  printed 
music  but  hand-written  stuflE  as  well.  For  vaudeville  you 
must  have  a  spotlight  and  should  have  color  eflfects. 

TRAVELOGUES  AND  OTHER  ILLUSTRATED 
LECTURES. 

The  illustrated  lecture,  or  travelogue,  is  a  nice  thing  pro- 
vided it  be  properly  put  on.  The  slides  must  be  clean  and 
well  handled.  Not  to  exceed  18  amperes  of  current  should 
be  used  on  lecture  slides,  since  they  are  likely  to  remain  in 
the  light  several  minutes.     To  cut  down  the  current  an  extra 


FOR    MANAGERS    AND    OPERATORS  169 

rheostat  may  be  temporarily  connected  in  series.  A  dis- 
solver  is  almost  indispensable  to  the  illustrated  lecture,  though 
the  carrier  described  at  Fig.  34  may  be  used  with  fairly  good 
results.  The  lecturer  absolutely  must  speak  slowly  and  dis- 
tinctly. Reading  the  lecture  impairs  the  effect  very  much. 
Naturally  four-fifths  of  the  effect  as  a  whole  depends  on  the 
lecturer  himself,  or  herself.  The  sing-song  talker,  or  the 
talker  who  speaks  so  fast  or  so  low  that  the  words  cannot 
be  followed  except  by  an  effort,  spoils  it  all.  Properly  done, 
the  illustrated  lecture  is  excellent.  Wrongly  done,  it  rs 
worse  than   nothing  at  all. 


HINTS  TO  OPERATORS. 

Keep  your  eyes  on  the  screen. 

Never  imagine  that  you  know  it  all. 

Do  not  read  while  turning  the   crank. 

Keep  your  oily  rags  in  a  spring  top  can. 

Do  not  experiment  after  the  show   has   started. 

Keep  your  film  in  a  metal  box  when  not  in  use. 

Allow  no  one  in  the  booth  during  a  performance. 

Clean  house  in  the  "coop"  once  a  week  at  least. 

There  is  no  use  for  a  match  in  any  operating  room. 

You  are  not  a  clean  workman  if  you  have  a  dirty  machine. 

Every  moving  picture  booth  is  a  little  problem  in  acoustics. 

Whatever  the  operator  says  can  be  heard  all  over  the  house. 

Some    of   his    words    were    better    left    unsaid,    and    songs 
unsung. 

The   real   operator  knows  a  week  ahead   when   the  break- 
down is  coming. 

He  examines  his  machine  every  morning  to  see   where  it 
is  wearing. 

When  the  crank   stops  the  lamp  house  starts    (to  get  out 
of  the  way). 


170  MOTION   PICTURE   HANDBOOK 

Managers'  and  Operators' 
Trouble  Department. 


Every  week  tlie  Movinq:  Picture  World  devotes  three  or 
more  pages  to  the  solution  of  problems  that  confront  the 
operator  and  theater  manager.  The  following  are  selected 
at  random  to  give  an  idea  of  the  usefulness  and  nopularity  of 
this  department  in  which  every  reader  of  the  World  is  in- 
vited  to  participate. 

Setting  Carbons,  Sprocket  Holes  Show. — Charlestown.  W. 
Va..  writes  saying  that  the  snrocket  holes  show  on  right-hand 
side  of  picture  at  times.  Says  machine  is  a  new  one  and 
service  is  20  to  30-dav  stuff.  Asks  whv  blue  spot  shows  in 
renter  of  picture  and  if  setting  carbons  diflFerent  would  reduce 
the  noise.  Is  working  on  A.  C.  iio-volt  60-cycle  current, 
using  a  transformer. 

With  a  narrow,  steel  straightedge  see  if  your  top  and  in- 
termittent snrockets  and  gate  idlers  are  all  in  line  with  the 
anerture.  That  is  to  say,  see  that  none  of  them  set  to  one 
side  in  relation  to  the  aoerture.  Also  see  if  the  tension 
springs  bear  squarely  on  the  tracks.  Possiblv  one  spring  sets 
to  one  side  and  occasionally  pushes  the  film  over  a  trifle. 
Sometimes  the  showing  of  sprocket  holes  is  the  fault  of  the 
camera  that  took  the  orieinal  picture  or  the  printing  ma- 
chine that  made  the  oositive.  Rtit  this  onlv  occurs  semi- 
occasionally,  whereas  T  understand  your  trouble  hanncns  nuite 
frequentlv.  To  test  the  alignment  make  a  steel  straight- 
ede^e  half  an  inch  or  so  wide.  An  old  corset  steel  will  do 
if  it  is  perfectly  straight  on  one  edge.  Test  it  on  a  square 
or  machinist's  rule.  If  your  sprockets  or  idlers  are  out  of 
line,  line  them  up.  If  your  tension  springs  don't  bear  snuarely 
on  the  tracks  make  them  do  so.  As  regards  the  spot  in  vour 
curtain,  it  may  be  due  to  anv  one  of  several  thines.  First 
try  ^moving  your  lamphouse  backwards  and  forwards  as  far 
as  it  will  go.  If  that  don[t  take  it  out  see  to  it  that  the 
tip  of  your  lower  carbon  isn't  burning  up  in  front  of  the 
crater  on  the  upner  carbon;  if  it  is  then  the  spot  is  doubtless 
merely^  the  shadow  caused  bv  the  tip  of  the  lower  carbon 
which  is  set  too  far  ahead.  Move  it  back  iust  a  trifle.  If  this 
is  not  the  cause  then  try  two  7V2-inch  condensing  lenses.  In 
vour  sketch  the  carbons  are  set  all  right  but  the  lamp  sets 
straight  up  and  down.  If  vou  are  actually  using  it  that  way 
and  get  good  light  from  it  you  can  do  more  than  I  could. 


FOR    MANAGERS    AND    OPERATORS  171 

Angle  your  lamp  exactly  the  same  as  for  D.  C.  Possibly  you 
might  reduce  the  noise  by  a  diflferent  carbon  set,  but  it  would 
be  at  the  expense  of  light.  I  would  recommend  you  to  get 
a  copy  of  The  Moving  Picture  World  of  August  7,  1909.  in 
which  is  contained  (page  187)  illustrations  of  different  carbon 
sets,  both  A.  C.  and  D.  C,  price  10  cents. 

*     *     * 

Size  of  Picture. — Billings,  Mont.,  writes  asking  what  size 
of  picture  would  be  advisable  in  a  small  house,  with  50-foot 
throw;  also  whether  large  or  small  picture  has  any  effect  on 
the   flickering. 

Regarding  the  size  of  picture,  I  would  have  to  know  just 
what  you  mean  by  a  small  house.  I  may  say,  however,  that 
a  ID  by  12  picture  is  usually  accepted  as  life  size,  from  the 
fact  that  more  figures  appear  life  size  than  in  any  other  size 
picture  projected.  It  is  very  suitable  for  a  small  house.  The 
size  of  the  picture  makes  no  difference  as  regards  the  amount 
of  flickering.  This  is  about  the  only  advice  I  can  give  you 
without  knowing  the  exact  size  of  house,  height  of  ceiling,  etc. 


Size  of  Picture,  etc. — California  (name  suppressed)  writes: 
"What  size  picture  should  I  throw  at  84  feet  and  what  focal 
length  condenser  and  projection  lens  should  I  have?  How 
much  current  should  I  use  (A.  C.)  to  get  good  results  at 
this  distance?    How  may  I  determine  the  exact  current  flow? 

I  cannot  answer  your  query  except  in  this  way:  The  size 
picture  you  should  project  does  not  depend  at  all  on  the 
length  of  throw.  It  depends  on  the  size  of  your  house,  etc. 
Decide  what  size  picture  you  want  and  then  I'll  tell  you 
the  size  lenses  necessary  to  give  it,  but  remember  that,  while 
the  throw  has  practically  nothing  at  all  to  do  with  the  pict- 
ure's brilliancy,  its  size  has  and  the  larger  you  make  your 
picture  the  more  current  you  must  use  to  secure  a  given 
curtain  brilliancy.  You  have  a  certain  amount  of  light,  you 
understand,  and  when  you  increase  the  size  of  your  picture 
you  spread  that  light  around  over  more  surface.  Do  you 
see  the  point?  A  picture  12x14  has  more  than  twice  the 
number  of  square  feet  surface  to  illustrate  than  has  one  8x  10. 
You  must  therefore  have  twice  the  light  to  secure  the  same 
brilliancy  to  each  square  foot — do  you  see  the  point?  You 
cannot  determine  the  exact  number  of  amperes  used  without 
a  reliable  ammeter.  You  know  approximately  the  number 
vour  rheostat  or  transformer  is  supposed  to  give,  however. 
The  manufacturer  carefully  computes  the  amount  of  resist- 
ance necessary  to  pass  a  given  current  on  a  given  voltage 
and  builts  his  rheostat  or  transformer  accordingly.^  You 
may  compute  the  horse-power  of  your  arc  by  multiplying  the 
voltage  by  the  number  of  amperes  flowing,  which  gives  watts. 
Seven  hundred  and  forty-six  watts  equals  one  horse-power. 


172  MOTION    PICTURE   HANDBOOK 

Shaft  Level— Lenses.— New  York  City,  N.  Y.,  asks:  "(i)  I 
get  a  12  X  14-foot  picture  at  55  feet.  What  size  lens  have  I 
and  what  focal  length  condensing  lenses  should  I  have? 
(2)  How  can  I  measure  to  see  if  intermittent  shaft  of  Pow- 
ers No.  5  is  level?  (3)  Can  a  flag  be  projected  on  the  screen 
as  if  it  were  waving  by  means  of  some  mechanical  device 
or  rnust   one   have   a   film?" 

(i)  Multiply  throw  in  feet  by  exact  width  of  aperture  and 
divide  the  result  by  width  of  picture  in  feet.  Result  will  be 
equivalent  focus  of  lens.  In  your  case  it  is  about  a  four-inch 
lens  and  you  should  have  two  7^-inch  condensing  lenses. 
(2)  The  cam  shaft  of  Powers  No.  5  is  always  level,  provided 
the  bushings  are  not  worn  unevenly.  Measure  from  center 
of  cam  shaft  at  one  end  to  center  of  star  (intermittent)  shaft. 
Then  measure  the  same  at  other  end  and  if  the  shafts  are 
the  same  distance  apart  at  both  ends  the  intermittent  (star) 

shaft  is  level.     (4)    No.     A  film  is  necessary. 

*  *     * 

Ghost  Trouble.— Kansas  (name  suppressed  by  request), 
asks  the  cause  of  the  dark  spot  in  the  center  of  his  curtain. 
Says  he  has  tried  moving  lamp  backward  and  forward  as 
well  as  the  whole  laniphouse 

I  think,  neighbor,  you  probably  have  your  lower  carbon 
just  a  little  too  far  in  advance  of  the  upper  one.  This  causes 
the  lower  tip  to  burn  so  that  it  interferes  with  the  light,  caus- 
ing a  shadow  on  the  curtain. 

*  *     * 

Curtain  Coating. — Minneapolis,  Minn.,  asks  what  I  con- 
sider the  best  water-color  coating  for  a  plaster  curtain. 

The  best  thing  I  know  of  is  English  whiting  rnixed  with 
water  and  fish  glue,  to  which  has  been  added  a  little  ultra- 
marine blue,  enough  so  that  it  looks  a  trifle  blue  in  the 
pail,  but  be  careful  not  to  get  too  much.  There  should  be 
enough  glue  to  prevent  the  coating  from  rubbing  off  easily. 
English  whiting  may  be  had  of  any  wholesale  drug  store  at 
about    10    cents    per    pound,    and    five    pounds    is    more    than 

ample   for  any  curtain. 

*  *     * 

Inside  Decoration. — Mt.  Clemens,  Mich.,  asks  for  decor- 
ative scheme  for  his  theater.  Sends  sketch  and  says  it  seats 
430  people.  Has  18  inch  stucco  moulding  at  top  and  walls 
are  flat. 

I  think,  Mt.  Clemens,  unless  you  were  to  employ  a  high 
class  decorator,  you  would  be  able  to  procure  a  much  rnore 
satisfactory  effect  bv  the  use  of  papers  than  by  use  of  paints. 
It  is  quite  possible  to  work  out  some  really  beautiful  effects 
in  paper,  and  effects  which  by  no  manner  of  means  look 
cheap.  Whether  you  use  paint  or  paper,  however,  use  bur- 
lap for  the  dado,  either  of  shade  to  correspond  to  walls  or 
plain   burlap   to  be   painted   after   it   is   put  on.     No  matter 


FOR    MANAGERS    AND    OPERATORS  173 

whether  paint  or  paper  is  used,  block  out  both  ceiling  and 
walls  in  panels.  If  paint  is  used  you  may  secure,  from  any 
decorator,  stencils  suitable  to  properly  decorate  the  bor- 
ders of  the  panels.  If  paper  is  used  there  are  many  panel 
decorations  possible.  As  to  the  color  scheme,  there  are 
many,  but  a  combination  of  dark  red  dado,  russet  or  dove 
colored  walls,  with  panels  of  a  lighter  shade  and  ceilin"'  some 
light,  complimentary  color  will  look  well  as  also  will  dark 
green  dado,  lighter  green  walls  with  very  light  yellow  panels 
(greenish  yellow)  and  ceiling  same  as  panels  will  look  well. 
The  stucco  moulding  may  be  the  same  as  the  walls  or  panels 
and   picked   out   in   bronze   paint. 

Measuring  Lenses. — Franklin,  La.,  asks  which  end  of  a 
projection  lens  should  be  next  the  light  and  which  next  the 
wall  when  measuring  focal  length?  Also  asks  if  measurement 
should  be  from  point  midway  of  the  lens  to  the  wall. 

In  measuring  projection  lenses,  stereo  or  moving  picture, 
I  usually  hold  the  lens  as  it  would  be  in  the  machine,  were 
the  wall  the  lamphouse  and  the  window  the  curtain.  In  other 
words,  with  the  front  end  of  lens  next  the  window  or  source 
of  light,  and  with  back  end  towards  the  wall.  Projection 
lenses  are  made  up  of  two  sets  of  lenses  mounted  in  a  tube 
at  a  distance  from  each  other  varying  with  the  focal  length 
of  the  lens.  The  longer  the  focal  length  the  greater  will  be 
the  distance  between  the  two  lenses.  The  first  thing  I  do 
when  I  measure  a  lens  for  equivalent  focus  is  to  mark  on 
the  outer  surface  of  the  lens  tube,  or  jacket,  the  point  ex- 
actly half  way  between  the  two  lenses.  When  I  have  focused 
the  image  of  the  window,  or  lamp  filament  (if  I  use  a  lamp 
as  source  of  light),  I  measure  from  this  mark  for  "equivalent 
focus"  or  from  the  back  side  of  lens  nearest  wall  to  the  wall 
for  "back"  focus.  Dealers  and  exchanges  usually  use  the 
"back"  focus,  while  lens  manufacturers  generally  use  the 
"equivalent"  focus.  In  ordering  lenses  of  a  given  focal 
length  always  state  whether  you  refer  to  "back"  or  "equiva- 
lent" focus.  The  diiiference  between  the  back  and  equivalent 
focus  of  any  lens  will  be  the  back  focus  plus  half  the  dis- 
tance between  the  front  and  back  lenses. 

Current  Strength. — Nashville,  Tenn,  asks:  "(i)  What  is 
best  capacity  for  arc  on  direct  current  for  long  throw  on 
moving  picture  work?  (2)  Assuming  that  from  a  light  stand- 
point 60  amperes  at  50  volts  is  satisfactory,  would  there  be 
danger  of  the  film  catching  fire  due  to  the  intense  heat  of 
such  an  arc,  remembering  that  D.  C.  would  develop  greater 
heat  than  A.  C?  (3)  Is  it  possible  to  say  how  many  seconds 
it  would  require  to  set  film  on  fire  from  heat  of  a  60-ampere, 
50-volt  arc?" 

(i)  It  takes  no  jnore  current  to  project  a  given  size  picture 


174  MOTION   PICTURE  HANDBOOK 

roo  feet  than  it  does  fifty.  As  I  have  previously  explained, 
it  is  the  size  of  the  picture  that  determines  the  necessary 
light  strength  to  produce  a  given  brilliancy  and  not  the  dis- 
tance the  picture  is  proiected.  (2)  There  is  no  use  "assum- 
ing" that  a  60-ampere  D.  C.  arc  would  be  satisfactory,  for 
it  would  not.  I  have  known  of  sixty  amperes  being  used, 
but  I  have  seen  no  appreciable  advantage  in  increased  cur- 
rent strength  after  passing  the  fifty  ampere  mark.  You  can- 
not handle  the  arc  to  advantage  with  current  exceeding  fifty 
amperes — or  at  least  that  has  been  my  experience.  There 
would  be  no  danger  so  long  as  the  film  is  kept  mov- 
ing. I  would  not  care  to  risk  less  than  forty  feet  per 
minute  on  that  kind  of  light,  however.  (3)  One-half 
second  would  probably  be  sufficient.  It  would  depend 
to  some  extent  on  how  small  a  spot  you  had.  The  smaller 
the  greater  amount  of  heat,  of  course. 

*    *    * 

Carbons  Needle. — Sapulpa,  Okla..  writes  setting  forth  his 
troubles  as  follows:  "My  carbons  burn  back  from  the  point, 
sometimes  as  much  as  an  inch  or  two.  There  are  two  other 
houses  here  and  we  all  use  current  from  the  same  gener- 
ator. One  of  these  houses  and  myself  are  using  compens- 
arcs  and  the  other  fellow  has  a  rheostat  for  resistance.  They 
both  seem  to  be  using  more  current  than  I  do  vet  their 
carbons  burn  fine.  The  same  trouble  has  existed  in  this 
house  for  a  long  time — long  before  I  became  its  ooerator. 
Can  you  suggest  a  remedy  or  tell  me  what  is  wrong?" 

T  have  not  quoted  all  this  letter,  but  sufficient  to  show 
what  Sapulpa  is  up  against.  By  "burning  his  carbons  back," 
Sapulpa  undoubtedly  means  what  is  called  "needling."  That 
is  to  say,  his  carbons  burn  to  a  long,  slim  point.  This^  is 
caused  by  undue  heating  in  the  carbon,  the  effect  of  which 
is  to  burn  out  the  binder  and  allow  the  carbon  to  drop  away 
(disintegrate)  without  being  consumed  (volatilized)  in  the 
arc.  Sapulpa  will  find  a  heap  of  fine,  black  carbon  in  the 
bottom  of  his  lamphouse  just  under  the  carbons.  Needling 
may  indicate  several  things,  or  any  one  of  several,  rather. 
You  may  be  using  carbons  which  are  too  soft.  You  may  be 
using  carbons  of  poor  quality.  It  may  be  that  your  trans- 
former (Compensarc)  is  giving  an  excess  of  current,  some 
error  having  been  made  in  its  constniction  (windings).  I 
would  suggest  that  you  have  the  electric  light  company  test 
your  current  flow  with  an  ammeter,  if  possible.  But  first 
proceed  as  follows:  With  a  file  clean  out  the  inside  of  your 
carbon  arms  thoroughly  so  that  the  carbon  will  make  good 
electrical  contact  with  the  arms.  Get  a  few  of  the  other 
fellow's  carbons  and  put  them  in  your  lamp  for  a  trial. 
Let  the  other  fellow  try  some  of  your  carbons.  Thus  you 
will  determine  whether  or  no  the  fault  is  in  the  carbons 
themselves.     If  not,  then  it  is  pretty  near  a  cinch  that  you 


FOR    MANAGERS    AND    OPERATORS  175 

are  getting  too  much  current.  I  assume  that  you  are  using 
^^  cored  carbons,  of  course.  Because  the  other  fellow  seems 
to  be  drawing  more  current  than  you  it  does  not  follow 
that  it  is  the  fact.  Remember  this:  needling  is  caused  by 
poor  binder  in  the  carbon  or  else  by  excessive  heat  in  the 
carbons.  The  first  is  an  easily  discoverable  fault,  since  one 
has  but  to  try  other  carbons.  The  latter  can  be  found  by 
searching  for  the  cause  of  the  heating. 

*     *     * 

Film  Buckles  or  Bad  Lens. — Troy,  Ohio,  says:  "We  notice, 
especially  when  any  printing  appears,  that  the  outside  of 
picture  appears  plain,  whereas  its  center  is  out  of  focus.  In 
printed  matter  the  central  letters  appear  confused." 

Taking  into  consideration  the  machine  you  have,  I  would 
almost  swear  your  trouble  lies  in  the  projection  lens.  In 
other  words,  you  have  a  poor  lens.  If  there  is  another  house 
in  your  town  try  to  borrow  their  lens  long  enough  to  test  it 
on  your  machine  and  if  the  trouble  disappears  with  its  use 
the  case  is  proven.  Otherwise  have  your  film  exchange  send 
you  a  lens  to  try  out.  It  is  also  possible  the  trouble  lies  in 
your  aperture  plate  or  tension  springs.  If  tracks  are  worn 
on  aperture  plate  or  if  one  or  both  tension  springs  set  too 
far  in  or  out  (do  not  bear  squarely  on  tracks)  it  will  prob- 
ably cause  the  film  to  cup  out  or  in  a  trifle  as  it  passes  the 
aperture  and  this  would  produce  exactly  the  condition  you 
describe.  Remedy  is  a  new  aperture  plate  or  set  springs 
right,  as  the  case  may  be.  I,  for  certain  reasons,  believe,  how- 
ever, the  fault  lies  in  your  lens.     Cheap  projection  lenses  do 

not  have  a  flat  field. 

*     *     * 

Dirty  Sprockets. — St.  Louis,  Mo.,  writes:  "Does  or  does  not 
the  dirt  which  gradually  collects  on  the  face,  or  rim,  of  the 
sprockets  do  any  harm.  Can  you  tell  me  some  quick,  easy 
method  of  removing  same.  I  clean  ofi  the  face  of  all  my 
sprockets  every  day  before  the  first  show.  The  operator  of 
a  nearby  house  ridicules  me  for  it  and  calls  me  a  'grand- 
mother.'    What  do  you  think  about  it?" 

I  think  the  operator  of  the  nearby  house  simply  makes  a 
display  of  his  ignorance.  Certainly  the  dirt  does  harm.  It 
most  decidedly  makes  the  film  jump  if  it  is  on  the  inter- 
mittent sprocket  and  helps  along  any  inclination  the  film 
may  have  to  climb  the  teeth  of  the  other  sprockets  if  it  is  on 
them.  The  best,  easiest  and  quickest  method  of  cleaning  the 
sprockets  is  by  brushing  them  with  a  stiff  bristled  toothbrush. 
Every  operating  room  should  have  a  toothbrush  for  this 
purpose.  In  this  connection  let  me  again  say  that  the  whole 
machine  should  be  kept  scrupulously  clean.  A  dirty,  oil- 
covered  machine  infers  a  sloppy  workman.  A  sloppy  work- 
man in  turn  infers  almost  anything  else  than  a  first  class 
show. 


176  MOTION   PICTURE   HANDBOOK 

Setting   Shutters. — New    York   City,    N.    Y.,   writes   asking 
that    I    give    illustrated    instructions    for    setting   the    shutter 
of  Power's  No.  5,  Power's  No.  6,  Edison  one  and  Edison  two 
pin  machines  and  the  Motiograph. 

I  hardly  think  this  is  feasible  or  even  desirable.  There 
are  so  many  different  models  of  the  various  machines, 
mostly  with  a  somewhat  diliferent  shutter  for  each  model, 
that  that  one  thing  would  render  such  instructions  of  slight 
value.  I  would  much  rather  try  to  get  the  operators  to 
understand  the  underlying  principle  of  the  shutter  and  they 
would  then  be  able  to  set  any  shutter  with  very  little  trouble. 
It  must  be  understood  that  the  office  of  the  shutter  is  to 
cut  off  the  light  while  the  intermittent  sprocket  is  in  motion. 
That  is  what  the  shutter  is  for  and  it  is  for  nothing  else 
under  the  sun.  The  wide  blade  is  always  the  one  that 
does  the  business,  the  narrow  blade  (or  blades,  where  shut- 
ter is  in  two  pieces,  as  in  the  Motiograph)  being  merely 
to  help  to  eliminate  the  flicker.  The  narrow  blade  is  dis- 
regarded utterly  in  setting  any  shutter.  Now,  in  order  that 
the  shutter  cut  as  small  a  percentage  of  the  light  as  is 
practical  without  developing  a  "travel  ghost"  (white  streaks 
shooting  up  or  down  frOm  white  objects  in  the  picture  or 
from  letters  in  a  title),  the  shutter  is  made  narrow  enough 
so  that  it  does  not  quite  cover  the  aperture  during  all  the 
time  the  film  is  in  motion.  It  has  been  found  that  although 
the  film  may  start  to  move  while  the  aperture  is  still  open 
about  one-fourth  (I  speak  of  all  shutters  except  the  double 
wing  variety  like  the  Motiograph  now)  there  is  no  evil 
effect.  This  is  called  making  the  shutter  "late."  But,  on  the 
other  hand,  however,  it  is  usually  necessary  that  the  shutter 
cover  the  entire  aperture  until  the  film  has  stopped  moving. 
In  other  words,  while  it  is  possible  to  allow  some  leeway 
at  the  beginning  of  the  movement,  none  is  permissible  at  the 
last  end.  One  thing  I  must  mention,  viz.:  where  the  shtit- 
ter  does  not  travel  with  the  frameup  carriage  the  frameup 
should  alwavs  be  set  midway  of  its  travel  before  setting  the 
shutter.  With  the  Motiograph,  if  you  have  the  two  wings 
just  barely  come  together  in  exactly  the  center  of  the 
aperture  just  as  the  intermittent  sprocket  starts  to  mov« 
you  will  be  all  right.  A'--  to  the  outside  shutters  (shutter* 
in  front  of  the  lens,  such  as  the  Power's  No.  6),  they  art 
easier  than  easy.  Just  loosen  the  screws  which  hold  it  un 
til  it  will  slip  under  slight  pressure.  Now  put  in  a  film  an*^ 
run  a  couple  of  feet,  stop  and  slip  the  shutter  a  trifle,  rur 
some  more,  slip  the  shutter  a  little  more  and  so  on  until 
you  get  it  exactly  right.  You  can  tell  when  it  is  just  right 
by  framing  up  a  little  past  the  lower  dividing  line  and  a  little 
down  past  the  upper  dividing  line.  If  the  dark  dividing  lines 
between  the  pictures  look  all  right  and  not  streaked  and 
your  picture  looks  O.  K.,  too,  you  have  it  just  right. 


BAUSCH   &    LOMB 

PROJECTION 

AND 

CONDENSING   LENSES 

SEND  US  YOUR  SPECIFICATIONS 
AND    WE    WILL    QUOTE  PRICES 

Projection    Lens    booklet    containing    descriptive 
price  list  of  our  regular  line  sent  on  request. 

Bausch  &  Lomb  Optical  Co.    /^^ 


Rochester,  N.  Y.  '<^''™' 


THE  LANG  REWINDER 

(PATENTED) 

STANDARD  THROUGHOUT  THE  WORLD 


For  Sale  bx  all  Leading 
FILM    EXCHANGES 

The  Lang  Manufacturing  Co. 

Olean,  New  YorK         -        -        -         U.  S.  A.. 

177 


178 


EDISON 

Projecting  Kinetoscope 


UNDERWRITER'S    MODEL   TYPE    '' B  " 

The  Perfect  Machine 

In  a  Class  by  Itself 

Beats  Them  All  In  Competitive 

Demonstration 

Highest  Efficiency  Combined  With 

Durability 

Absolutely  Flickerless,  Steady  and 

Brilliant  Pictures 

Minimum  Cost  for  Repairs 

Simplicity  of  Operation 

Artistic  Appearance 

SEND  FOR  DESCRIPTIVE  CATALOG 

EDISON  MANUFACTIRING  CO. 

n  Lakeside  Ave.,  ORANGE,  N.  J.  90  Wabash  Ave.,  CHICAGO 


179 


-iiiirii  "r^- 


"Electra" 


•TRADE     MARK' 


(PINK  LABEL) 

'Uk  The  standard  high- 
grade  carbons  for  mov- 
ing picture  projection, 
gives  a  steady,  white,  brilliant  light,  economy 
of  current  and  longer  life  than  any  carbon  on 
the  market,  and  can  be  used  successfully  with 
any  type  of  current  saver. 

"EXCELLO" 

Metal  Vein  Carbons 

produce  a  much 
higher  candle  power 
with  less  loss  in  volt- 
age than  any  other 
foreign  or  domestic 
make  of  flaming  car- 
bons. 

A  trial  will  convince 
you.  Suitable  for  all 
types  of  flaming  arc  lamps. 

HUGO   REISINGER 


11  BROADWAY 


NEW  YORK 


SOIvE  IMPORTER  FOR  UNITED  STATES,  CANADA  and  MEXICO 


180 


MAB»«' 


This  bell  on  film  or  on  machine 
Marks  highest  grade  wherever  seen. 


181 


THE  IMPROVED 

Motio^raph 

No.     1    A.    Model    1910 

Motion  Picture  Machine 


H'i-.?.B  IS  BY  LONG  ODDS  THE  BEST 

■  MACHINE   MADE. 

I  It  Projects 

^^^  The    MOST    BRILLIANT    PICTURES 

^^^  ROCK     STEADY     PICTURES 

FLICKERLESS   PICTURES 
It    has     a     PATENTED     DOUBLE     CONE     SHUTTER 
that  produces  pictnrcs   which    for  brilliancy,   smoothness  and   steadiness 
CANNOT    BE    APPROACHED    BY    ANY    OTHER    TYPE. 
It  is  patented.     No  other  machine  has  it. 
It    Is    a    wonderful    improvement    over    other    makes.      The    MOTIO- 
GKAPH      LOOKS      DIFFERENT.      IT      IS     DIFFERENT      AND     THE 
PICTURES     IT     PHO.TECTS     .\RE     DFCIDRDLY     DIFFERENT. 

It  is  Simple,  Rigid,  Artistic  and  Durable,  and  projects  a  picture 
that  is  ASTONISIIINGTA'  BETTER  tlian  by  other  machines. 
THE  VALUE  OF  A  MOTION  PICTURE  SHOW  IS  ALL  IN  THE 
PICTURES. 
It's  the  finality  of  the  pictures  that  bring  the  continued  and 
increased  patronage,  and  the  more  perfect  they  are,  the  more  they 
are  appreciated,  while  poor  quality  in  the  pictures  will  quickly  ruin 
a    show   business. 

The  Greatest  Success  in  this  business  may  be  attained  only  by 
the   use   of   the   BE.ST   M.\CH1NE    that    money   will   buy. 

THAT'S  THE  MOTIOGRAPH 

IF  YOU  NEED  A  MACHINE,  you  can't  afford  to  consider  any 
otiier.  The  Mntiojrrapli  doesn't  cost  -any  more  money  than  other 
machines,  but  it's  wortli  many  times  the  value  of  any  of  them, 
and  will   be  found   a   bis  money  saver,   as  well   as  a   his  money  earner. 

The  Motiosraph  is  dosiffned  especially  for  tlie  ITE.WY  CONSTANT 
CRIND   and  the  oxactinjr  work  of  the  MOTION   PICTITRB  THEATER. 

The  First  Motiograph  has  been  runnins  THREE  YEARS.  20 
SHOWS  PER  DAY.  and  owner  says  PRACTICALLY  GOOD  AS  NEW. 
Motiofrraplis  need   little   attention   except   oilin?. 

IT'S  EXTREMELY  SIMPLE  AND  PARTS  EASY  TO  GET  AT. 
With  only  a  screwdriver,   almost  strip  It  and  assemble  In  ten  minutes. 

FOR  DURABILITY  the  Motiosraph  is  FAR  AHEAD  of  other 
machines  and   WE   CAN   PROVE  IT  by  What  Users   Say. 

Read    "what  users  say"   and  .von   will   be  convinced. 

We  GIT.\RANTER  that  the  Motiopraph  will  do  what  we  say  it  will. 

QUALITY  WINS.  Discard  yoi.r  old  machine,  get  a  MOTIOGRAPH 
and  SEE   YOUR   BUSINESS  GROW. 

IT'S   A   WONDERFUL  JfACHINE.   astonishingly  tetter  than  others. 

Write   for  Catalog  and   particulars. 

Manufactured    and   .Tobbed   bv 

ENTERPRISE   OPTICAL  MFG.  CO. 

564-572    W,    Randolph    St.,    CHICAGO,    U.    S.    A. 

European   Agrent 

J.   F.   BROCKLISS LONDON,    PARIS   and   BERLIN 

For  Sale  by   all   Progressive  Dealers. 

182 


PATHE 

Professional 
Model 

FLICKERLESS  ::  STEADY 
REQUIRES   NO  REPAIRS 

Built  Entirely  in  Europe 

SUPERIOR  WORKMANSHIP 
::     ::     BEST   MATERIAL    ::     :: 


The  U.  S.  Government 

USED  BY  ^'  ^'  ^^"^®****P« 
William    Hammerstein 

■  All     Leading    Theatres 


THIS  IS  THE  TRUE  TEST 

Gall  and  See   the    Machine    in    Operation 


PATHE    FRERES 

NEW   YORK:  CHICAGO: 

41  West  23(h  Street  35  Randolph  Street 


183 


Power's    Cameragraph 

=  No.  6  = 

Unqualifiedly  the  best   Moving 
Picture    Machine    ever    made 


Simple, 

Easy 

Running, 

Durable, 

Quiet, 

Steady, 

Flickerless 


Guaranteed  free  of  repairs  for  one  year. 

The    only    machine    sold    under    such    a 
guarantee. 

Manufactured  by  (he 

NICHOLAS    POWER    COMPANY 

115  Nassau  Street 
New  York 


184 


99 


The  "STANDARD 

THE  MACHINE  THAT  GIVES  RESULTS 


FIREPROOF— FLICKERLESS 

Only   Machine  Approved  by  the  New  York 

Board  of  Fire  Underwriters  Where 

Motor  is  Used 


WRITE  FOR  ILLUSTRATED  CATALOGUE.    DEPT.  H.B. 


MANUFACTURED  BY  THE 


American  Moving  Picture  Machine  Co. 

101  Beekman  Street       :       :       New  York 

Licensed    by    the    Motion    Picture    Patents    Company 


185 


Managers  and  Operators 


You  Want  to  Know  Each  Week  the 


Synopses  of  Licensed 
Films. 

Synopses  of  Independ- 
ent Films. 


Release  Dates  of  Li- 
censed Films. 

Release  Dates  of  In- 
dependent Films. 


You    Should    Read    Each     Week 


Answers  to  Operators' 
Questions. 

Timely  Articles  on 
Film  Manufactur- 
ing and  Selling. 

Tlieatre  Equipment, 
Theatre  Manage- 
ment, Theatre 
Construction,  Pro- 
jection, etc.,  etc. 


Advertisements  of  the 
Leading  Film  Man- 
ufacturers,Machine 
Manufacturers, 
Manufacturers  of 
Electrical  Equip- 
ment and  Apparat- 
us,Theatre  Seating, 
Carbons  and  all  the 
leading  firm$  in 
the  moving  picture 
trade. 


EVERY  WEEK,    ONLY   $2.00   PER  YEAR 
Canada     and    Foreign    Countries,    $2.50 


THE 


Moving  Picture  World 


125  EAST  23d  STREET 


NEW  YORK  CITY 


186 


^tUBRARYQ^ 


^OFCAUF0% 


^OFCAUFO^ 


^^;iHVHan-i^    ^^AHvaan-u^ 


^5MFUNIVER%      ^•lOSAWCFlfj'^ 


^5^UNIVER%.      ^lOSANCnfi^ 


^^EOMIVER% 


^lOSANCElQ-^ 


^tUBRARY^?/.      -s^jX-UBRARYO^. 


A1AE«NIVER%. 


"^/iiflMNnawv^     ^oinvDjo'^    ^«)jiiv3jo^ 


^OFCAllFOff^     ^OFCAlIFORi^ 


^IOSANCEUTa 

fit     ^^S.  V  ?rt 

o 


<<^33NVSO\'^ 


%a3AiNflmv^ 


<?IUBRARY<7a 

1 


-^tUBRARYQ^ 


^<yojnv3jo^ 


j;j;OFO\UF0«^      ^OFCAUFOM^ 


^^ME•UNIVCR% 


^lOSANCHG;^ 


<5MEUNIVER%. 


^IOSANCEUTa 


<!^EIINIVER% 


^lOSANCn^^ 
o 


^t-UBRARY(9/^ 


"^yaaAiNn-iwv 

^lUBRARYO^ 


-^lUBRARY^A 


UCLA-Theater  Arts  Library 

TR  890  R39m  1910 


% 


L  006  288  775  7  ^| 


^v%ijivmi  iV 


<^EUNIVER%      ^lOSANCEl^^        ^OFCAUF0«i| 

^^NV'SOi'^    ^ajAiNd-iv^N"        -'&Aavnan-#' 


/A.       A^clOSANCE^Tx 

S      B 


^HIBRARVQf, 


)i  ? 

J  -n        O 

f  O        ii. 


:2 
^OFCAUFOJK^ 


^OF'CAUFORj^ 


^<?A!vaan-i# 


-5X\E0NIVER% 


»NIVER% 


%3DNVS0\^ 


7^     ^lUBRARYO^. 

li  i  _ 

5^     ^OFimiFOJ?^ 


<^5X\EUtJIVER% 


^lOSANCElG^ 


^J^DNVSO# 


«^53aEUNIVER% 


I 

%a3A!Nnirt^ 


%avaani^      ^i^iiONVsoi'^ 


%a3AINIl-1\^^ 


^.yojnv3jo'^ 


^OF'CAUFOff^ 


^AHvaan^ 


r/A      a;^10SANCEI%        -^lUBRARYOc.      <JX-IIBRARY^/^,         .5MBNIVER5/A 


,,t£Jlj 

^^BSWSj^            •':'.■i■:•^^i^:■■■^^i'H:w;;:;^^^;a?i,Up